From a540e256be85df29c60ac323d4460c6cde1d9350 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Karl Berry Date: Tue, 3 Jan 2006 00:00:18 +0000 Subject: trunk/Master/texmf/doc git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@42 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751 --- Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/a2ping.1 | 380 +++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2pl.1 | 275 ++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2tfm.1 | 25 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allcm.1 | 28 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allec.1 | 1 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allneeded.1 | 30 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/amstex.1 | 69 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bg5conv.1 | 94 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bibtex.1 | 146 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bzip2.1 | 453 +++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cef5conv.1 | 111 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefconv.1 | 101 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefsconv.1 | 111 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cfftot1.1 | 87 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cont-de.1 | 458 +++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cont-en.1 | 458 +++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cont-nl.1 | 458 +++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctangle.1 | 1 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctie.1 | 55 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweave.1 | 1 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweb.1 | 133 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/detex.1 | 126 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dmp.1 | 60 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dt2dv.1 | 156 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dv2dt.1 | 715 +++++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2fax.1 | 22 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2tty.1 | 131 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvibook.1 | 53 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviconcat.1 | 46 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvicopy.1 | 22 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvidvi.1 | 127 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvihp.1 | 49 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj.1 | 275 ++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj2p.1 | 1 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4.1 | 1 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4l.1 | 1 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj6.1 | 1 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdfm.1 | 322 +++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdft.1 | 36 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipng.1 | 483 ++++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvips.1 | 517 ++++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvired.1 | 63 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviselect.1 | 129 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitodvi.1 | 137 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitomp.1 | 17 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitype.1 | 74 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/e2pall.1 | 55 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ebb.1 | 34 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/eplain.1 | 103 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epsffit.1 | 51 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epstopdf.1 | 54 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/etex.1 | 429 +++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extconv.1 | 94 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extractres.1 | 47 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fdf2tex.1 | 31 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixdlsrps.1 | 24 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixfmps.1 | 24 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixmacps.1 | 27 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpsditps.1 | 24 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpspps.1 | 24 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixscribeps.1 | 24 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixtpps.1 | 24 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwfwps.1 | 24 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwpps.1 | 24 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwwps.1 | 24 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil-sys.1 | 1 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil.1 | 80 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fontinst.1 | 45 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/getafm.1 | 29 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/getnonfreefonts.1 | 182 ++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftodvi.1 | 167 ++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftopk.1 | 103 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftype.1 | 97 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gsftopk.1 | 301 ++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gzip.1 | 478 ++++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/hbf2gf.1 | 736 +++++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/includeres.1 | 41 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/info.1 | 89 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/infokey.1 | 41 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/install-info.1 | 78 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpseaccess.1 | 63 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsepath.1 | 1 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsereadlink.1 | 32 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsestat.1 | 53 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsetool.1 | 106 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhere.1 | 50 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhich.1 | 160 ++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsexpand.1 | 1 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lacheck.1 | 113 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lambda.1 | 292 ++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latex.1 | 70 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mag.1 | 68 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makeindex.1 | 1203 ++++++++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makeinfo.1 | 205 ++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makempx.1 | 89 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makempy.1 | 60 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mf-nowin.1 | 1 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mf.1 | 501 ++++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mft.1 | 134 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkindex.1 | 42 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkocp.1 | 50 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkofm.1 | 33 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexfmt.1 | 1 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexlsr.1 | 46 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexmf.1 | 59 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexpk.1 | 122 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktextfm.1 | 68 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mmafm.1 | 183 ++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mmpfb.1 | 211 ++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mpost.1 | 478 ++++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mpto.1 | 68 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/newer.1 | 41 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvicopy.1 | 1 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvips.1 | 1 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvitype.1 | 1 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ofm2opl.1 | 91 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/omega.1 | 292 ++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/opl2ofm.1 | 74 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otfinfo.1 | 143 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otftotfm.1 | 1473 ++++++++++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otp2ocp.1 | 41 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/outocp.1 | 44 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ovf2ovp.1 | 87 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ovp2ovf.1 | 78 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/oxdvi.1 | 1 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/patgen.1 | 170 ++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfetex.1 | 487 ++++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdflatex.1 | 1 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdftex.1 | 479 ++++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pfb2pfa.1 | 19 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pk2bm.1 | 39 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pktogf.1 | 103 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pktype.1 | 85 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pltotf.1 | 74 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pooltype.1 | 45 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2frag.1 | 41 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2pk.1 | 156 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psbook.1 | 42 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pslatex.1 | 44 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psmerge.1 | 36 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psnup.1 | 160 ++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psresize.1 | 81 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psselect.1 | 84 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pstops.1 | 166 ++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/rubibtex.1 | 63 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/rumakeindex.1 | 63 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/sjisconv.1 | 94 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1ascii.1 | 51 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1asm.1 | 96 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1binary.1 | 42 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1disasm.1 | 96 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1dotlessj.1 | 96 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1lint.1 | 48 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1mac.1 | 62 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1reencode.1 | 149 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1testpage.1 | 62 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1unmac.1 | 71 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tangle.1 | 180 ++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tcdialog.1 | 217 ++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tex.1 | 541 ++++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texconfig-sys.1 | 1 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texconfig.1 | 27 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdoc.1 | 94 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdoctk.1 | 217 ++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texexec.1 | 574 ++++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texfind.1 | 72 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texfont.1 | 84 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texhash.1 | 1 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texi2dvi.1 | 95 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texi2html.1 | 164 ++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texi2pdf.1 | 1 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texindex.1 | 47 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texlinks.1 | 65 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texshow.1 | 69 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texutil.1 | 266 ++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tftopl.1 | 117 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/thumbpdf.1 | 100 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tie.1 | 39 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2afm.1 | 74 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2pk.1 | 311 ++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2pt1.1 | 619 ++++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2tfm.1 | 1182 ++++++++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttfdump.1 | 124 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/updmap-sys.1 | 1 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/updmap.1 | 260 ++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vftovp.1 | 100 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vlna.1 | 130 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vptovf.1 | 68 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/weave.1 | 77 + Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xdvi.1 | 4101 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xdvizilla.1 | 115 + 191 files changed, 31017 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/a2ping.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2pl.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2tfm.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allcm.1 create mode 120000 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allec.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allneeded.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/amstex.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bg5conv.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bibtex.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bzip2.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cef5conv.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefconv.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefsconv.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cfftot1.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cont-de.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cont-en.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cont-nl.1 create mode 120000 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctangle.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctie.1 create mode 120000 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweave.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweb.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/detex.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dmp.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dt2dv.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dv2dt.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2fax.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2tty.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvibook.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviconcat.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvicopy.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvidvi.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvihp.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj.1 create mode 120000 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj2p.1 create mode 120000 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4.1 create mode 120000 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4l.1 create mode 120000 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj6.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdfm.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdft.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipng.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvips.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvired.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviselect.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitodvi.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitomp.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitype.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/e2pall.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ebb.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/eplain.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epsffit.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epstopdf.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/etex.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extconv.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extractres.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fdf2tex.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixdlsrps.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixfmps.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixmacps.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpsditps.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpspps.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixscribeps.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixtpps.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwfwps.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwpps.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwwps.1 create mode 120000 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil-sys.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fontinst.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/getafm.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/getnonfreefonts.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftodvi.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftopk.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftype.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gsftopk.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gzip.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/hbf2gf.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/includeres.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/info.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/infokey.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/install-info.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpseaccess.1 create mode 120000 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsepath.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsereadlink.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsestat.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsetool.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhere.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhich.1 create mode 120000 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsexpand.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lacheck.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lambda.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latex.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mag.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makeindex.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makeinfo.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makempx.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makempy.1 create mode 120000 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mf-nowin.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mf.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mft.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkindex.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkocp.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkofm.1 create mode 120000 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexfmt.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexlsr.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexmf.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexpk.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktextfm.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mmafm.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mmpfb.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mpost.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mpto.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/newer.1 create mode 120000 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvicopy.1 create mode 120000 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvips.1 create mode 120000 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvitype.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ofm2opl.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/omega.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/opl2ofm.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otfinfo.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otftotfm.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otp2ocp.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/outocp.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ovf2ovp.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ovp2ovf.1 create mode 120000 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/oxdvi.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/patgen.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfetex.1 create mode 120000 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdflatex.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdftex.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pfb2pfa.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pk2bm.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pktogf.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pktype.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pltotf.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pooltype.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2frag.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2pk.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psbook.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pslatex.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psmerge.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psnup.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psresize.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psselect.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pstops.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/rubibtex.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/rumakeindex.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/sjisconv.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1ascii.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1asm.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1binary.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1disasm.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1dotlessj.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1lint.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1mac.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1reencode.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1testpage.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1unmac.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tangle.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tcdialog.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tex.1 create mode 120000 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texconfig-sys.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texconfig.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdoc.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdoctk.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texexec.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texfind.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texfont.1 create mode 120000 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texhash.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texi2dvi.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texi2html.1 create mode 120000 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texi2pdf.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texindex.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texlinks.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texshow.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texutil.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tftopl.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/thumbpdf.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tie.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2afm.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2pk.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2pt1.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2tfm.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttfdump.1 create mode 120000 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/updmap-sys.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/updmap.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vftovp.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vlna.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vptovf.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/weave.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xdvi.1 create mode 100644 Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xdvizilla.1 (limited to 'Master/texmf/doc/man/man1') diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/a2ping.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/a2ping.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ec06d892da8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/a2ping.1 @@ -0,0 +1,380 @@ +.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.13 +.\" +.\" Standard preamble: +.\" ======================================================================== +.de Sh \" Subsection heading +.br +.if t .Sp +.ne 5 +.PP +\fB\\$1\fR +.PP +.. +.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) +.if t .sp .5v +.if n .sp +.. +.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text +.ft CW +.nf +.ne \\$1 +.. +.de Ve \" End verbatim text +.ft R +.fi +.. +.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will +.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left +.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a +.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to +.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' +.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>. +.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr +.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' +.ie n \{\ +. ds -- \(*W- +. ds PI pi +. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch +. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch +. ds L" "" +. ds R" "" +. ds C` "" +. ds C' "" +'br\} +.el\{\ +. ds -- \|\(em\| +. ds PI \(*p +. ds L" `` +. ds R" '' +'br\} +.\" +.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for +.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index +.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the +.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. +.if \nF \{\ +. de IX +. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" +.. +. nr % 0 +. rr F +.\} +.\" +.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes +.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. +.hy 0 +.if n .na +.\" +.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). +.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. +. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff +.if n \{\ +. ds #H 0 +. ds #V .8m +. ds #F .3m +. ds #[ \f1 +. ds #] \fP +.\} +.if t \{\ +. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) +. ds #V .6m +. ds #F 0 +. ds #[ \& +. ds #] \& +.\} +. \" simple accents for nroff and troff +.if n \{\ +. ds ' \& +. ds ` \& +. ds ^ \& +. ds , \& +. ds ~ ~ +. ds / +.\} +.if t \{\ +. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" +. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' +. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' +. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' +. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' +. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' +.\} +. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents +.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' +.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' +.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] +.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' +.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' +.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] +.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] +.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e +.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E +. \" corrections for vroff +.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' +.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' +. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) +.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ +\{\ +. ds : e +. ds 8 ss +. ds o a +. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga +. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy +. ds th \o'bp' +. ds Th \o'LP' +. ds ae ae +. ds Ae AE +.\} +.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C +.\" ======================================================================== +.\" +.IX Title "A2PING 1" +.TH A2PING 1 "2004-05-26" "perl v5.8.1" "User Contributed Perl Documentation" +.ds pts-dev \*[.T] +.do if '\*[.T]'ascii' .ds pts-dev tty +.do if '\*[.T]'ascii8' .ds pts-dev tty +.do if '\*[.T]'latin1' .ds pts-dev tty +.do if '\*[.T]'nippon' .ds pts-dev tty +.do if '\*[.T]'utf8' .ds pts-dev tty +.do if '\*[.T]'cp1047' .ds pts-dev tty +.do if '\*[pts-dev]'tty' \{\ +.ll 79 +.pl 33333v +.nr IN 2n +.\} +.ad n + +.SH "NAME" +a2ping.pl \-\- convert between PS, EPS and PDF and other page description +formats +.SH "SYNOPSIS" +.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" +\&\& \fBa2ping.pl\fR [\fB\-\-\fR]\fBhelp\fR + \fBa2ping.pl\fR [\fB\-\-\fR]\fBdoc\fR + \fBa2ping.pl\fR [\fIoptions\fR] <\fIinputfile\fR> [[\fIoutformat\fR:] \fIoutputfile\fR] +.SH "DESCRIPTION" +.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" +\&\fBa2ping\fR is a \s-1UNIX\s0 command line utility written in Perl that +converts many raster image and vector graphics formats to \s-1EPS\s0 or \s-1PDF\s0 and +other page description formats. Accepted input file formats are: \s-1PS\s0 +(PostScript), \s-1EPS\s0, \s-1PDF\s0, \s-1PNG\s0, \s-1JPEG\s0, \s-1TIFF\s0, \s-1PNM\s0, \s-1BMP\s0, \s-1GIF\s0, \s-1LBM\s0, \s-1XPM\s0, \s-1PCX\s0, +\&\s-1TGA\s0. Accepted output formats are: \s-1EPS\s0, \s-1PCL5\s0, \s-1PDF\s0, \s-1PDF1\s0, \s-1PBM\s0, \s-1PGM\s0, \s-1PPM\s0, +\&\s-1PS\s0, markedEPS, markedPS, \s-1PNG\s0, \s-1XWD\s0, \s-1BMP\s0, \s-1TIFF\s0, \s-1JPEG\s0, \s-1GIF\s0, \s-1XPM\s0. +\&\fBa2ping\fR delegates the low-level work to +Ghostscript (\s-1GS\s0), \fBpdftops\fR and \fBsam2p\fR. \fBa2ping\fR fixes many glitches +during the \s-1EPS\s0 to \s-1EPS\s0 conversion, so its output is often more compatible +and better embeddable than its input. +.PP +Without the \f(CW\*(C`\-\-below\*(C'\fR option, it is guarenteed to start at the 0,0 +coordinate. \f(CW\*(C`\-\-below\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`\-\-hires\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\-v\*(C'\fR are recommended options. +.PP +The page size is set exactly corresponding to the BoundingBox. +This means that when Ghostscript renders it, the result needs no +cropping, and the \s-1PDF\s0 MediaBox is correct. +.PP +If the bounding box is not right, of course, you have problems. If you +feed crap in, you get crap. But you can supply the +\&\fB\-\-bboxfrom=compute\-gs\fR option to make \s-1GS\s0 recompute the bounding box. +.PP +The name of the input file doesn't matter \*(-- \fBa2ping\fR detects the file +format based on the first few bytes of the file. The name of the output +file matters if \fIoutformat\fR is missing from the command line: then the +extension of the output file determines the FileFormat (\fIoutformat\fR). +.SH "EXTERNAL PROGRAMS" +.IX Header "EXTERNAL PROGRAMS" +The internal file format of \fBa2ping.pl\fR is \s-1PS/EPS\s0. Everything read is +first converted to \s-1PS\s0 or \s-1EPS\s0, then processed by \fBa2ping.pl\fR, then +converted to the output format. +.PP +To analyse the bounding box and other properties of non-EPS \s-1PS\s0 files +(and \s-1EPS\s0 files with option \fB\-\-bboxfrom\fR other than \fB=guess\fR), \s-1GS\s0 is +used. Converting \s-1PS\s0 to \s-1EPS\s0 involves this analysis. +.PP +To write \s-1PDF\s0 files, \s-1GS\s0 is used. +.PP +To read \s-1PDF\s0 files, \fBpdftops\fR from the \fBxpdf\fR package is used. +.PP +Sampled input formats are \s-1PNG\s0, \s-1JPEG\s0, \s-1TIFF\s0, \s-1PNM\s0, \s-1BMP\s0, \s-1GIF\s0, \s-1LBM\s0, \s-1XPM\s0, \s-1PCX\s0 +and \s-1TGA\s0. To read sampled input formats, \fBsam2p\fR is used. \fBsam2p\fR is +a raster image converter written in \*(C+ by the author of \fBa2ping.pl\fR. +.PP +Extra output formats are \s-1PNG\s0, \s-1XWD\s0, \s-1BMP\s0, \s-1TIFF\s0, \s-1JPEG\s0, \s-1GIF\s0 and \s-1XPM\s0. To +write extra output formats, \fBsam2p\fR and \s-1GS\s0 are used. +.PP +\&\s-1PNM\s0 output formats are \s-1PGM\s0, \s-1PGM\s0 and \s-1PPM\s0. To write \s-1PNM\s0 output formats, \s-1GS\s0 +is used. +.SH "TIPS AND TRICKS" +.IX Header "TIPS AND TRICKS" +.IP "\(bu" 2 +Call with the \fB\-v\fR option to see progress and debug messages. +.IP "\(bu" 2 +If your \s-1EPS\s0 contains a wrong bounding box, you can fix it by running +\&\f(CW\*(C`a2ping.pl \-v \-\-bboxfrom=compute\-gs thefile.eps \-\-\*(C'\fR +.IP "\(bu" 2 +You can specify \fB\-\fR as \fIinputfile\fR to get stdin and as \fIoutputfile\fR +to get stdout. This works even for \s-1PDF\s0 files (which must be seekable), +because \fBa2ping\fR copies them to a temporary file automatically. +.IP "\(bu" 2 +If \fIinputfile\fR and \fIoutputfile\fR are the same, \fBa2ping\fR copies the +\&\fIinputfile\fR to a temporary location first. However, this usage is +recommended only if there is a backup of the file to be restored in case +\&\fBa2ping\fR doesn't produce the desired result. +.IP "\(bu" 2 +If you specify \fB\-\-\fR as \fIoutputfile\fR, it will be the same as \fIinputfile\fR. +.IP "\(bu" 2 +\&\fBa2ping\fR respects \fB\-\-Duplex\fR for FileFormat \s-1PCL5\s0, even though \s-1GS\s0 doesn't. +.IP "\(bu" 2 +If you have an incompatible \s-1PS\s0 that \s-1GS\s0 can read but your printer cannot print, +just run \f(CW\*(C`a2ping.pl foo.ps PDF: \- | a2ping.pl \- PS: foo.ps\*(C'\fR +.IP "\(bu" 2 +If you have a \s-1PS\s0 coming from Win32 (often with extension \f(CW\*(C`.prn\*(C'\fR), run +it through \fBa2ping\fR. It will remove the resolution changes and the +progress text printed to the terminal (which confuses \fIgv\fR\|(1) and makes +some filters in the print queue emit incorrect output). +.IP "\(bu" 2 +\&\fBa2ping\fR does antialiasing (\fB\-\-antialias=scale3no\fR) of glyphs and +curves when emitting a sampled image (FileFormats such as \s-1PGM\s0 and \s-1PPM\s0). +This improves readability of the glyphs. \fB=yes\fR instructs \s-1GS\s0 to do +internal antialiasing, but it usually doesn't improve much. \fB=scale3no\fR +turns off \s-1GS\s0 internal antialiasing, but makes it render everything 3x3 +as big, and then scales it back down. \fB=scale3no\fR turns on both 3x3 +scaling and \s-1GS\s0 internal antialiasing, which results in thicker lines and +worse quality in general. +.IP "\(bu" 2 +When creating a \s-1PBM\s0 file, antialiasing usually doesn't improve the +quality, so it is switched off by default. But if you set +\&\fB\-\-antialias=scale3no\fR or \fB\-\-antialias=scale3yes\fR, \s-1GS\s0 will render a \s-1PGM\s0 file, +and the value of \fB\-\-threshold\fR determines the minimum intensity for white in +the final \s-1PBM\s0. +.IP "\(bu" 2 +If you need a bigger sampled output file, specify a larger +\&\fB\-\-Resolution\fR. The default is \fB\-\-Resolution=72\fR. If your sampled output file +is going to be really big, you should specify \fB\-\-AntiAlias=yes\fR instead of +the default \fB\-\-AntiAlias=scale3no\fR to speed up conversion. +.SH "MISC" +.IX Header "MISC" +.IP "\(bu" 2 +Doesn't depend on the filename or extension of the input file. +.IP "\(bu" 2 +Conversion from \s-1EPS\s0 to \s-1PDF:\s0 fixes glitches etc., calls gs +\&\-sDEVICE=pdfwrite +.IP "\(bu" 2 +Conversion from \s-1EPS\s0 to \s-1EPS:\s0 fixes various glitches, moves (llx,lly) to +(0,0), removes binary junk from the beginning of the \s-1EPS\s0 etc. +.IP "\(bu" 2 +Conversion from \s-1PDF\s0 to \s-1PDF:\s0 keeps the file intact +.IP "\(bu" 2 +Conversion from \s-1PDF\s0 to \s-1EPS:\s0 calls pdftops \-eps (of the xpdf package) +.IP "\(bu" 2 +Conversion from \s-1PS\s0 to \s-1EPS:\s0 keeps 1st page only, removes setpagedevice etc. +.SH "AUTHORS" +.IX Header "AUTHORS" +The author of \fBa2ping\fR is Szabó Péter <\fIpts@fazekas.hu\fR>. +.PP +\&\fBa2ping\fR is inspired by and historically based on the \fBepstopdf\fR Perl +script modified by Thomas Esser, Sept. 1998, but his modifications have +been removed from \fBa2ping\fR, and also \fBa2ping\fR and \fBepstopdf\fR do not +share common code anymore. \fBepstopdf\fR is written by Sebastian Rahtz, +for Elsevier Science. \fBepstopdf\fR contained extra tricks from Hans Hagen's +texutil. +.SH "HISTORY" +.IX Header "HISTORY" +.Sh "1999/05/06 v2.5 (Heiko Oberdiek)" +.IX Subsection "1999/05/06 v2.5 (Heiko Oberdiek)" +.Vb 14 +\& * New options: --hires, --exact, --filter, --help. +\& * Many cosmetics: title, usage, ... +\& * New code for debug, warning, error +\& * Detecting of cygwin perl +\& * Scanning for %%{Hires,Exact,}BoundingBox. +\& * Scanning only the header in order not to get a wrong +\& BoundingBox of an included file. +\& * (atend) supported. +\& * uses strict; (earlier error detecting). +\& * changed first comment from '%!PS' to '%!'; +\& * corrected (atend) pattern: '\es*\e(atend\e)' +\& * using of $bbxpat in all BoundingBox cases, +\& correct the first white space to '...Box:\es*$bb...' +\& * corrected first line (one line instead of two before 'if 0;'; +.Ve +.Sh "2000/11/05 v2.6 (Heiko Oberdiek)" +.IX Subsection "2000/11/05 v2.6 (Heiko Oberdiek)" +.Vb 1 +\& * %%HiresBoundingBox corrected to %%HiResBoundingBox +.Ve +.Sh "2001/03/05 v2.7 (Heiko Oberdiek)" +.IX Subsection "2001/03/05 v2.7 (Heiko Oberdiek)" +.Vb 2 +\& * Newline before grestore for the case that there is no +\& whitespace at the end of the eps file. +.Ve +.Sh "2003/02/02 (Szabó Péter)" +.IX Subsection "2003/02/02 (Szabó Péter)" +.Vb 10 +\& * option --below +\& * removes DOS EPSF binary junk correctly +\& * adds all 3 BoundingBox DSC comments +\& * reads all 3 BoundingBox DSC comments, and picks the best +\& * forces BoundingBox to be an integer +\& * adds %%EndComments and proper %!PS-Adobe-?-? EPSF-?.? header +\& * adds %%Pages: +\& * adds invocation syntax: a2ping +\& * can convert PDF to EPS (by calling pdftops(1)) and PDF to PDF +\& * emulates work for PDF input +.Ve +.Sh "2003/04/16 (Szabó Péter)" +.IX Subsection "2003/04/16 (Szabó Péter)" +.Vb 7 +\& * added PS and sam2p support, renamed to a2ping +\& * sam2p and pdftops if $InputFilename eq '-'; +\& * remove PJL UEL header from the beginning +\& * works for PS non-EPS files for input +\& * input support for PNG JPEG TIFF PNM BMP GIF LBM XPM PCX TGA via sam2p +\& * removes ^L (form feed) from end of EPS file +\& * -x=-c:rle to add sam2p options +.Ve +.Sh "2003/04/26 (Szabó Péter)" +.IX Subsection "2003/04/26 (Szabó Péter)" +.Vb 14 +\& * omit the unnecessary setpagedevice calls when creating normal eps +\& * --noverbose --nocompress supported differently +\& * no more option defaults :-( +\& * justlib2 +\& * multi-page output with PS:, PDF:, PCL5: +\& * after `a2ping -pa4', file out.pcl says: `HP PCL printer data - A4 page +\& size', instead of `US letter' +\& * justlib2-ified doesn't depend on Getopt::Long anymore +\& * fully supports filtering (stdin and/or stdout), PDF and PCL5 output to +\& pipe (!$$ll_zero) +\& * adds DSC ``%%DocumentMedia: plain 612 792 0 () ()'' +\& * BoundingBox precedence for EPS input: --PageSize, %%*BoundingBox, +\& setpagedevice. Precedence for other inputs: --PageSize, setpagedevice, +\& %%*BoundingBox +.Ve +.Sh "2003/09/25 (Szabó Péter)" +.IX Subsection "2003/09/25 (Szabó Péter)" +.Vb 7 +\& * --bboxfrom=adsc: %%BoundingBox overrides -sDEVICE=bbox +\& * improved bbox discovery +\& * many bugfixes +\& * MetaPost EPS input fixes for prologues:=0; +\& * a2ping.pl -v --papersize=50,60 --bboxfrom=compute-gs t.ps t2.ps +\& * consistent bbox, --PageSize, /PageSize handling +\& * consistent --Resolution and --Duplex handling +.Ve +.Sh "2003/12/02 (Szabó Péter)" +.IX Subsection "2003/12/02 (Szabó Péter)" +.Vb 1 +\& * --bboxfrom=compute-gs option to fix PS -> EPS bbox (gs -sDEVICE=bbox), tuzv.eps +.Ve +.Sh "2004/02/10 v2.77 (Szabó Péter)" +.IX Subsection "2004/02/10 v2.77 (Szabó Péter)" +.Vb 7 +\& * the compute-pipe routine is now run unless --bboxfrom=guess with EPS +\& * added --gsextra= +\& * added --antialias= +\& * added FileFormat PBM, PGM, PPM +\& * separated FileFormat features to FL_* constants +\& * added --doc +\& * there is no default FileFormat (PDF) anymore +.Ve diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2pl.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2pl.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..91c8282166d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2pl.1 @@ -0,0 +1,275 @@ +.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. +.de Sh \" Subsection +.br +.if t .Sp +.ne 5 +.PP +\fB\\$1\fR +.PP +.. +.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) +.if t .sp .5v +.if n .sp +.. +.de Ip \" List item +.br +.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 +.el .ne 3 +.IP "\\$1" \\$2 +.. +.TH "AFM2PL" 1 "February 2004" "" "afm2pl" +.SH NAME +afm2pl \- convert AFM font metrics to TeX pl font metrics +.SH "SYNOPSIS" +.ad l +.hy 0 +.HP 7 +\fBafm2pl\fR [\fB\-p\fR\ \fIencoding_file\fR] [\fB\-o\fR] [\fB\-e\fR\ \fIextension_factor\fR] [\fB\-s\fR\ \fIslant_factor\fR] [\fB\-f\fR\ \fIfont_dimensions\fR] [\fB\-k\fR] [\fB\-m\fR\ \fIletter_spacing\fR] [\fB\-l\fR\ \fIligkern_spec\fR] [\fB\-L\fR\ \fIligkern_spec\fR] {\fIinput_file[\&.afm]\fR} [\fIoutput_file[\&.pl]\fR] +.ad +.hy +.ad l +.hy 0 +.HP 7 +\fBafm2pl\fR {\fB\-\-help\fR | \fB\-\-version\fR} +.ad +.hy + +.SH "DESCRIPTION" + +.PP +afm2pl converts an afm (Adobe Font Metric) file into a pl (Property List) file, which in its turn can be converted to a tfm (TeX Font Metric) file\&. It preserves kerns and ligatures\&. + +.PP +afm2pl is meant to be a replacement for afm2tfm, on which it is based\&. With afm2tfm, preserving kerns and ligatures is possible only in a roundabout way\&. + +.PP +For text fonts, Y&Y's texnansi is the recommended encoding to be used with afm2pl\&. This gives you a good character set with all the more important accented characters and many typographic symbols available as single characters, without a need for either virtual fonts or a separate text companion font\&. + +.PP +Full LaTeX support for this encoding is available in the form of the texnansi package, which is already part of TeX Live and teTeX\&. These distributions also contain the encoding file texnansi\&.enc\&. + +.PP +The distribution contains uppercased and lowercased versions of texnansi, viz\&. texnanuc\&.enc and texnanlc\&.enc, to allow font\-based rather than macro\-based uppercasing and lowercasing, and the familiar old ot1 encoding plus some variations in PostScript \&.enc format (I included these because they seem to be absent from teTeX/TeX Live)\&. + +.PP +Return value: 0 if no error; a negative number indicating the number of missing glyphs if conversion was successfull but glyphs are missing, and 1 in case of error\&. + +.SH "OPTIONS" + +.TP +\fB\-p\fR \fIencoding_file\fR +The default is the encoding specified in the afm file, which had better match the encoding in the fontfile (pfa or pfb)\&. The generated mapfile entry (see below) instructs pdftex or the dvi driver to reencode the font on the fly\&. On\-the\-fly reencoding does not require virtual fonts\&. + +.TP +\fB\-o\fR +Use octal for all character codes in the pl file\&. + +.TP +\fB\-e\fR \fIextend_factor\fR +Widen or narrow characters by \fIextend_factor\fR\&. Default is 1\&.0 (natural width)\&. Not recommended, except that arguably a narrowed Courier is less jarring than a full\-width Courier, when used in combination with a normal proportional font\&. For Courier, choose \&.833 to match the width of cmtt\&. + +.TP +\fB\-s\fR \fIslant_factor\fR +Oblique (slant) characters by \fIslant_factor\fR\&. Not recommended\&. + +.TP +\fB\-f\fR \fIfont_dimensions\fR +The value is either the keyword afm2tfm or a comma\-separated list of up to five integers\&. The parameters are listed below, with their defaults and their value when the afm2tfm keyword is specified\&. 'Space' means the width of a space in the target font, except of course in the last row\&. Keep in mind that the design size is 1000, and that all numbers must be nonnegative integers\&. + +.PP +.TS +lll +___ +lll. +Font dimension Default value Afm2tfm value +\fIstretch\fR space div 2 300 x \fIextend_factor\fR +\fIshrink\fR space div 3 100 x \fIextend_factor\fR +\fIextra space\fR space div 3 missing +\fIquad\fR 2 x width of '0' 1000 x \fIextend_factor\fR +\fIspace\fR (space source font) x \fIextend_factor\fR (space source font) x \fIextend_factor\fR +.TE +For fixed\-pitch fonts, different values apply: + +.PP +.TS +lll +___ +lll. +Font dimension Default value Afm2tfm value +\fIstretch\fR 0 0 +\fIshrink\fR 0 0 +\fIextra space\fR space missing +\fIquad\fR 2 x character width 1000 x \fIextend_factor\fR +\fIspace\fR character width character width +.TE +Specify just a non\-default stretch and shrink with e\&.g\&. 150,70 and just a non\-default extra space with ,,10\&. + +.TP +\fB\-k\fR +Keep original ligatures\&. This option only has effect in combination with positive letterspacing; see the section on letterspacing and extra ligkern info\&. + +.TP +\fB\-m\fR \fIletter_spacing\fR +Letterspace by \fIletter_spacing\fR/1000 em (integer)\&. This is useful for making all\-caps typesetting look better\&. Try a value of e\&.g\&. 50 or 100\&. But see the section on letterspacing and extra ligkern info for details\&. + +.TP +\fB\-l\fR \fIligkern_spec\fR, \fB\-L\fR \fIligkern_spec\fR +See the section on extra ligkern info for details\&. + +.TP +\fB\-V\fR +Verbose\&. If turned on, it reports the number of missing glyphs to stderr and their names to stdout\&. This is not particularly logical, but this way the glyph names can be captured even under Windows\&. + +.TP +\fB\-\-help\fR +Display a short usage message\&. + +.TP +\fB\-\-version\fR +Display the version number of afm2pl\&. + +.SH "MAPFILE ENTRIES" + +.PP +afm2pl writes a mapfile entry to a file with the same basename as the pl output file, but with extension \&.map\&. It can be used for the dvips mapfile and for the pdftex mapfile, although, in case of a geometrically transformed font, it may be better to remove the PostScript name for a pdftex mapfile entry\&. It is assumed that the pfb file has the same basename as the afm file and must be downloaded\&. You may have to hand\-edit this entry\&. + +.PP +You can configure dvips and pdftex to read this additional mapfile or otherwise add the entry to an existing mapfile\&. It appears that pdftex automatically will consult a mapfile xxx\&.map for a font xxx\&. + +.SH "EXTRA LIGKERN INFO" + +.PP +Most users are well\-advised to leave this mess alone and to accept the default behavior\&. + +.PP +The ligatures and kerns present in the afm file can be modified in various ways\&. Default, the encoding file is scanned for extra ligkern specifications, whose format will be described below\&. If there are no ligkern specifications in the encoding file, then extra ligkern specifications will be read from a file default\&.lig\&. A value of 0 for \fIligkern_spec\fR means that the ligatures and kerns from the afm file won't be tampered with and a value of 1 specifies default behavior\&. One can also specify a comma\-separated list of files with extra ligkerns specs\&. + +.PP +If afm2pl is compiled with the kpathsea library, then these files will be searched for under $TEXMF/fonts/lig\&. + +.PP +Note that ligatures and kerns are hints for the typesetting application; there is no need to download this information to the printer or to make it available to a dvi driver\&. + +.PP +The parser for ligkern info has been inherited from afm2tfm virtually without change\&. A ligkern specification can have one of the following forms: + +.IP + +\fIglyph_name1\fR \fIglyph_name2\fR \fIlig_op\fR \fIglyph_name3\fR ; + +.PP +This specifies a ligature\&. Possible values for \fIlig_op\fR are =:, |=:, |=:>, =:|, =:|>, |=:|, |=:|> and |=:|>>\&. These correspond to LIG, /LIG, /LIG>, LIG/, LIG/>, /LIG/, /LIG/>, /LIG/>> in \&.pl syntax; see the pltotf documentation and the \&.lig files in the distribution\&. + +.IP + +\fIglyph_name1\fR <> \fIglyph_name2\fR ; + +.PP +Kern \fIglyph_name1\fR as \fIglyph_name2\fR\&. + +.IP + +\fIglyph_name1\fR {} \fIglyph_name2\fR ; + +.PP +Remove the kern between \fIglyph_name1\fR and \fIglyph_name2\fR\&. A value of * for either glyph name is interpreted as a wildcard\&. + +.IP + +|| = \fIglyph\fR ; + +.PP +Set the (right) boundary character to \fIglyph\fR\&. \fIglyph\fR may be either a glyphname or a slot in the encoding vector\&. Choosing a glyph which doesn't occur in the output encoding is equivalent to not specifying a boundarychar at all\&. It is ok to pick an encoded glyphname which does not occur in the afm\&. In fact, this is what default\&.lig does: || = cwm ;\&. + +.PP +You can copy the kerns of an unencoded character to the boundarychar: + +.IP + +|| <> space ; + +.PP +This ligkern specification should occur before the one that deletes space kerns\&. + +.PP +A ligkern specification should be contained within one line\&. One line may contain several ligkern specifications, separated by spaces\&. Note that ; (space followed by semicolon) is considered part of the ligkern specification\&. See the lig files included in this distribution\&. Example: + +.IP + +one {} * ; * {} one ; two {} * ; * {} two ; + +.PP +Lines with ligkern specifications inside an encoding file should start with % LIGKERN\&. Ligkern specifications in a lig file may optionally start this way\&. + +.SH "LETTERSPACING AND EXTRA LIGKERN INFO" + +.PP +Letterspacing has various side\-effects for ligkern info\&. Instead of simply applying the extra ligkern info (see previous section), the following is done: + +.TP 3 +1. +In case of positive letterspacing, native ligatures are removed, unless the \-k option is specified\&. +.TP +2. +Extra ligkern info is applied as usual, except that in case of positive letterspacing different defaults apply: \-l 0 is quietly ignored, ligkern comments in the encoding file are ignored, and defpre\&.lig is read instead of default\&.lig\&. +.TP +3. +Letterspacing is applied\&. This adds a lot of kerns, and modifies existing kerns\&. +.TP +4. +The extra ligkern info specified with \-L is applied\&. The only ligkern specs which are allowed here, are removals of kerning pairs (with the {} operator)\&. Values 0 and 1 have a similar meaning as for the \-l parameter\&. The tfm format has room for only about 180x180 ligatures and kerning pairs\&. This is enough for OT1 encoding, but for texnansi encoding quite a few ligkern specifications have to be removed\&. The pltotf program will remove all ligkern info if too many ligatures and kerns remain\&. The default lig file is defpost\&.lig\&. This file throws out kerning pairs which are unlikely to be involved in letterspacing, such as kerns involving accents or kerns with a punctuation character or right bracket at the left\&. It does not add letterspacing kerns involving boundarychars\&. Instead, fontspace is increased by twice the letterspacing\&. defpost\&.lig throws out enough kerns in case of texnansi encoding\&. With other encodings, you may have to throw out additional kerning pairs\&. +.LP + +.SH "FONT-BASED UPPER- AND LOWERCASING" + +.PP +The distribution includes encoding vectors texnanuc\&.enc and texnanlc\&.enc which produce all\-uppercase and all\-lowercase fonts\&. The distribution contains an example ucshape\&.tex on how to use such fonts with LaTeX font selection\&. + +.PP +The principal uses for an all\-uppercase font are page headers and section heads\&. If these contain math, then macro\-based uppercasing would create unpleasant complications\&. + +.SS "The sz ligature" + +.PP +Note that the texnanuc encoding provides no glyph for the sz ligature; you'll either have to substitute ss or provide a macro\-based solution\&. The following code uses either the usual glyph or substitutes the letters ss, depending on whether the glyph exists in the current font: + +.nf + + +\\def\\ss{% + \\setbox0\\hbox{\\char25}% + \\ifnum\\wd0=0 ss\\else\\box0\\fi +} + + +.fi + +.PP +In LaTeX, this code appears to work well enough, although on occasion you may need to insert \\protect\&. A better solution might involve the sixth parameter of the \\DeclareFontShape macro, but I failed to get that to work\&. + +.SH "AFM2PL, FONTINST AND ARTIFICIAL SMALLCAPS" + +.PP +Afm2pl currently doesn't do virtual fonts\&. That means that for things such as artificial smallcaps you have to turn elsewhere, e\&.g\&. to the fontinst package, which is part of any mainstream TeX distribution\&. + +.PP +Look under texmf/tex/fontinst for fontinst support files, which allow you to generate a smallcaps font (tfm and vf files) from an afm2pl\-generated tfm file\&. This package only supports texnansi encoding\&. + +.PP +There should be no real problem in doing the same for OT1 encoding\&. However, there are several variations of the OT1 encoding to take care of\&. Also, there are as far as I know no officially sanctioned PostScript names for all the variations of the OT1 encoding; the fontinst names contain spaces and are therefore not useable as PostScript names\&. + +.SH "FUTURE PLANS" + +.PP +I am considering a revision which makes afm2pl a more complete replacement for afm2tfm\&. In that version, afm2pl can optionally create a second, virtual font, possibly with a different encoding and possibly letterspaced\&. The current option of non\-virtual letterspacing via kerns will be dropped\&. If the encodings differ then it is assumed that the virtual font is intended as a small\-caps version of the main font, and a scaling parameter can be specified for non\-matching glyphs\&. + +.SH "COPYRIGHT" + +.PP +The afm2pl distribution is subject to the GNU General Public Licence (GPL)\&. Please refer to the file COPYING for details\&. + +.PP +The afm2pl homepage is http://www\&.ntg\&.nl/afm2pl\&.html: \fIhttp://www.ntg.nl/afm2pl.html\fR\&. + +.SH AUTHOR +Siep Kroonenberg . diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2tfm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2tfm.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..32822173aa4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2tfm.1 @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +.\" man page for afm2tfm +.TH AFM2TFM 1 "9 August 1990" +.SH NAME +afm2tfm \- convert Adobe font metrics to TeX font metrics +.SH DESCRIPTION +PostScript fonts are (or should be) accompanied by font metric files +such as +.B Times-Roman.afm, +which describes the characteristics of the font called Times-Roman. +To use such fonts with TeX, we need TFM files that contain similar +information. This program does that conversion. For more +information, print out the dvips manual. +.SH FILES +.I psfonts.map +in the config directory used by dvips (update this). +.br +.I ../afm/Makefile +in the dvips sources (look at this for examples). +.SH "SEE ALSO" +dvips(1), tex(1), vptovf(1) +.SH BUGS +An option to add letterspacing to the virtual font was rejected by Knuth +because it would make the fi and fl ligatures break the normal rhythmic pattern. +.SH AUTHORS +Tomas Rokicki and Donald E. Knuth diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allcm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allcm.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..fe75f4ef6d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allcm.1 @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +.TH allcm 1 "11/94" "teTeX" "teTeX" +.SH NAME +allcm \- force the most important Computer\-Modern\-fonts to be calculated +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B allcm [-r] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I allcm +forces a large number of Computer Modern Fonts to be calculated as pixel files. +This is done through running +.IR dvips (1) +over a certain test-file. Therefore, the fonts are created in the resolution +needed by dvips. + +If the \-r flag is specified, the command +.IR dvired (1) +will be used instead of dvips. + +.I allcm +does not recalculate existing fonts (as long as the Metafont mode does not change). + +.SH "SEE ALSO" +allec(1), +allneeded(1), +dvips(1), +dvired(1). + +.SH AUTHOR +Thomas Esser diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allec.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allec.1 new file mode 120000 index 00000000000..fa06b6c24bd --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allec.1 @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +allcm.1 \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allneeded.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allneeded.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7d9a67548b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allneeded.1 @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +.TH allneeded 1 "11/94" "teTeX" "teTeX" +.SH NAME +allneeded \- force the calculation of all fonts now needed +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B allneeded [\-r] files ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I allneeded +forces the calculation of all fonts that are needed to preview a set of +dvi files. Just specify where the program should search for files on the +commandline. +The fonts generation is triggered by running +.IR dvips (1) +over all accessible dvi\-files. Therefore, the fonts are created in the resolution +needed by dvips. + +If the \-r flag is specified, the command +.IR dvired (1) +will be used instead of dvips. + +.I allneeded +does not recalculate existing fonts (as long as the Metafont mode does not change). + +.SH "SEE ALSO" +allec(1), +allcm(1), +dvips(1), +dvired(1). + +.SH AUTHOR +Thomas Esser diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/amstex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/amstex.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..68697a02901 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/amstex.1 @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +.TH AMSTEX 1 "27 December 1992" "Web2C 7.5.5" +.\"===================================================================== +.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP +.if n .ds TX TeX +.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff +.el .ds OX TeX for nroff +.\" the same but obliqued +.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX +.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds BX BibTeX +.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX +.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds LX LaTeX +.if t .ds AX \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds AX AmSTeX +.if t .ds AY \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(LX +.if n .ds AY AmSLaTeX +.\"===================================================================== +.SH NAME +amstex \- structured text formatting and typesetting +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B amstex +[ first line ] +.\"===================================================================== +.SH DESCRIPTION +This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete +documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file +or manual +.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . +.PP +The \*(AX language is described in the book +.IR "The Joy of \*(OX" . +\*(AX is a \*(TX macro package, not a modification to the \*(TX source +program, so all the capabilities described in +.BR tex (1) +are present. +.PP +The \*(AX macros encourage writers to think about the content of their +documents, rather than the form. The ideal, not always realized, is to +have no formatting commands (like ``switch to italic'' or ``skip 2 +picas'') in the document at all; instead, everything is done +by specific markup instructions: ``emphasize'', ``start a section''. +.PP +\*(AX is the official typesetting system of the American Mathematical +Society, and nearly all of its publications are typeset using \*(AX. The +online version of AMS Math Reviews uses \*(AX input syntax for display of +mathematical material. AMS authors can provide editors with +computer-readable \*(AX files. +.PP +For authors more familiar with \*(LX, an AMS-supported package called +.I amsmath.sty +is is available. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH FILES +.TP +.I amsguide.tex" +Documentation for \*(AX, typesettable by \*(TX. +.TP +.I amfndoc.tex" +Documentation for AMS fonts, typesettable by \*(TX. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR latex (1), +.BR tex (1), +.BR slitex (1). +.br +Michael Spivak, +.IR "The Joy of \*(OX" , +2nd edition, Addison-Wesley, 1990, ISBN 0-8218-2997-1. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bg5conv.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bg5conv.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a1925691345 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bg5conv.1 @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ +.\" man page for bg5conv +. +.TH BG5CONV 1 11-Aug-2005 "CJK Version 4.6.0" +. +.\" ==== +.\" ==== macro definitions +.\" ==== +. +.\" here we define \TeX for troff and nroff +.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP +.if n .ds TX TeX +. +.\" and here the same for \LaTeX +.if t \{\ +.ie '\*(.T'dvi' \ +.ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.15v'\s-3A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX +.el .ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.22v'\s-2A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.22v'\fP\*(TX +.\} +.if n .ds LX LaTeX +. +.\" \LaTeXe +.\" note that we need \vareps for TeX instead of \eps which can only be +.\" accessed with the \N escape sequence (in the Math Italic font) +.if t \{\ +.ie '\*(.T'dvi' .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\f(MI\N'34'\fP\v'-0.20v' +.el .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\(*e\v'-0.20v' +.\} +.if n .ds LE LaTeX\ 2e +. +.\" a typewriter font +.if t \{\ +.de C +\fC\\$1\fP\\$2 +.. +.\} +.if n \{\ +.de C +\\$1\\$2 +.. +.\} +. +.\" ==== +.\" ==== end of macro definitions +.\" ==== +. +. +. +.SH NAME +bg5conv \- convert a TeX document in Big\ 5 encoding into `preprocessed' +form. +. +. +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B bg5conv +< +.I infile +> +.I outfile +. +. +.SH DESCRIPTION +Big\ 5 encoding for traditional Chinese uses the characters +.C { , +.C } , +and +.C \e +which have special meanings in \*(TX +documents. +.PP +After processing a \*(LE +document which contains Big\ 5 characters with +.B bg5conv +you need not care about these special characters. +.PP +This filter is part of the +.B CJK +macro package for \*(LE. +. +. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR \%sjisconv (1), +.BR \%cefconv (1), +.BR cef5conv (1), +.BR \%cefsconv (1), +.BR \%extconv (1), +.br +the +.B CJK +documentation files. +. +. +.SH AUTHOR +Werner Lemberg +.C diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bibtex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bibtex.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4be5efd8bb5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bibtex.1 @@ -0,0 +1,146 @@ +.TH BIBTEX 1 "24 November 1994" "Web2C 7.5.5" +.\"===================================================================== +.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP +.if n .ds TX TeX +.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff +.el .ds OX TeX for nroff +.\" the same but obliqued +.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX +.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds BX BibTeX +.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX +.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\\s-2A\\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds LX LaTeX +.\"===================================================================== +.SH NAME +bibtex \- make a bibliography for (La)TeX +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B bibtex +[ +.BI -min-crossrefs =number +] +[ +.B -terse +] +[ +.I auxname +] +.\"===================================================================== +.SH DESCRIPTION +This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete +documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file +or manual +.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . +.PP +\*(BX reads the top-level auxiliary +.RI ( .aux ) +file that was output during the running of +.BR latex (1) +or +.BR tex (1) +and creates a bibliography +.RI ( .bbl ) +file that will be incorporated into the document on subsequent runs of +\*(LX or \*(TX. The +.I auxname +on the command line must be given without the +.I .aux +extension. If you don't give the +.IR auxname , +the program prompts you for it. +.PP +\*(BX looks up, in bibliographic database +.RI ( .bib ) +files specified by the \\bibliography command, +the entries specified by the \\cite and \\nocite commands +in the \*(LX or \*(TX source file. +It formats the information from those entries +according to instructions in a bibliography style +.RI ( .bst ) +file (specified by the \\bibliographystyle command, +and it outputs the results to the +.I .bbl +file. +.PP +The \*(LX manual +explains what a \*(LX source file must contain to work with \*(BX. +Appendix B of the manual describes the format of the +.I .bib +files. The `\*(BXing' document describes extensions and details of +this format, and it gives other useful hints for using \*(BX. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH OPTIONS +The +.B -min-crossrefs +option defines the minimum number of +.B crossref +required for automatic inclusion of the crossref'd entry on the citation +list; the default is two. +With the +.B -terse +option, \*(BX operates silently. Without it, a banner and progress +reports are printed on +.IR stdout . +.PP +.\"===================================================================== +.SH ENVIRONMENT +\*(BX searches the directories in the +path defined by the BSTINPUTS environment variable for +.I .bst +files. If BSTINPUTS is not set, it uses the system default. +For +.I .bib +files, it uses the BIBINPUTS environment variable if that is set, +otherwise the default. +See +.BR tex (1) +for the details of the searching. +.PP +If the environment variable +TEXMFOUTPUT is set, \*(BX attempts to put its output +files in it, if they cannot be put in the current directory. Again, see +.BR tex (1). +No special searching is done for the +.I .aux +file. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH FILES +.TP +.I *.bst +Bibliography style files. +.TP +.I btxdoc.tex +``\*(BXing'' \- \*(LXable documentation for general \*(BX users +.TP +.I btxhak.tex +``Designing \*(BX Styles'' \- \*(LXable documentation for style designers +.TP +.I btxdoc.bib +database file for those two documents +.TP +.I xampl.bib +database file giving examples of all standard entry types +.TP +.I btxbst.doc +template file and documentation for the standard styles +.PP +All those files should be available somewhere on your system. +.PP +The host math.utah.edu has a vast collection of +.I .bib +files available for anonymous ftp, including references for all the +standard \*(TX books and a complete bibliography for TUGboat. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR latex (1), +.BR tex (1). +.br +Leslie Lamport, +.IR "\*(LX \- A Document Preparation System" , +Addison-Wesley, 1985, ISBN 0-201-15790-X. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH AUTHOR +Oren Patashnik, Stanford University. This man page describes the web2c +version of \*(BX. Other ports of \*(BX, such as Donald Knuth's version +using the Sun Pascal compiler, do not have the same path searching +implementation, or the command-line options. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bzip2.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bzip2.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..623435c2427 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bzip2.1 @@ -0,0 +1,453 @@ +.PU +.TH bzip2 1 +.SH NAME +bzip2, bunzip2 \- a block-sorting file compressor, v1.0.2 +.br +bzcat \- decompresses files to stdout +.br +bzip2recover \- recovers data from damaged bzip2 files + +.SH SYNOPSIS +.ll +8 +.B bzip2 +.RB [ " \-cdfkqstvzVL123456789 " ] +[ +.I "filenames \&..." +] +.ll -8 +.br +.B bunzip2 +.RB [ " \-fkvsVL " ] +[ +.I "filenames \&..." +] +.br +.B bzcat +.RB [ " \-s " ] +[ +.I "filenames \&..." +] +.br +.B bzip2recover +.I "filename" + +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I bzip2 +compresses files using the Burrows-Wheeler block sorting +text compression algorithm, and Huffman coding. Compression is +generally considerably better than that achieved by more conventional +LZ77/LZ78-based compressors, and approaches the performance of the PPM +family of statistical compressors. + +The command-line options are deliberately very similar to +those of +.I GNU gzip, +but they are not identical. + +.I bzip2 +expects a list of file names to accompany the +command-line flags. Each file is replaced by a compressed version of +itself, with the name "original_name.bz2". +Each compressed file +has the same modification date, permissions, and, when possible, +ownership as the corresponding original, so that these properties can +be correctly restored at decompression time. File name handling is +naive in the sense that there is no mechanism for preserving original +file names, permissions, ownerships or dates in filesystems which lack +these concepts, or have serious file name length restrictions, such as +MS-DOS. + +.I bzip2 +and +.I bunzip2 +will by default not overwrite existing +files. If you want this to happen, specify the \-f flag. + +If no file names are specified, +.I bzip2 +compresses from standard +input to standard output. In this case, +.I bzip2 +will decline to +write compressed output to a terminal, as this would be entirely +incomprehensible and therefore pointless. + +.I bunzip2 +(or +.I bzip2 \-d) +decompresses all +specified files. Files which were not created by +.I bzip2 +will be detected and ignored, and a warning issued. +.I bzip2 +attempts to guess the filename for the decompressed file +from that of the compressed file as follows: + + filename.bz2 becomes filename + filename.bz becomes filename + filename.tbz2 becomes filename.tar + filename.tbz becomes filename.tar + anyothername becomes anyothername.out + +If the file does not end in one of the recognised endings, +.I .bz2, +.I .bz, +.I .tbz2 +or +.I .tbz, +.I bzip2 +complains that it cannot +guess the name of the original file, and uses the original name +with +.I .out +appended. + +As with compression, supplying no +filenames causes decompression from +standard input to standard output. + +.I bunzip2 +will correctly decompress a file which is the +concatenation of two or more compressed files. The result is the +concatenation of the corresponding uncompressed files. Integrity +testing (\-t) +of concatenated +compressed files is also supported. + +You can also compress or decompress files to the standard output by +giving the \-c flag. Multiple files may be compressed and +decompressed like this. The resulting outputs are fed sequentially to +stdout. Compression of multiple files +in this manner generates a stream +containing multiple compressed file representations. Such a stream +can be decompressed correctly only by +.I bzip2 +version 0.9.0 or +later. Earlier versions of +.I bzip2 +will stop after decompressing +the first file in the stream. + +.I bzcat +(or +.I bzip2 -dc) +decompresses all specified files to +the standard output. + +.I bzip2 +will read arguments from the environment variables +.I BZIP2 +and +.I BZIP, +in that order, and will process them +before any arguments read from the command line. This gives a +convenient way to supply default arguments. + +Compression is always performed, even if the compressed +file is slightly +larger than the original. Files of less than about one hundred bytes +tend to get larger, since the compression mechanism has a constant +overhead in the region of 50 bytes. Random data (including the output +of most file compressors) is coded at about 8.05 bits per byte, giving +an expansion of around 0.5%. + +As a self-check for your protection, +.I +bzip2 +uses 32-bit CRCs to +make sure that the decompressed version of a file is identical to the +original. This guards against corruption of the compressed data, and +against undetected bugs in +.I bzip2 +(hopefully very unlikely). The +chances of data corruption going undetected is microscopic, about one +chance in four billion for each file processed. Be aware, though, that +the check occurs upon decompression, so it can only tell you that +something is wrong. It can't help you +recover the original uncompressed +data. You can use +.I bzip2recover +to try to recover data from +damaged files. + +Return values: 0 for a normal exit, 1 for environmental problems (file +not found, invalid flags, I/O errors, &c), 2 to indicate a corrupt +compressed file, 3 for an internal consistency error (eg, bug) which +caused +.I bzip2 +to panic. + +.SH OPTIONS +.TP +.B \-c --stdout +Compress or decompress to standard output. +.TP +.B \-d --decompress +Force decompression. +.I bzip2, +.I bunzip2 +and +.I bzcat +are +really the same program, and the decision about what actions to take is +done on the basis of which name is used. This flag overrides that +mechanism, and forces +.I bzip2 +to decompress. +.TP +.B \-z --compress +The complement to \-d: forces compression, regardless of the +invocation name. +.TP +.B \-t --test +Check integrity of the specified file(s), but don't decompress them. +This really performs a trial decompression and throws away the result. +.TP +.B \-f --force +Force overwrite of output files. Normally, +.I bzip2 +will not overwrite +existing output files. Also forces +.I bzip2 +to break hard links +to files, which it otherwise wouldn't do. + +bzip2 normally declines to decompress files which don't have the +correct magic header bytes. If forced (-f), however, it will pass +such files through unmodified. This is how GNU gzip behaves. +.TP +.B \-k --keep +Keep (don't delete) input files during compression +or decompression. +.TP +.B \-s --small +Reduce memory usage, for compression, decompression and testing. Files +are decompressed and tested using a modified algorithm which only +requires 2.5 bytes per block byte. This means any file can be +decompressed in 2300k of memory, albeit at about half the normal speed. + +During compression, \-s selects a block size of 200k, which limits +memory use to around the same figure, at the expense of your compression +ratio. In short, if your machine is low on memory (8 megabytes or +less), use \-s for everything. See MEMORY MANAGEMENT below. +.TP +.B \-q --quiet +Suppress non-essential warning messages. Messages pertaining to +I/O errors and other critical events will not be suppressed. +.TP +.B \-v --verbose +Verbose mode -- show the compression ratio for each file processed. +Further \-v's increase the verbosity level, spewing out lots of +information which is primarily of interest for diagnostic purposes. +.TP +.B \-L --license -V --version +Display the software version, license terms and conditions. +.TP +.B \-1 (or \-\-fast) to \-9 (or \-\-best) +Set the block size to 100 k, 200 k .. 900 k when compressing. Has no +effect when decompressing. See MEMORY MANAGEMENT below. +The \-\-fast and \-\-best aliases are primarily for GNU gzip +compatibility. In particular, \-\-fast doesn't make things +significantly faster. +And \-\-best merely selects the default behaviour. +.TP +.B \-- +Treats all subsequent arguments as file names, even if they start +with a dash. This is so you can handle files with names beginning +with a dash, for example: bzip2 \-- \-myfilename. +.TP +.B \--repetitive-fast --repetitive-best +These flags are redundant in versions 0.9.5 and above. They provided +some coarse control over the behaviour of the sorting algorithm in +earlier versions, which was sometimes useful. 0.9.5 and above have an +improved algorithm which renders these flags irrelevant. + +.SH MEMORY MANAGEMENT +.I bzip2 +compresses large files in blocks. The block size affects +both the compression ratio achieved, and the amount of memory needed for +compression and decompression. The flags \-1 through \-9 +specify the block size to be 100,000 bytes through 900,000 bytes (the +default) respectively. At decompression time, the block size used for +compression is read from the header of the compressed file, and +.I bunzip2 +then allocates itself just enough memory to decompress +the file. Since block sizes are stored in compressed files, it follows +that the flags \-1 to \-9 are irrelevant to and so ignored +during decompression. + +Compression and decompression requirements, +in bytes, can be estimated as: + + Compression: 400k + ( 8 x block size ) + + Decompression: 100k + ( 4 x block size ), or + 100k + ( 2.5 x block size ) + +Larger block sizes give rapidly diminishing marginal returns. Most of +the compression comes from the first two or three hundred k of block +size, a fact worth bearing in mind when using +.I bzip2 +on small machines. +It is also important to appreciate that the decompression memory +requirement is set at compression time by the choice of block size. + +For files compressed with the default 900k block size, +.I bunzip2 +will require about 3700 kbytes to decompress. To support decompression +of any file on a 4 megabyte machine, +.I bunzip2 +has an option to +decompress using approximately half this amount of memory, about 2300 +kbytes. Decompression speed is also halved, so you should use this +option only where necessary. The relevant flag is -s. + +In general, try and use the largest block size memory constraints allow, +since that maximises the compression achieved. Compression and +decompression speed are virtually unaffected by block size. + +Another significant point applies to files which fit in a single block +-- that means most files you'd encounter using a large block size. The +amount of real memory touched is proportional to the size of the file, +since the file is smaller than a block. For example, compressing a file +20,000 bytes long with the flag -9 will cause the compressor to +allocate around 7600k of memory, but only touch 400k + 20000 * 8 = 560 +kbytes of it. Similarly, the decompressor will allocate 3700k but only +touch 100k + 20000 * 4 = 180 kbytes. + +Here is a table which summarises the maximum memory usage for different +block sizes. Also recorded is the total compressed size for 14 files of +the Calgary Text Compression Corpus totalling 3,141,622 bytes. This +column gives some feel for how compression varies with block size. +These figures tend to understate the advantage of larger block sizes for +larger files, since the Corpus is dominated by smaller files. + + Compress Decompress Decompress Corpus + Flag usage usage -s usage Size + + -1 1200k 500k 350k 914704 + -2 2000k 900k 600k 877703 + -3 2800k 1300k 850k 860338 + -4 3600k 1700k 1100k 846899 + -5 4400k 2100k 1350k 845160 + -6 5200k 2500k 1600k 838626 + -7 6100k 2900k 1850k 834096 + -8 6800k 3300k 2100k 828642 + -9 7600k 3700k 2350k 828642 + +.SH RECOVERING DATA FROM DAMAGED FILES +.I bzip2 +compresses files in blocks, usually 900kbytes long. Each +block is handled independently. If a media or transmission error causes +a multi-block .bz2 +file to become damaged, it may be possible to +recover data from the undamaged blocks in the file. + +The compressed representation of each block is delimited by a 48-bit +pattern, which makes it possible to find the block boundaries with +reasonable certainty. Each block also carries its own 32-bit CRC, so +damaged blocks can be distinguished from undamaged ones. + +.I bzip2recover +is a simple program whose purpose is to search for +blocks in .bz2 files, and write each block out into its own .bz2 +file. You can then use +.I bzip2 +\-t +to test the +integrity of the resulting files, and decompress those which are +undamaged. + +.I bzip2recover +takes a single argument, the name of the damaged file, +and writes a number of files "rec00001file.bz2", +"rec00002file.bz2", etc, containing the extracted blocks. +The output filenames are designed so that the use of +wildcards in subsequent processing -- for example, +"bzip2 -dc rec*file.bz2 > recovered_data" -- processes the files in +the correct order. + +.I bzip2recover +should be of most use dealing with large .bz2 +files, as these will contain many blocks. It is clearly +futile to use it on damaged single-block files, since a +damaged block cannot be recovered. If you wish to minimise +any potential data loss through media or transmission errors, +you might consider compressing with a smaller +block size. + +.SH PERFORMANCE NOTES +The sorting phase of compression gathers together similar strings in the +file. Because of this, files containing very long runs of repeated +symbols, like "aabaabaabaab ..." (repeated several hundred times) may +compress more slowly than normal. Versions 0.9.5 and above fare much +better than previous versions in this respect. The ratio between +worst-case and average-case compression time is in the region of 10:1. +For previous versions, this figure was more like 100:1. You can use the +\-vvvv option to monitor progress in great detail, if you want. + +Decompression speed is unaffected by these phenomena. + +.I bzip2 +usually allocates several megabytes of memory to operate +in, and then charges all over it in a fairly random fashion. This means +that performance, both for compressing and decompressing, is largely +determined by the speed at which your machine can service cache misses. +Because of this, small changes to the code to reduce the miss rate have +been observed to give disproportionately large performance improvements. +I imagine +.I bzip2 +will perform best on machines with very large caches. + +.SH CAVEATS +I/O error messages are not as helpful as they could be. +.I bzip2 +tries hard to detect I/O errors and exit cleanly, but the details of +what the problem is sometimes seem rather misleading. + +This manual page pertains to version 1.0.2 of +.I bzip2. +Compressed data created by this version is entirely forwards and +backwards compatible with the previous public releases, versions +0.1pl2, 0.9.0, 0.9.5, 1.0.0 and 1.0.1, but with the following +exception: 0.9.0 and above can correctly decompress multiple +concatenated compressed files. 0.1pl2 cannot do this; it will stop +after decompressing just the first file in the stream. + +.I bzip2recover +versions prior to this one, 1.0.2, used 32-bit integers to represent +bit positions in compressed files, so it could not handle compressed +files more than 512 megabytes long. Version 1.0.2 and above uses +64-bit ints on some platforms which support them (GNU supported +targets, and Windows). To establish whether or not bzip2recover was +built with such a limitation, run it without arguments. In any event +you can build yourself an unlimited version if you can recompile it +with MaybeUInt64 set to be an unsigned 64-bit integer. + + + +.SH AUTHOR +Julian Seward, jseward@acm.org. + +http://sources.redhat.com/bzip2 + +The ideas embodied in +.I bzip2 +are due to (at least) the following +people: Michael Burrows and David Wheeler (for the block sorting +transformation), David Wheeler (again, for the Huffman coder), Peter +Fenwick (for the structured coding model in the original +.I bzip, +and many refinements), and Alistair Moffat, Radford Neal and Ian Witten +(for the arithmetic coder in the original +.I bzip). +I am much +indebted for their help, support and advice. See the manual in the +source distribution for pointers to sources of documentation. Christian +von Roques encouraged me to look for faster sorting algorithms, so as to +speed up compression. Bela Lubkin encouraged me to improve the +worst-case compression performance. +The bz* scripts are derived from those of GNU gzip. +Many people sent patches, helped +with portability problems, lent machines, gave advice and were generally +helpful. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cef5conv.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cef5conv.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7f3a8dc87cf --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cef5conv.1 @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +.\" man page for cef5conv +. +.TH CEF5CONV 1 11-Aug-2005 "CJK Version 4.6.0" +. +.\" ==== +.\" ==== macro definitions +.\" ==== +. +.\" here we define \TeX for troff and nroff +.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP +.if n .ds TX TeX +. +.\" and here the same for \LaTeX +.if t \{\ +.ie '\*(.T'dvi' \ +.ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.15v'\s-3A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX +.el .ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.22v'\s-2A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.22v'\fP\*(TX +.\} +.if n .ds LX LaTeX +. +.\" \LaTeXe +.\" note that we need \vareps for TeX instead of \eps which can only be +.\" accessed with the \N escape sequence (in the Math Italic font) +.if t \{\ +.ie '\*(.T'dvi' .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\f(MI\N'34'\fP\v'-0.20v' +.el .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\(*e\v'-0.20v' +.\} +.if n .ds LE LaTeX\ 2e +. +.\" a typewriter font +.if t \{\ +.de C +\fC\\$1\fP +.. +.\} +.if n \{\ +.de C +\\$1 +.. +.\} +. +.\" ==== +.\" ==== end of macro definitions +.\" ==== +. +. +. +.SH NAME +cef5conv \- convert a TeX document in Big\ 5 encoding containing CEF macros +into `preprocessed' form. +. +. +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B cef5conv +< +.I infile +> +.I outfile +. +. +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.B Chinese Encoding Framework +.RB ( CEF ) +developed by Christian Wittern +.C +makes it possible to include CJK characters in various encodings using the +SGML macros +.B &CX-aabb; +for Big\ 5 and CNS encoding and +.B &U-aabb; +for Unicode +.RB ( X +denotes a number between 0 and 7; 0 represents Big\ 5 encoding, 1-7 CNS +encoding planes 1-7. +.B aabb +is either a decimal or hexadecimal number). +.PP +.B cef5conv +converts the CEF macros of a Big\ 5 encoded document together with the Big\ +5 encoding itself into a form which can directly processed with \*(LE. +It is identical to +.IP +.B bg5conv +< +.I infile +| +.B cefconv +> +.I outfile +.PP +This filter is part of the +.B CJK +macro package for \*(LE. +. +. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR \%sjisconv (1), +.BR bg5conv (1), +.BR \%cefconv (1), +.BR \%cefsconv (1), +.BR \%extconv (1), +.br +the +.B CJK +documentation files. +. +. +.SH AUTHOR +Werner Lemberg +.C diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefconv.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefconv.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d5ff6b17abe --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefconv.1 @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +.\" man page for cefconv +. +.TH CEFCONV 1 11-Aug-2005 "CJK Version 4.6.0" +. +.\" ==== +.\" ==== macro definitions +.\" ==== +. +.\" here we define \TeX for troff and nroff +.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP +.if n .ds TX TeX +. +.\" and here the same for \LaTeX +.if t \{\ +.ie '\*(.T'dvi' \ +.ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.15v'\s-3A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX +.el .ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.22v'\s-2A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.22v'\fP\*(TX +.\} +.if n .ds LX LaTeX +. +.\" \LaTeXe +.\" note that we need \vareps for TeX instead of \eps which can only be +.\" accessed with the \N escape sequence (in the Math Italic font) +.if t \{\ +.ie '\*(.T'dvi' .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\f(MI\N'34'\fP\v'-0.20v' +.el .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\(*e\v'-0.20v' +.\} +.if n .ds LE LaTeX\ 2e +. +.\" a typewriter font +.if t \{\ +.de C +\fC\\$1\fP +.. +.\} +.if n \{\ +.de C +\\$1 +.. +.\} +. +.\" ==== +.\" ==== end of macro definitions +.\" ==== +. +. +. +.SH NAME +cefconv \- convert a TeX document containing CEF macros into `preprocessed' +form. +. +. +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B cefconv +< +.I infile +> +.I outfile +. +. +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.B Chinese Encoding Framework +.RB ( CEF ) +developed by Christian Wittern +.C +makes it possible to include CJK characters in various encodings using the +SGML macros +.B &CX-aabb; +for Big\ 5 and CNS encoding and +.B &U-aabb; +for Unicode +.RB ( X +denotes a number between 0 and 7; 0 represents Big\ 5 encoding, 1-7 CNS +encoding planes 1-7. +.B aabb +is either a decimal or hexadecimal number) +.PP +.B \%cefconv +converts the CEF macros into a form which can directly processed with \*(LE. +.PP +This filter is part of the +.B CJK +macro package for \*(LE. +. +. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR \%sjisconv (1), +.BR bg5conv (1), +.BR cef5conv (1), +.BR \%cefsconv (1), +.BR \%extconv (1), +.br +the +.B CJK +documentation files. +. +. +.SH AUTHOR +Werner Lemberg +.C diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefsconv.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefsconv.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0dddcecb143 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefsconv.1 @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +.\" man page for cefsconv +. +.TH CEFSCONV 1 11-Aug-2005 "CJK Version 4.6.0" +. +.\" ==== +.\" ==== macro definitions +.\" ==== +. +.\" here we define \TeX for troff and nroff +.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP +.if n .ds TX TeX +. +.\" and here the same for \LaTeX +.if t \{\ +.ie '\*(.T'dvi' \ +.ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.15v'\s-3A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX +.el .ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.22v'\s-2A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.22v'\fP\*(TX +.\} +.if n .ds LX LaTeX +. +.\" \LaTeXe +.\" note that we need \vareps for TeX instead of \eps which can only be +.\" accessed with the \N escape sequence (in the Math Italic font) +.if t \{\ +.ie '\*(.T'dvi' .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\f(MI\N'34'\fP\v'-0.20v' +.el .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\(*e\v'-0.20v' +.\} +.if n .ds LE LaTeX\ 2e +. +.\" a typewriter font +.if t \{\ +.de C +\fC\\$1\fP +.. +.\} +.if n \{\ +.de C +\\$1 +.. +.\} +. +.\" ==== +.\" ==== end of macro definitions +.\" ==== +. +. +. +.SH NAME +cefsconv \- convert a TeX document in SJIS encoding containing CEF macros +into `preprocessed' form. +. +. +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B cefsconv +< +.I infile +> +.I outfile +. +. +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.B Chinese Encoding Framework +.RB ( CEF ) +developed by Christian Wittern +.C +makes it possible to include CJK characters in various encodings using the +SGML macros +.B &CX-aabb; +for Big\ 5 and CNS encoding and +.B &U-aabb; +for Unicode +.RB ( X +denotes a number between 0 and 7; 0 represents Big\ 5 encoding, 1-7 CNS +encoding planes 1-7. +.B aabb +is either a decimal or hexadecimal number). +.PP +.B \%cefsconv +converts the CEF macros of a SJIS encoded document together with the SJIS +encoding itself into a form which can directly processed with \*(LE. +It is identical to +.IP +.B sjisconv +< +.I infile +| +.B cefconv +> +.I outfile +.PP +This filter is part of the +.B CJK +macro package for \*(LE. +. +. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR \%sjisconv (1), +.BR bg5conv (1), +.BR \%cefconv (1), +.BR cef5conv (1), +.BR \%extconv (1), +.br +the +.B CJK +documentation files. +. +. +.SH AUTHOR +Werner Lemberg +.C diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cfftot1.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cfftot1.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..dbe0512c1da --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cfftot1.1 @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +.ds V 2.34 +.de M +.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3" +.. +.de Sp +.if n .sp +.if t .sp 0.4 +.. +.TH CFFTOT1 1 "LCDF Typetools" "Version \*V" +.SH NAME +cfftot1 \- convert PostScript font from CFF to Type 1 +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B cfftot1 +\%[\fB\-a\fR] +\%[\fIinput\fR [\fIoutput\fR]] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.BR Cfftot1 +converts PostScript font programs in the Compact Font Format (CFF) into +Type 1 font programs in PFB or PFA format, preserving all hints that can be +represented in Type 1. The input file should be a raw CFF file or a +PostScript-flavored OpenType font. If the file +.I output +is not specified output goes to the standard output. +If the file +.I input +is not specified input comes from the standard input. +' +.SH OPTIONS +.PD 0 +.TP 5 +.BI \-a "\fR, " \-\-pfa +Output font in ASCII PFA format. +' +.Sp +.TP 5 +.BI \-b "\fR, " \-\-pfb +Output font in binary PFB format. This is the default. +' +.Sp +.TP 5 +.BI \-n " name\fR, " \-\-name " name" +Output the CFF's component font named +.IR name . +CFF files can contain more than one font, although few do. Use this option +to select a particular font from a multi-font collection. By default +cfftot1 chooses the collection's first font. +' +.Sp +.TP 5 +.BI \-o " file\fR, " \-\-output " file" +Write output font to +.IR file +instead of the standard output. +' +.Sp +.TP 5 +.BR \-q ", " \-\-quiet +Do not generate any error messages. +' +.Sp +.TP 5 +.BR \-h ", " \-\-help +Print usage information and exit. +' +.Sp +.TP 5 +.BR \-v ", " \-\-version +Print the version number and some short non-warranty information and exit. +.PD +' +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.LP +.M t1binary 1 , +.M t1ascii 1 +.LP +.I "Adobe Type 1 Font Format" +.LP +Adobe Technical Notes #5176, +.IR "The Compact Font Format Specification" , +and #5177, +.I "The Type 2 Charstring Format" +.LP +.IR "OpenType Specification" , +Version 1.4 +' +.SH AUTHOR +Eddie Kohler (kohler@icir.org) diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cont-de.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cont-de.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e28b87d88e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cont-de.1 @@ -0,0 +1,458 @@ +.TH PDFETEX 1 "21 August 2004" "Web2C 7.5.3" +.\"===================================================================== +.if n .ds MF Metafont +.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 +.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP +.if n .ds TX TeX +.if n .ds MF Metafont +.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 +.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP\" for troff +.el .ds OX TeX\" for nroff +.\" the same but obliqued +.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX +.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds BX BibTeX +.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX +.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds LX LaTeX +.if t .ds AX \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds AX AmSTeX +.if t .ds AY \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(LX +.if n .ds AY AmSLaTeX +.\"===================================================================== +.SH NAME +pdfetex, pdfeinitex, pdfevirtex \- PDF output from e-TeX +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B pdfetex +.RI [ options ] +.RI [ commands ] +.\"===================================================================== +.SH DESCRIPTION +This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete +documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file +or manual +.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . +.PP +pdfe\*(TX is a version of e-\*(TX that can create +.I PDF +files as well as +.I DVI +files. +.PP +In +.I DVI +mode, pdfe\*(TX can be used as a complete replacement of the e-\*(TX +engine. +.PP +The typical use of pdfe\*(TX is with a pregenerated formats for which +PDF output has been enabled. The +.B pdfetex +command uses the equivalent of the plain e-\*(TX format, and the +.B pdfelatex +command uses the equivalent of the e-\*(LX format. +To generate formats, use the +.B -ini +switch. +.PP +The +.B pdfeinitex +and +.B pdfevirtex +commands are pdfe\*(TX's analogues to the +.B einitex +and +.B evirtex +commands. In this installation, they are symbolic links to the +.B pdfetex +executable. These symbolic links may not exist at all. +.PP +In +.I PDF +mode, pdfe\*(TX can natively handle the +.IR PDF , +.IR JPG , +and +.I PNG +graphics formats. +pdfe\*(TX's handling of its command-line arguments is similar to that of +of the other \*(TX programs in the +.I web2c +implementation. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH OPTIONS +This version of pdfe\*(TX understands the following command line options. +.TP +.BI -fmt \ format +.rb +Use +.I format +as the name of the format to be used, instead of the name by which +pdfe\*(TX was called or a +.I %& +line. +.TP +.B -enc +.rb +Enable the enc\*(TX extensions. This option is only effective in +combination with +.BR -ini . +For documentation of the enc\*(TX extensions see +.BR http://www.olsak.net/enctex.html . +.TP +.B -file-line-error +.rb +Print error messages in the form +.I file:line:error +which is similar to the way many compilers format them. +.TP +.B -no-file-line-error +.rb +Disable printing error messages in the +.I file:line:error +style. +.TP +.B -file-line-error-style +.rb +This is the old name of the +.B -file-line-error +option. +.TP +.B -halt-on-error +.rb +Exit with an error code when an error is encountered during processing. +.TP +.B -help +.rb +Print help message and exit. +.TP +.B -ini +.rb +Start in +.I INI +mode, which is used to dump formats. The +.I INI +mode can be used for typesetting, but no format is preloaded, and +basic initializations like setting catcodes may be required. +.TP +.BI -interaction \ mode +.rb +Sets the interaction mode. The mode can be either +.IR batchmode , +.IR nonstopmode , +.IR scrollmode , +and +.IR errorstopmode . +The meaning of these modes is the same as that of the corresponding +\ecommands. +.TP +.B -ipc +.rb +Send DVI or PDF output to a socket as well as the usual output file. +Whether this option is available is the choice of the installer. +.TP +.B -ipc-start +.rb +As +.BR -ipc , +and starts the server at the other end as well. Whether this option +is available is the choice of the installer. +.TP +.BI -jobname \ name +.rb +Use +.I name +for the job name, instead of deriving it from the name of the input file. +.TP +.BI -kpathsea-debug \ bitmask +.rb +Sets path searching debugging flags according to the bitmask. See the +.I Kpathsea +manual for details. +.TP +.BI -mktex \ fmt +.rb +Enable +.RI mktex fmt , +where +.I fmt +must be either +.I tex +or +.IR tfm . +.TP +.B -mltex +.rb +Enable ML\*(TX extensions. Only effective in combination with +.BR -ini . +.TP +.BI -no-mktex \ fmt +.rb +Disable +.RI mktex fmt , +where +.I fmt +must be either +.I tex +or +.IR tfm . +.TP +.BI -output-comment \ string +.rb +In +.I DVI +mode, use +.I string +for the +.I DVI +file comment instead of the date. This option is ignored +in +.I PDF +mode. +.TP +.BI -output-directory \ directory +.rb Write output files in +.I directory +instead of the current directory. Look up input files in +.I directory +first, the along the normal search path. +.TP +.BI -output-format \ format +.rb +Set the output format mode, where +.I format +must be either +.I pdf +or +.IR dvi . +This also influences the set of graphics formats understood by pdfe\*(TX. +.TP +.B -parse-first-line +.rb +If the first line of the main input file begins with +.I %& +parse it to look for a dump name or a +.B -translate-file +option. +.TP +.B -no-parse-first-line +.rb +Disable parsing of the first line of the main input file. +.TP +.BI -progname \ name +.rb +Pretend to be program +.IR name . +This affects both the format used and the search paths. +.TP +.B -recorder +.rb +Enable the filename recorder. +This leaves a trace of the files opened for input and output +in a file with extension +.IR .fls . +.TP +.B -shell-escape +.rb +Enable the +.BI \ewrite18{ command } +construct. The +.I command +can be any shell command. This construct is normally +disallowed for security reasons. +.TP +.B -no-shell-escape +.rb +Disable the +.BI \ewrite18{ command } +construct, even if it is enabled in the +.I texmf.cnf +file. +.TP +.B -src-specials +.rb +In +.I DVI +mode, insert source specials into the +.I DVI +file. +This option is ignored in +.I PDF +mode. +.TP +.BI -src-specials \ where +.rb +In +.I DVI +mode, insert source specials in certain placed of the +.I DVI +file. +.I where +is a comma-separated value list: +.IR cr , +.IR display , +.IR hbox , +.IR math , +.IR par , +.IR parent , +or +.IR vbox . +This option is ignored in +.I PDF +mode. +.TP +.BI -translate-file \ tcxname +.rb +Use the +.I tcxname +translation table to set the mapping of input characters and +re-mapping of output characters. +.TP +.BI -default-translate-file \ tcxname +.rb +Like +.B -translate-file +except that a +.I %& +line can overrule this setting. +.TP +.B -version +.rb +Print version information and exit. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH ENVIRONMENT +See the Kpathsearch library documentation (the `Path specifications' +node) for precise details of how the environment variables are used. +The +.B kpsewhich +utility can be used to query the values of the variables. +.PP +One caveat: In most pdfe\*(TX formats, you cannot use ~ in a filename you +give directly to pdfe\*(TX, because ~ is an active character, and hence is +expanded, not taken as part of the filename. Other programs, such as +\*(MF, do not have this problem. +.PP +.TP +TEXMFOUTPUT +Normally, pdfe\*(TX puts its output files in the current directory. If +any output file cannot be opened there, it tries to open it in the +directory specified in the environment variable TEXMFOUTPUT. +There is no default value for that variable. For example, if you say +.I pdfetex paper +and the current directory is not writable, if TEXMFOUTPUT has +the value +.IR /tmp , +pdfe\*(TX attempts to create +.I /tmp/paper.log +(and +.IR /tmp/paper.pdf , +if any output is produced.) +.TP +TEXINPUTS +Search path for +.I \einput +and +.I \eopenin +files. +This should probably start with ``.'', so +that user files are found before system files. An empty path +component will be replaced with the paths defined in the +.I texmf.cnf +file. For example, set TEXINPUTS to ".:/home/usr/tex:" to prepend the +current direcory and ``/home/user/tex'' to the standard search path. +.TP +TEXFORMATS +Search path for format files. +.TP +TEXPOOL +search path for +.B pdfetex +internal strings. +.TP +TEXEDIT +Command template for switching to editor. The default, usually +.BR vi , +is set when pdfe\*(TX is compiled. +.TP +TFMFONTS +Search path for font metric +.RI ( .tfm ) +files. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH FILES +The location of the files mentioned below varies from system to +system. Use the +.B kpsewhich +utility to find their locations. +.TP +.I pdfetex.pool +Text file containing pdfe\*(TX's internal strings. +.TP +.I pdftex.map +Filename mapping definitions. +.TP +.I *.tfm +Metric files for pdfe\*(TX's fonts. +.TP +.I *.fmt +Predigested pdfe\*(TX format (.\|fmt) files. +.br +.\"===================================================================== +.SH BUGS +This version of pdfe\*(TX implements a number of optional extensions. +In fact, many of these extensions conflict to a greater or lesser +extent with the definition of pdfe\*(TX. When such extensions are +enabled, the banner printed when pdfe\*(TX starts is changed to print +.B pdfeTeXk +instead of +.BR pdfeTeX . +.PP +This version of pdfe\*(TX fails to trap arithmetic overflow when +dimensions are added or subtracted. Cases where this occurs are rare, +but when it does the generated +.I DVI +file will be invalid. Whether a generated +.I PDF +file would be usable is unknown. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH AVAILABILITY +pdfe\*(TX is available for a large variety of machine architectures +and operation systems. +pdfe\*(TX is part of all major \*(TX distributions. +.P +Information on how to get pdfe\*(TX and related information +is available at the +.BI "http://tug.org" \ TUG +website. +The most recent version of pdfe\*(TX is available for anonymous +ftp at the +.B http://www.pdftex.de/tex/pdftex/ +.IR "pdfe\*(TX development site" . +.P +The following pdfe\*(TX related mailing list is available: +.BR pdftex@tug.org . +This is a majordomo list; +to subscribe send a message containing +.I subscribe pdftex +to +.BR majordomo@tug.org . +.\"===================================================================== +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR tex (1), +.BR mf (1), +.BR etex (1), +.BR pdftex (1). +.\"===================================================================== +.SH AUTHORS +The primary authors of pdf\*(TX are Han The Thanh, Petr Sojka, and +Jiri Zlatuska. +.PP +\*(TX was designed by Donald E. Knuth, +who implemented it using his \*(WB system for Pascal programs. +It was ported to Unix at Stanford by Howard Trickey, and +at Cornell by Pavel Curtis. +The version now offered with the Unix \*(TX distribution is that +generated by the \*(WB to C system +.RB ( web2c ), +originally written by Tomas Rokicki and Tim Morgan. +.PP +The enc\*(TX extensions were written by Petr Olsak. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cont-en.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cont-en.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e28b87d88e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cont-en.1 @@ -0,0 +1,458 @@ +.TH PDFETEX 1 "21 August 2004" "Web2C 7.5.3" +.\"===================================================================== +.if n .ds MF Metafont +.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 +.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP +.if n .ds TX TeX +.if n .ds MF Metafont +.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 +.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP\" for troff +.el .ds OX TeX\" for nroff +.\" the same but obliqued +.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX +.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds BX BibTeX +.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX +.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds LX LaTeX +.if t .ds AX \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds AX AmSTeX +.if t .ds AY \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(LX +.if n .ds AY AmSLaTeX +.\"===================================================================== +.SH NAME +pdfetex, pdfeinitex, pdfevirtex \- PDF output from e-TeX +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B pdfetex +.RI [ options ] +.RI [ commands ] +.\"===================================================================== +.SH DESCRIPTION +This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete +documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file +or manual +.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . +.PP +pdfe\*(TX is a version of e-\*(TX that can create +.I PDF +files as well as +.I DVI +files. +.PP +In +.I DVI +mode, pdfe\*(TX can be used as a complete replacement of the e-\*(TX +engine. +.PP +The typical use of pdfe\*(TX is with a pregenerated formats for which +PDF output has been enabled. The +.B pdfetex +command uses the equivalent of the plain e-\*(TX format, and the +.B pdfelatex +command uses the equivalent of the e-\*(LX format. +To generate formats, use the +.B -ini +switch. +.PP +The +.B pdfeinitex +and +.B pdfevirtex +commands are pdfe\*(TX's analogues to the +.B einitex +and +.B evirtex +commands. In this installation, they are symbolic links to the +.B pdfetex +executable. These symbolic links may not exist at all. +.PP +In +.I PDF +mode, pdfe\*(TX can natively handle the +.IR PDF , +.IR JPG , +and +.I PNG +graphics formats. +pdfe\*(TX's handling of its command-line arguments is similar to that of +of the other \*(TX programs in the +.I web2c +implementation. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH OPTIONS +This version of pdfe\*(TX understands the following command line options. +.TP +.BI -fmt \ format +.rb +Use +.I format +as the name of the format to be used, instead of the name by which +pdfe\*(TX was called or a +.I %& +line. +.TP +.B -enc +.rb +Enable the enc\*(TX extensions. This option is only effective in +combination with +.BR -ini . +For documentation of the enc\*(TX extensions see +.BR http://www.olsak.net/enctex.html . +.TP +.B -file-line-error +.rb +Print error messages in the form +.I file:line:error +which is similar to the way many compilers format them. +.TP +.B -no-file-line-error +.rb +Disable printing error messages in the +.I file:line:error +style. +.TP +.B -file-line-error-style +.rb +This is the old name of the +.B -file-line-error +option. +.TP +.B -halt-on-error +.rb +Exit with an error code when an error is encountered during processing. +.TP +.B -help +.rb +Print help message and exit. +.TP +.B -ini +.rb +Start in +.I INI +mode, which is used to dump formats. The +.I INI +mode can be used for typesetting, but no format is preloaded, and +basic initializations like setting catcodes may be required. +.TP +.BI -interaction \ mode +.rb +Sets the interaction mode. The mode can be either +.IR batchmode , +.IR nonstopmode , +.IR scrollmode , +and +.IR errorstopmode . +The meaning of these modes is the same as that of the corresponding +\ecommands. +.TP +.B -ipc +.rb +Send DVI or PDF output to a socket as well as the usual output file. +Whether this option is available is the choice of the installer. +.TP +.B -ipc-start +.rb +As +.BR -ipc , +and starts the server at the other end as well. Whether this option +is available is the choice of the installer. +.TP +.BI -jobname \ name +.rb +Use +.I name +for the job name, instead of deriving it from the name of the input file. +.TP +.BI -kpathsea-debug \ bitmask +.rb +Sets path searching debugging flags according to the bitmask. See the +.I Kpathsea +manual for details. +.TP +.BI -mktex \ fmt +.rb +Enable +.RI mktex fmt , +where +.I fmt +must be either +.I tex +or +.IR tfm . +.TP +.B -mltex +.rb +Enable ML\*(TX extensions. Only effective in combination with +.BR -ini . +.TP +.BI -no-mktex \ fmt +.rb +Disable +.RI mktex fmt , +where +.I fmt +must be either +.I tex +or +.IR tfm . +.TP +.BI -output-comment \ string +.rb +In +.I DVI +mode, use +.I string +for the +.I DVI +file comment instead of the date. This option is ignored +in +.I PDF +mode. +.TP +.BI -output-directory \ directory +.rb Write output files in +.I directory +instead of the current directory. Look up input files in +.I directory +first, the along the normal search path. +.TP +.BI -output-format \ format +.rb +Set the output format mode, where +.I format +must be either +.I pdf +or +.IR dvi . +This also influences the set of graphics formats understood by pdfe\*(TX. +.TP +.B -parse-first-line +.rb +If the first line of the main input file begins with +.I %& +parse it to look for a dump name or a +.B -translate-file +option. +.TP +.B -no-parse-first-line +.rb +Disable parsing of the first line of the main input file. +.TP +.BI -progname \ name +.rb +Pretend to be program +.IR name . +This affects both the format used and the search paths. +.TP +.B -recorder +.rb +Enable the filename recorder. +This leaves a trace of the files opened for input and output +in a file with extension +.IR .fls . +.TP +.B -shell-escape +.rb +Enable the +.BI \ewrite18{ command } +construct. The +.I command +can be any shell command. This construct is normally +disallowed for security reasons. +.TP +.B -no-shell-escape +.rb +Disable the +.BI \ewrite18{ command } +construct, even if it is enabled in the +.I texmf.cnf +file. +.TP +.B -src-specials +.rb +In +.I DVI +mode, insert source specials into the +.I DVI +file. +This option is ignored in +.I PDF +mode. +.TP +.BI -src-specials \ where +.rb +In +.I DVI +mode, insert source specials in certain placed of the +.I DVI +file. +.I where +is a comma-separated value list: +.IR cr , +.IR display , +.IR hbox , +.IR math , +.IR par , +.IR parent , +or +.IR vbox . +This option is ignored in +.I PDF +mode. +.TP +.BI -translate-file \ tcxname +.rb +Use the +.I tcxname +translation table to set the mapping of input characters and +re-mapping of output characters. +.TP +.BI -default-translate-file \ tcxname +.rb +Like +.B -translate-file +except that a +.I %& +line can overrule this setting. +.TP +.B -version +.rb +Print version information and exit. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH ENVIRONMENT +See the Kpathsearch library documentation (the `Path specifications' +node) for precise details of how the environment variables are used. +The +.B kpsewhich +utility can be used to query the values of the variables. +.PP +One caveat: In most pdfe\*(TX formats, you cannot use ~ in a filename you +give directly to pdfe\*(TX, because ~ is an active character, and hence is +expanded, not taken as part of the filename. Other programs, such as +\*(MF, do not have this problem. +.PP +.TP +TEXMFOUTPUT +Normally, pdfe\*(TX puts its output files in the current directory. If +any output file cannot be opened there, it tries to open it in the +directory specified in the environment variable TEXMFOUTPUT. +There is no default value for that variable. For example, if you say +.I pdfetex paper +and the current directory is not writable, if TEXMFOUTPUT has +the value +.IR /tmp , +pdfe\*(TX attempts to create +.I /tmp/paper.log +(and +.IR /tmp/paper.pdf , +if any output is produced.) +.TP +TEXINPUTS +Search path for +.I \einput +and +.I \eopenin +files. +This should probably start with ``.'', so +that user files are found before system files. An empty path +component will be replaced with the paths defined in the +.I texmf.cnf +file. For example, set TEXINPUTS to ".:/home/usr/tex:" to prepend the +current direcory and ``/home/user/tex'' to the standard search path. +.TP +TEXFORMATS +Search path for format files. +.TP +TEXPOOL +search path for +.B pdfetex +internal strings. +.TP +TEXEDIT +Command template for switching to editor. The default, usually +.BR vi , +is set when pdfe\*(TX is compiled. +.TP +TFMFONTS +Search path for font metric +.RI ( .tfm ) +files. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH FILES +The location of the files mentioned below varies from system to +system. Use the +.B kpsewhich +utility to find their locations. +.TP +.I pdfetex.pool +Text file containing pdfe\*(TX's internal strings. +.TP +.I pdftex.map +Filename mapping definitions. +.TP +.I *.tfm +Metric files for pdfe\*(TX's fonts. +.TP +.I *.fmt +Predigested pdfe\*(TX format (.\|fmt) files. +.br +.\"===================================================================== +.SH BUGS +This version of pdfe\*(TX implements a number of optional extensions. +In fact, many of these extensions conflict to a greater or lesser +extent with the definition of pdfe\*(TX. When such extensions are +enabled, the banner printed when pdfe\*(TX starts is changed to print +.B pdfeTeXk +instead of +.BR pdfeTeX . +.PP +This version of pdfe\*(TX fails to trap arithmetic overflow when +dimensions are added or subtracted. Cases where this occurs are rare, +but when it does the generated +.I DVI +file will be invalid. Whether a generated +.I PDF +file would be usable is unknown. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH AVAILABILITY +pdfe\*(TX is available for a large variety of machine architectures +and operation systems. +pdfe\*(TX is part of all major \*(TX distributions. +.P +Information on how to get pdfe\*(TX and related information +is available at the +.BI "http://tug.org" \ TUG +website. +The most recent version of pdfe\*(TX is available for anonymous +ftp at the +.B http://www.pdftex.de/tex/pdftex/ +.IR "pdfe\*(TX development site" . +.P +The following pdfe\*(TX related mailing list is available: +.BR pdftex@tug.org . +This is a majordomo list; +to subscribe send a message containing +.I subscribe pdftex +to +.BR majordomo@tug.org . +.\"===================================================================== +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR tex (1), +.BR mf (1), +.BR etex (1), +.BR pdftex (1). +.\"===================================================================== +.SH AUTHORS +The primary authors of pdf\*(TX are Han The Thanh, Petr Sojka, and +Jiri Zlatuska. +.PP +\*(TX was designed by Donald E. Knuth, +who implemented it using his \*(WB system for Pascal programs. +It was ported to Unix at Stanford by Howard Trickey, and +at Cornell by Pavel Curtis. +The version now offered with the Unix \*(TX distribution is that +generated by the \*(WB to C system +.RB ( web2c ), +originally written by Tomas Rokicki and Tim Morgan. +.PP +The enc\*(TX extensions were written by Petr Olsak. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cont-nl.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cont-nl.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e28b87d88e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cont-nl.1 @@ -0,0 +1,458 @@ +.TH PDFETEX 1 "21 August 2004" "Web2C 7.5.3" +.\"===================================================================== +.if n .ds MF Metafont +.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 +.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP +.if n .ds TX TeX +.if n .ds MF Metafont +.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 +.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP\" for troff +.el .ds OX TeX\" for nroff +.\" the same but obliqued +.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX +.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds BX BibTeX +.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX +.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds LX LaTeX +.if t .ds AX \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds AX AmSTeX +.if t .ds AY \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(LX +.if n .ds AY AmSLaTeX +.\"===================================================================== +.SH NAME +pdfetex, pdfeinitex, pdfevirtex \- PDF output from e-TeX +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B pdfetex +.RI [ options ] +.RI [ commands ] +.\"===================================================================== +.SH DESCRIPTION +This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete +documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file +or manual +.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . +.PP +pdfe\*(TX is a version of e-\*(TX that can create +.I PDF +files as well as +.I DVI +files. +.PP +In +.I DVI +mode, pdfe\*(TX can be used as a complete replacement of the e-\*(TX +engine. +.PP +The typical use of pdfe\*(TX is with a pregenerated formats for which +PDF output has been enabled. The +.B pdfetex +command uses the equivalent of the plain e-\*(TX format, and the +.B pdfelatex +command uses the equivalent of the e-\*(LX format. +To generate formats, use the +.B -ini +switch. +.PP +The +.B pdfeinitex +and +.B pdfevirtex +commands are pdfe\*(TX's analogues to the +.B einitex +and +.B evirtex +commands. In this installation, they are symbolic links to the +.B pdfetex +executable. These symbolic links may not exist at all. +.PP +In +.I PDF +mode, pdfe\*(TX can natively handle the +.IR PDF , +.IR JPG , +and +.I PNG +graphics formats. +pdfe\*(TX's handling of its command-line arguments is similar to that of +of the other \*(TX programs in the +.I web2c +implementation. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH OPTIONS +This version of pdfe\*(TX understands the following command line options. +.TP +.BI -fmt \ format +.rb +Use +.I format +as the name of the format to be used, instead of the name by which +pdfe\*(TX was called or a +.I %& +line. +.TP +.B -enc +.rb +Enable the enc\*(TX extensions. This option is only effective in +combination with +.BR -ini . +For documentation of the enc\*(TX extensions see +.BR http://www.olsak.net/enctex.html . +.TP +.B -file-line-error +.rb +Print error messages in the form +.I file:line:error +which is similar to the way many compilers format them. +.TP +.B -no-file-line-error +.rb +Disable printing error messages in the +.I file:line:error +style. +.TP +.B -file-line-error-style +.rb +This is the old name of the +.B -file-line-error +option. +.TP +.B -halt-on-error +.rb +Exit with an error code when an error is encountered during processing. +.TP +.B -help +.rb +Print help message and exit. +.TP +.B -ini +.rb +Start in +.I INI +mode, which is used to dump formats. The +.I INI +mode can be used for typesetting, but no format is preloaded, and +basic initializations like setting catcodes may be required. +.TP +.BI -interaction \ mode +.rb +Sets the interaction mode. The mode can be either +.IR batchmode , +.IR nonstopmode , +.IR scrollmode , +and +.IR errorstopmode . +The meaning of these modes is the same as that of the corresponding +\ecommands. +.TP +.B -ipc +.rb +Send DVI or PDF output to a socket as well as the usual output file. +Whether this option is available is the choice of the installer. +.TP +.B -ipc-start +.rb +As +.BR -ipc , +and starts the server at the other end as well. Whether this option +is available is the choice of the installer. +.TP +.BI -jobname \ name +.rb +Use +.I name +for the job name, instead of deriving it from the name of the input file. +.TP +.BI -kpathsea-debug \ bitmask +.rb +Sets path searching debugging flags according to the bitmask. See the +.I Kpathsea +manual for details. +.TP +.BI -mktex \ fmt +.rb +Enable +.RI mktex fmt , +where +.I fmt +must be either +.I tex +or +.IR tfm . +.TP +.B -mltex +.rb +Enable ML\*(TX extensions. Only effective in combination with +.BR -ini . +.TP +.BI -no-mktex \ fmt +.rb +Disable +.RI mktex fmt , +where +.I fmt +must be either +.I tex +or +.IR tfm . +.TP +.BI -output-comment \ string +.rb +In +.I DVI +mode, use +.I string +for the +.I DVI +file comment instead of the date. This option is ignored +in +.I PDF +mode. +.TP +.BI -output-directory \ directory +.rb Write output files in +.I directory +instead of the current directory. Look up input files in +.I directory +first, the along the normal search path. +.TP +.BI -output-format \ format +.rb +Set the output format mode, where +.I format +must be either +.I pdf +or +.IR dvi . +This also influences the set of graphics formats understood by pdfe\*(TX. +.TP +.B -parse-first-line +.rb +If the first line of the main input file begins with +.I %& +parse it to look for a dump name or a +.B -translate-file +option. +.TP +.B -no-parse-first-line +.rb +Disable parsing of the first line of the main input file. +.TP +.BI -progname \ name +.rb +Pretend to be program +.IR name . +This affects both the format used and the search paths. +.TP +.B -recorder +.rb +Enable the filename recorder. +This leaves a trace of the files opened for input and output +in a file with extension +.IR .fls . +.TP +.B -shell-escape +.rb +Enable the +.BI \ewrite18{ command } +construct. The +.I command +can be any shell command. This construct is normally +disallowed for security reasons. +.TP +.B -no-shell-escape +.rb +Disable the +.BI \ewrite18{ command } +construct, even if it is enabled in the +.I texmf.cnf +file. +.TP +.B -src-specials +.rb +In +.I DVI +mode, insert source specials into the +.I DVI +file. +This option is ignored in +.I PDF +mode. +.TP +.BI -src-specials \ where +.rb +In +.I DVI +mode, insert source specials in certain placed of the +.I DVI +file. +.I where +is a comma-separated value list: +.IR cr , +.IR display , +.IR hbox , +.IR math , +.IR par , +.IR parent , +or +.IR vbox . +This option is ignored in +.I PDF +mode. +.TP +.BI -translate-file \ tcxname +.rb +Use the +.I tcxname +translation table to set the mapping of input characters and +re-mapping of output characters. +.TP +.BI -default-translate-file \ tcxname +.rb +Like +.B -translate-file +except that a +.I %& +line can overrule this setting. +.TP +.B -version +.rb +Print version information and exit. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH ENVIRONMENT +See the Kpathsearch library documentation (the `Path specifications' +node) for precise details of how the environment variables are used. +The +.B kpsewhich +utility can be used to query the values of the variables. +.PP +One caveat: In most pdfe\*(TX formats, you cannot use ~ in a filename you +give directly to pdfe\*(TX, because ~ is an active character, and hence is +expanded, not taken as part of the filename. Other programs, such as +\*(MF, do not have this problem. +.PP +.TP +TEXMFOUTPUT +Normally, pdfe\*(TX puts its output files in the current directory. If +any output file cannot be opened there, it tries to open it in the +directory specified in the environment variable TEXMFOUTPUT. +There is no default value for that variable. For example, if you say +.I pdfetex paper +and the current directory is not writable, if TEXMFOUTPUT has +the value +.IR /tmp , +pdfe\*(TX attempts to create +.I /tmp/paper.log +(and +.IR /tmp/paper.pdf , +if any output is produced.) +.TP +TEXINPUTS +Search path for +.I \einput +and +.I \eopenin +files. +This should probably start with ``.'', so +that user files are found before system files. An empty path +component will be replaced with the paths defined in the +.I texmf.cnf +file. For example, set TEXINPUTS to ".:/home/usr/tex:" to prepend the +current direcory and ``/home/user/tex'' to the standard search path. +.TP +TEXFORMATS +Search path for format files. +.TP +TEXPOOL +search path for +.B pdfetex +internal strings. +.TP +TEXEDIT +Command template for switching to editor. The default, usually +.BR vi , +is set when pdfe\*(TX is compiled. +.TP +TFMFONTS +Search path for font metric +.RI ( .tfm ) +files. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH FILES +The location of the files mentioned below varies from system to +system. Use the +.B kpsewhich +utility to find their locations. +.TP +.I pdfetex.pool +Text file containing pdfe\*(TX's internal strings. +.TP +.I pdftex.map +Filename mapping definitions. +.TP +.I *.tfm +Metric files for pdfe\*(TX's fonts. +.TP +.I *.fmt +Predigested pdfe\*(TX format (.\|fmt) files. +.br +.\"===================================================================== +.SH BUGS +This version of pdfe\*(TX implements a number of optional extensions. +In fact, many of these extensions conflict to a greater or lesser +extent with the definition of pdfe\*(TX. When such extensions are +enabled, the banner printed when pdfe\*(TX starts is changed to print +.B pdfeTeXk +instead of +.BR pdfeTeX . +.PP +This version of pdfe\*(TX fails to trap arithmetic overflow when +dimensions are added or subtracted. Cases where this occurs are rare, +but when it does the generated +.I DVI +file will be invalid. Whether a generated +.I PDF +file would be usable is unknown. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH AVAILABILITY +pdfe\*(TX is available for a large variety of machine architectures +and operation systems. +pdfe\*(TX is part of all major \*(TX distributions. +.P +Information on how to get pdfe\*(TX and related information +is available at the +.BI "http://tug.org" \ TUG +website. +The most recent version of pdfe\*(TX is available for anonymous +ftp at the +.B http://www.pdftex.de/tex/pdftex/ +.IR "pdfe\*(TX development site" . +.P +The following pdfe\*(TX related mailing list is available: +.BR pdftex@tug.org . +This is a majordomo list; +to subscribe send a message containing +.I subscribe pdftex +to +.BR majordomo@tug.org . +.\"===================================================================== +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR tex (1), +.BR mf (1), +.BR etex (1), +.BR pdftex (1). +.\"===================================================================== +.SH AUTHORS +The primary authors of pdf\*(TX are Han The Thanh, Petr Sojka, and +Jiri Zlatuska. +.PP +\*(TX was designed by Donald E. Knuth, +who implemented it using his \*(WB system for Pascal programs. +It was ported to Unix at Stanford by Howard Trickey, and +at Cornell by Pavel Curtis. +The version now offered with the Unix \*(TX distribution is that +generated by the \*(WB to C system +.RB ( web2c ), +originally written by Tomas Rokicki and Tim Morgan. +.PP +The enc\*(TX extensions were written by Petr Olsak. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctangle.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctangle.1 new file mode 120000 index 00000000000..36112227c2d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctangle.1 @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +cweb.1 \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctie.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctie.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8058d364e5a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctie.1 @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +.TH CTIE 1 20/04/2003 +.SH NAME +ctie \- merge or apply CWEB change files +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B ctie +.B \-c|\-m +.I outputfile masterfile changefile... + +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.I CTIE +program is used to process multiple change files used with the CWEB +system for literate programming. The CWEB programs allow one to apply +patches to a source file (the +.IR masterfile ) +by means of a single change file. +.I CTIE +can be used to either merge up to 32 change files into a single one or +to apply the changes to the +.I masterfile +in order to create a new master file. Output of either the new change +file or the patched master file goes into +.IR outputfile . +Any include files (indicated using the CWEB +.I @i +command) are fully expanded during +.I CTIE +processing, which means that the change files are able to modify the +contents of any included files. Also, if this program has been +compiled using the +.I kpathsea +library, then files are searched for using the +.I CWEBINPUTS +environment variable, as described in the +.I kpathsea +documentation. +.SH OPTIONS +.TP +.B \-c +Create a single change file from the given +.IR changefiles . +.TP +.B \-m +Create a new master file by applying the given +.IR changefiles . +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR cweb (1), +.IR ctiedoc.tex , +.BR tie (1), +.BR web (1). +.SH "AUTHOR" +Julian Gilbey, jdg@debian.org. The original TIE program was by Klaus +Guntermann, TH Darmstadt, Institut f. Theoretische Informatik. The +TIE man page was by Joachim Schnitter, TH Darmstadt, Phys. Chemie I, +and was modified for CTIE by Julian Gilbey. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweave.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweave.1 new file mode 120000 index 00000000000..36112227c2d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweave.1 @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +cweb.1 \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweb.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweb.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..617f92379b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweb.1 @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ +.TH CWEB 1 "19 December 2004" "Web2C 7.5.5" +. +.SH NAME +ctangle, cweave \- translate CWEB to C and/or TeX +. +.SH SYNOPSIS +.na +.B ctangle +[ +.B \-bhp +] [ +.B +s +] webfile[.w] [changefile[.ch]] [outputfile[.c]] +.br +.B cweave +[ +.B \-befhpx +] [ +.B +s +] webfile[.w] [changefile[.ch]] [outputfile[.tex]] +.ad +. +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.I ctangle +program converts a CWEB +source document into a C\ program that may be compiled in the usual way. +The output file includes #line specifications so that debugging can be +done in terms of the CWEB source file. +.PP +The +.I cweave +program converts the same CWEB file into a TeX file that may be +formatted and printed in the usual way. +It takes appropriate care of typographic details like page +layout and the use of indentation, italics, boldface, etc., and it supplies +extensive cross-index information that it gathers automatically. +.PP +CWEB allows you to prepare a single +document containing all the information that is needed both to produce +a compilable C\ program and to produce a well-formatted document +describing the program in as much detail as the writer may desire. +The user of CWEB ought to be familiar with TeX as well as\ C. +.PP +The command line should have one, two, or three names on it. +The first is taken as the CWEB file (and .w is added if there is no +extension). +If that file cannot be opened, the extension .web is tried instead. +(But .w is recommended, since .web usually implies Pascal.) +If there is a second name, it is a change file (and .ch is added if there is +no extension). +The change file overrides parts of the WEB file, +as described in the documentation. +If there is a third name, it overrides +the default name of the output file, which is ordinarily the same as +the name of the input file (but on the current directory) with the +extension .c or .tex. +.PP +Options in the command line may be either turned off with\ \- +(if they are on by default) or turned on with\ + (if they are off by +default). +In fact, the options are processed from left to right, +so a sequence like -f\ +f corresponds to +f (which is the default). +.PP +The +.B \-b +option suppresses the banner line that normally appears on your terminal +when ctangle or cweave begins. +The +.B \-h +option suppresses the happy message that normally appears if the processing +was successful. +The +.B \-p +option suppresses progress reports (starred module numbers) as the processing +takes place. +If you say -bhp, you get nothing but error messages. +.PP +The +.B +s +option prints statistics about memory usage at the end of a run +(assuming that the programs have been compiled with the -DSTAT switch). +.PP +There are three other options applicable to +.I cweave +only: +.B \-f +means do not force a newline after every statement in the formatted output. +.B \-e +inhibits the enclosure of C\ material formatted by +.I cweave +in brackets +\ePB{...}. +Such brackets are normally inserted so that special hooks +can be used by +.I cweb-latex +and similar programs. +.B \-x +means omit the index and table of contents. +. +.SH FILES +The location of the files mentioned below varies from system to +system. Use the +.B kpsewhich +utility to find their locations. +.TP +.I cwebmac.tex +TeX macros used by cweave output. +.TP +.I cwebman.tex +The user manual. +. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.TP +.I Literate Programming +by D. E. Knuth +.TP +.I Weaving a Program +by Wayne Sewell +.TP +.I The CWEB System of Structured Documentation +by Donald E. Knuth and Silvio Levy (hardcopy version of cwebman.tex +and the source code listings) +.TP +tex(1), cc(1) +. +.SH AUTHORS +Don Knuth wrote WEB for TeX and Pascal. +Silvio Levy designed and developed CWEB +by adapting the WEB conventions to\ C and by recoding everything in CWEB. +Knuth began using CWEB and made further refinements. +Many other helpers are acknowledged in the CWEB manual. + diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/detex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/detex.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..93e71005746 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/detex.1 @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ +.TH DETEX 1L "12 August 1993" "Purdue University" +.SH NAME +detex \- a filter to strip \fITeX\fP commands from a .tex file. +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B detex +[ \fB\-clnstw\fR ] [ \fB\-e\fI environment-list\fR ] [ \fIfilename\fR[.tex] ... ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Detex +(Version 2.6) +reads each file in sequence, removes all comments and +.I TeX +control sequences +and writes the remainder on the standard output. +All text in math mode and display mode is removed. +By default, +.I detex +follows \\input commands. +If a file cannot be opened, a warning message is +printed and the command is ignored. +If the +.B \-n +option is used, no \\input or \\include commands will be processed. +This allows single file processing. +If no input file is given on the command line, +.I detex +reads from standard input. +.PP +If the magic sequence ``\\begin{document}'' appears in the text, +.I detex +assumes it is dealing with +.I LaTeX +source and +.I detex +recognizes additional constructs used in +.IR LaTeX . +These include the \\include and \\includeonly commands. +The +.B \-l +option can be used to force +.I LaTeX +mode and the +.B \-t +option can be used to force +.I TeX +mode regardless of input content. +.PP +Text in various environment modes of +.I LaTeX +is ignored. The default modes are array, eqnarray, equation, figure, +mathmatica, picture, table and verbatim. The +.B \-e +option can be used to specify a comma separated +.I environment-list +of environments to ignore. The list replaces the defaults so specifying an +empty list effectively causes no environments to be ignored. +.PP +The +.B \-c +option can be used in +.I LaTeX +mode to have detex echo the arguments to \\cite, +\\ref, and \\pageref macros. This can be useful when sending the output to +a style checker. +.PP +.I Detex +assumes the standard character classes are being used for +.IR TeX . +.I Detex +allows white space between control sequences +and magic characters like `{' when recognizing things like +.I LaTeX +environments. +.PP +If the +.B \-w +flag is given, the output is a word list, one `word' (string of two or more +letters and apostrophes beginning with a letter) +per line, and all other characters ignored. +Without \fB\-w\fR the output follows the original, +with the deletions mentioned above. Newline characters are +preserved where possible +so that the lines of output match the input as closely as possible. +.PP +The TEXINPUTS environment variable is used to find \\input and \\include +files. Like \fITeX\fP, it interprets a leading or trailing `:' as the default +TEXINPUTS. It does \fInot\fP support the `//' directory expansion magic sequence. +.PP +Detex now handles the basic \fITeX\fP ligatures as a special case, replacing the +ligatures with acceptable charater substitutes. This eliminates +spelling errors introduced by merely removing them. The ligatures are +\\aa, \\ae, \\oe, \\ss, \\o, \\l (and their upper-case +equivalents). The special "dotless" characters \\i and \\j are also +replaced with i and j respectively. +.PP +Note that previous versions of +.I detex +would replace control sequences with a space character to prevent words +from running together. +However, this caused accents in the middle of words to break words, generating +"spelling errors" that were not desirable. +Therefore, the new version merely removes these accents. +The old functionality can be essentially duplicated by using the +.B \-s +option. +.SH SEE ALSO +tex(1L) +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +Nesting of \\input is allowed but the number of opened files must not +exceed the system's limit on the number of simultaneously opened files. +.I Detex +ignores unrecognized option characters after printing a warning message. +.SH AUTHOR +Daniel Trinkle, Computer Science Department, Purdue University +.SH BUGS +.I Detex +is not a complete +.I TeX +interpreter, so it can be confused by some constructs. +Most errors result in too much rather than too little output. +.PP +Running \fILaTeX\fR +source without a ``\\begin{document}'' +through \fIdetex\fR may produce +errors. +.PP +Suggestions for improvements are (mildly) encouraged. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dmp.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dmp.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..69f54d4040b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dmp.1 @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +.TH DMP 1 "4 January 1998" "Web2C 7.5.5" +.\"===================================================================== +.if n .ds MP MetaPost +.if t .ds MP MetaPost +.if n .ds MF Metafont +.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 +.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP +.if n .ds TX TeX +.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff +.el .ds OX TeX for nroff +.\" the same but obliqued +.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX +.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds BX BibTeX +.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX +.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds LX LaTeX +.\"===================================================================== +.SH NAME +dmp \- translate Troff output to low-level MetaPost input +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B dmp +.RI [ option ] +.I ditrofffile +.RI [ mpxfile ] +.\"===================================================================== +.SH DESCRIPTION +This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete +documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file +or manual +.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . +.PP +The +.B dmp +program generates \*(MP source code from the +.IR ditrofffile . +The generated code is written in +.I mpxfile +if it is specified, and to standard output otherwise. +.PP +.B dmp +is typically called from scripts like +.BR makempx , +not from the command line. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH OPTIONS +.B dmp +accepts the following options: +.TP +.B --help +.rb +Print help message and exit. +.TP +.B --version +.rb +Print version information and exit. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR mpost (1), +.BR makempx (1). diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dt2dv.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dt2dv.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d3b4726d2b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dt2dv.1 @@ -0,0 +1,156 @@ +.\" ==================================================================== +.\" @Troff-man-file{ +.\" author = "Nelson H. F. Beebe and Geoffrey R. D. Tobin", +.\" version = "0.6.0", +.\" date = "08 March 1995", +.\" time = "19:57:00 GMT +11", +.\" filename = "dt2dv.man", +.\" address = "Center for Scientific Computing +.\" Department of Mathematics +.\" University of Utah +.\" Salt Lake City, UT 84112 +.\" USA", +.\" telephone = "+1 801 581 5254", +.\" FAX = "+1 801 581 4148", +.\" checksum = "03708 156 634 4989", +.\" email = "beebe@math.utah.edu (Internet)", +.\" codetable = "ISO/ASCII", +.\" keywords = "DVI, TeX", +.\" supported = "no", +.\" docstring = "This file contains the UNIX manual pages +.\" for the dt2dv utility, a program for +.\" converting a DTL text representation of a TeX +.\" DVI file, usually produced by the companion +.\" dv2dt utility, back to a binary DVI file. +.\" +.\" The checksum field above contains a CRC-16 +.\" checksum as the first value, followed by the +.\" equivalent of the standard UNIX wc (word +.\" count) utility output of lines, words, and +.\" characters. This is produced by Robert +.\" Solovay's checksum utility.", +.\" } +.\" ==================================================================== +.if t .ds Te T\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X +.if n .ds Te TeX +.TH DT2DV 1 "08 March 1995" "Version 0.6.0" +.\"====================================================================== +.SH NAME +dt2dv \- convert a DTL text representation of a TeX DVI file to a binary DVI file +.\"====================================================================== +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B dt2dv +.RB [ \-debug ] +.RB [ \-group ] +.RB [ \-si ] +.RB [ \-so ] +.I [input-DTL-file] +.I [output-DVI-file] +.PP +In the absence of the +.B \-si +and +.B \-so +options, +both file arguments are +.IR required +in the order +.B input-DTL-file output-DVI-file . +But also see the OPTIONS section below. +No default file extensions are supplied. +.\"====================================================================== +.SH DESCRIPTION +.B dt2dv +converts a text representation of a \*(Te\& DVI +file, usually produced by the companion +.BR dv2dt (1) +utility, back to a binary DVI file. DTL +.RI ( "DVI Text Language" ) +files can be edited, with care, and then restored +to DVI form for processing by any \*(Te\& DVI +driver program. In DTL files, font directory names +and font names are preceded by a length field, +which must be updated if the names are modified. +.PP +.BR dvitype (1) +can also display a textual representation of DVI +files, but in some implementations at least, it +cannot be used in batch mode, and its output is +not well-suited for conversion back to a DVI file. +.PP +The format of \*(Te\& DVI files is fully described +in +Donald E. Knuth, +.IR "\*(Te\&: The Program" , +Addison-Wesley (1986), ISBN 0-201-13437-3, as well +as in the +.BR dvitype (1) +literate program source code. Brief descriptions +of the DTL and DVI formats are given in +.BR dv2dt (1). +.\"====================================================================== +.SH OPTIONS +.\"----------------------------------------------- +.TP \w'\-debug'u+3n +.B \-debug +Turn on detailed debugging output. +.\"----------------------------------------------- +.TP +.B \-group +Expect each DTL command to be in parentheses. +.\"----------------------------------------------- +.TP +.B \-si +Read all DTL commands from standard input. +.\"----------------------------------------------- +.TP +.B \-so +Write all DVI commands to standard output. +.\"====================================================================== +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR dv2dt (1), +.BR dvitype (1), +.BR tex (1). +.\"====================================================================== +.SH FILES +.TP \w'\fI*.dvi\fP'u+3n +.I *.dvi +binary \*(Te\& DVI file. +.TP +.I *.dtl +text representation of a \*(Te\& DVI file in +.I "DVI Text Language" +format. +.\"====================================================================== +.SH AUTHOR +.B dt2dv +and +.BR dv2dt (1) +were written by +.RS +.nf +Geoffrey Tobin +Department of Electronic Engineering +La Trobe University +Bundoora, Victoria 3083 +Australia +Tel: +61 3 479 3736 +FAX: +61 3 479 3025 +Email: +.fi +.RE +.PP +These manual pages were written primarily by +.RS +.nf +Nelson H. F. Beebe, Ph.D. +Center for Scientific Computing +Department of Mathematics +University of Utah +Salt Lake City, UT 84112 +Tel: +1 801 581 5254 +FAX: +1 801 581 4148 +Email: +.fi +.RE +.\"==============================[The End]============================== diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dv2dt.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dv2dt.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..79f6368b80e --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dv2dt.1 @@ -0,0 +1,715 @@ +.\" ==================================================================== +.\" @Troff-man-file{ +.\" author = "Nelson H. F. Beebe and Geoffrey Tobin", +.\" version = "0.6.0", +.\" date = "08 March 1995", +.\" time = "19:52:00 GMT +11", +.\" filename = "dv2dt.man", +.\" address = "Center for Scientific Computing +.\" Department of Mathematics +.\" University of Utah +.\" Salt Lake City, UT 84112 +.\" USA", +.\" telephone = "+1 801 581 5254", +.\" FAX = "+1 801 581 4148", +.\" checksum = "32328 715 2191 12898", +.\" email = "beebe@math.utah.edu (Internet)", +.\" codetable = "ISO/ASCII", +.\" keywords = "DVI, TeX", +.\" supported = "no", +.\" docstring = "This file contains the UNIX manual pages +.\" for the dv2dt utility, a program for +.\" converting a binary TeX DVI file to an +.\" editable text representation in DTL (DVI Text +.\" Language). The companion dt2dv utility can +.\" convert the output DTL file back to a binary +.\" DVI file. +.\" +.\" The checksum field above contains a CRC-16 +.\" checksum as the first value, followed by the +.\" equivalent of the standard UNIX wc (word +.\" count) utility output of lines, words, and +.\" characters. This is produced by Robert +.\" Solovay's checksum utility.", +.\" } +.\" ==================================================================== +.if t .ds Te T\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X +.if n .ds Te TeX +.if t .ds Xe X\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'T +.if n .ds Xe XeT +.TH DV2DT 1 "08 March 1995" "Version 0.6.0" +.\"====================================================================== +.SH NAME +dv2dt \- convert a binary TeX DVI file to DTL text representation +.\"====================================================================== +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B dv2dt +.I input-DVI-file +.I output-DTL-file +.PP +If the filenames are omitted, then +.I stdin +and +.I stdout +are assumed. +.\"====================================================================== +.SH DESCRIPTION +.B dv2dt +converts a binary \*(Te\& DVI file to an editable +text file in DTL +.RI ( "DVI Text Language" ) +format. The companion +.BR dt2dv (1) +utility can convert the DTL file back to a binary +DVI file. +.\"====================================================================== +.SH "DVI COMMAND DESCRIPTION" +\*(Te\& DVI files contain a compact binary +description of typeset pages, as a stream of +operation code bytes, each immediately followed by +zero or more parameter bytes. The format of DVI +files is fully described in Donald E. Knuth, +.IR "\*(Te\&: The Program" , +Addison-Wesley (1986), ISBN 0-201-13437-3, as well +as in the +.BR dvitype (1) +literate program source code. +.PP +For convenience, we provide a summary of DVI +commands here. In the following list, operation +code bytes are given as unsigned decimal values, +followed by their symbolic names (not present in +the DVI file), and a short description. A +designation like +.I b[+n] +means that the operation code byte is followed by +a parameter +.I b +which uses +.I n +bytes, and is signed. Without the plus sign, the +parameter is unsigned. Signed integer parameter +values are always represented in two's complement +arithmetic, which is the system followed by most +computers manufactured today, including all +personal computers and workstations. +.if n .TP \w'\fI128_set1__c[1]\fP'u+3n +.if t .TP \w'\fI243_fnt_def1__k[1]_c[4]_s[4]_d[4]_a[1]_l[1]_n[a+l]\fP'u+3n +.I "0 set_char_0" +Set character 0 from current font. +.TP +.I .\|.\|. +.TP +.I "127 set_char_127" +Set character 127 from current font. +.TP +.I "128 set1 c[1]" +Set 1-byte unsigned character (uchar) number +.IR c . +.TP +.I "129 set2 c[2]" +Set 2-byte uchar number +.IR c . +.TP +.I "130 set3 c[3]" +Set 3-byte uchar number +.IR c . +.TP +.I "131 set4 c[+4]" +Set 4-byte signed character (schar) number +.IR c . +.TP +.I "132 set_rule a[+4] b[+4]" +Set rule, height +.IR a , +width +.IR b . +.TP +.I "133 put1 c[1]" +Put 1-byte uchar +.IR c . +.TP +.I "134 put2 c[2]" +Put 2-byte uchar +.IR c . +.TP +.I "135 put3 c[3]" +Put 3-byte uchar +.IR c . +.TP +.I "136 put4 c[+4]" +Put 4-byte schar +.IR c . +.TP +.I "137 put_rule a[+4] b[+4]" +Put rule, height +.IR a , +width +.IR b . +.TP +.I "138 nop" +Do nothing. +.TP +.I "139 bop c0[+4] .\|.\|. c9[+4] p[+4]" +Beginning of page. The parameters +.I "c0 .\|.\|. c9" +are the \*(Te\& page counters, the contents of +\*(Te\& count registers +.IR "\ecount0 .\|.\|. \ecount9" . +The parameter +.I p +is the byte offset from the beginning of the DVI +file of the previous +.I bop +operation code byte. The first such command in +the file has +.IR "p = \-1" . +.TP +.I "140 eop" +End of page. +.TP +.I "141 push" +Push +.RI ( h,v,w,x,y,z ) +onto stack. +.TP +.I "142 pop" +Pop +.RI ( h,v,w,x,y,z ) +from stack. +.TP +.I "143 right1 b[+1]" +Move right +.I b +units. +.TP +.I "144 right2 b[+2]" +Move right +.I b +units. +.TP +.I "145 right3 b[+3]" +Move right +.I b +units. +.TP +.I "146 right4 b[+4]" +Move right +.I b +units. +.TP +.I "147 w0" +Move right +.I w +units. +.TP +.I "148 w1 b[+1]" +Move right +.I b +units, and set +.IR "w = b" . +.TP +.I "149 w2 b[+2]" +Move right +.I b +units, and set +.IR "w = b" . +.TP +.I "150 w3 b[+3]" +Move right +.I b +units, and set +.IR "w = b" . +.TP +.I "151 w4 b[+4]" +Move right +.I b +units, and set +.IR "w = b" . +.TP +.I "152 x0" +Move right +.I x +units. +.TP +.I "153 x1 b[+1]" +Move right +.I b +units, and set +.IR "x = b" . +.TP +.I "154 x2 b[+2]" +Move right +.I b +units, and set +.IR "x = b" . +.TP +.I "155 x3 b[+3]" +Move right +.I b +units, and set +.IR "x = b" . +.TP +.I "156 x4 b[+4]" +Move right +.I b +units, and set +.IR "x = b" . +.TP +.I "157 down1 a[+1]" +Move down +.I a +units. +.TP +.I "158 down2 a[+2]" +Move down +.I a +units. +.TP +.I "159 down3 a[+3]" +Move down +.I a +units. +.TP +.I "160 down4 a[+4]" +Move down +.I a +units. +.TP +.I "161 y0" +Move right +.I y +units. +.TP +.I "162 y1 a[+1]" +Move right +.I a +units, and set +.IR "y = a" . +.TP +.I "163 y2 a[+2]" +Move right +.I a +units, and set +.IR "y = a" . +.TP +.I "164 y3 a[+3]" +Move right +.I a +units, and set +.IR "y = a" . +.TP +.I "165 y4 a[+4]" +Move right +.I a +units, and set +.IR "y = a" . +.TP +.I "166 z0" +Move right +.I z +units. +.TP +.I "167 z1 a[+1]" +Move right +.I a +units, and set +.IR "z = a" . +.TP +.I "168 z2 a[+2]" +Move right +.I a +units, and set +.IR "z = a" . +.TP +.I "169 z3 a[+3]" +Move right +.I a +units, and set +.IR "z = a" . +.TP +.I "170 z4 a[+4]" +Move right +.I a +units, and set +.IR "z = a" . +.TP +.I "171 fnt_num_0" +Set current font number +.IR "(f) = 0" . +.TP +.I .\|.\|. +.TP +.I "234 fnt_num_63" +Set +.IR "f = 63" . +.TP +.I "235 fnt1 k[1]" +Set +.IR "f = k" . +.TP +.I "236 fnt2 k[2]" +Set +.IR "f = k" . +.TP +.I "237 fnt3 k[3]" +Set +.IR "f = k" . +.TP +.I "238 fnt4 k[+4]" +Set +.IR "f = k" . +.TP +.I "239 xxx1 k[1] x[k]" +Special string +.I x +with +.I k +bytes. +.TP +.I "240 xxx2 k[2] x[k]" +Special string +.I x +with +.I k +bytes. +.TP +.I "241 xxx3 k[3] x[k]" +Special string +.I x +with +.I k +bytes. +.TP +.I "242 xxx4 k[4] x[k]" +Special string +.I x +with (unsigned) +.I k +bytes. +.TP +.I "243 fnt_def1 k[1] c[4] s[4] d[4] a[1] l[1] n[a+l]" +Define font +.IR k . +The parameters are: +.RS +.TP \w'\fIm\fP'u+3n +.I c +Checksum for TFM file. +.TP +.I s +Scale factor, in DVI units. +.TP +.I d +Design size, in DVI units. +.TP +.I a +Length of the ``area'' or directory. +.TP +.I l +Length of the font name. +.TP +.I n +Area and font name string(s). +.RE +.TP +.I "244 fnt_def2 k[2] c[4] s[4] d[4] a[1] l[1] n[a+l]" +Define font +.IR k . +.TP +.I "245 fnt_def3 k[3] c[4] s[4] d[4] a[1] l[1] n[a+l]" +Define font +.IR k . +.TP +.I "246 fnt_def4 k[+4] c[4] s[4] d[4] a[1] l[1] n[a+l]" +Define font +.IR k . +.TP +.I "247 pre i[1] num[4] den[4] mag[4] k[1] x[k]" +Begin preamble. The parameters are: +.RS +.TP \w'\fInum\fP'u+3n +.I i +DVI format. Standard \*(Te\& has +.IR "ID = 2" , +and \*(Te\&-\*(Xe\& has +.IR "ID = 3" . +.TP +.I num +Numerator of 100 nm / DVI unit. +.TP +.I den +Denominator of 100 nm / DVI unit. +.TP +.I mag +1000 * magnification. +.TP +.I k +Comment length. +.TP +.I x +Comment string. +.RE +.TP +.I "248 post p[4] num[4] den[4] mag[4] l[4] u[4] s[2] t[2]" +Begin postamble. The parameters are: +.RS +.TP \w'\fInum\fP'u+3n +.I p +Pointer to final bop. +.TP +.I "num, den, mag" +Duplicates of values in preamble. +.TP +.I l +Height-plus-depth of tallest page, in DVI units. +.TP +.I u +Width of widest page, in DVI units. +.TP +.I s +Maximum stack depth needed to process this DVI file. +.TP +.I t +Total number of pages +.RI ( bop +commands) present. +.RE +.TP +.I "249 post_post q[4] i[1] 223 .\|.\|. 223" +End postamble. The parameters are: +.RS +.TP \w'\fI223\fP'u+3n +.I q +Byte offset from the beginning of the DVI file to +the +.I post +command that started the postamble. +.TP +.I i +DVI format ID, as in the preamble. +.TP +.I +223 +At least four +.I 223 +bytes. +.RE +.TP +.I "250" +Undefined. +.TP +.I .\|.\|. +.TP +.I "255" +Undefined. +.\"====================================================================== +.SH "DTL COMMAND DESCRIPTION" +A DTL file contains one line per command, with a +limit of 1024 characters per line. Each command +contains a symbolic operation name, followed by +zero or more parameter values. The parameter +value descriptions are not repeated here; they can +be found in the previous section. +.TP \w'\fIw0,_w1,_w2,_w3,_w4\fP'u+3n +variety +This command specifies the name of the DTL file +type; it has no DVI file equivalent. +.TP +.I (text) +Series of set_char commands, for printable ASCII text. +.TP +.I \e( +Literal ASCII left parenthesis in (text). +.TP +.I \e) +Literal ASCII right parenthesis in (text). +.TP +.I \e\e +Literal ASCII backslash in (text). +.TP +.I \e" +Literal ASCII double quote in (text). +.TP +.I \eXY +Set_char for character with hexadecimal code XY, +not in parentheses, but by itself for readability. +.TP +.I "s1, s2, s2, s3" +Set, with (1,2,3,4)-byte charcodes. +.TP +.I sr +.IR set_rule . +.TP +.I "p1, p2, p2, p3" +Put, with (1,2,3,4)-byte charcodes. +.TP +.I pr +.IR put_rule . +.TP +.I nop +.I nop +(do nothing). +.TP +.I bop +.I bop +(beginning of page). +.TP +.I eop +.I eop +(end of page). +.TP +.I [ +Push. +.TP +.I ] +Pop. +.TP +.I "r1, r2, r3, r4" +Right, with (1,2,3,4)-byte argument. +.TP +.I "w0, w1, w2, w3, w4" +As in DVI. +.TP +.I "x0, x1, x2, x3, x4" +As in DVI. +.TP +.I "d1, d2, d3, d4" +Down, with (1,2,3,4)-byte argument. +.TP +.I "y0, y1, y2, y3, y4" +As in DVI. +.TP +.I "z0, z1, z2, z3, z4" +As in DVI. +.TP +.I fn +.I fnt_num +(set current font to font number in 0 to 63). +.TP +.I "f1, f2, f3, f4" +.I fnt +(set current font to (1,2,3,4)-byte font number). +.TP +.I special +.I xxx +(special commands with (1,2,3,4)-byte string length). +.TP +.I fd +.I fnt_def +(assign a number to a named font). +.TP +.I pre +Preamble. +.TP +.I post +.I post +(begin postamble). +.TP +.I post_post +.I post_post +(end postamble). +.TP +.I opcode +Undefined DVI command (250 to 255). +.\"====================================================================== +.SH "SAMPLE DTL FILE" +The following 2-line \*(Te\& file +.RS +.nf +Hello. +\ebye +.fi +.RE +when processed with the commands +.RS +.nf +tex hello.tex +dv2dt hello.dvi hello.dtl +.fi +.RE +produces this DTL file: +.RS +.nf +variety sequences-6 +pre 2 25400000 473628672 1000 27 ' TeX output 1995.03.02:2334' +bop 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 +[ +d3 -917504 +] +d4 42152922 +[ +d4 -41497562 +[ +r3 1310720 +fd1 0 11374260171 655360 655360 0 5 '' 'cmr10' +fn0 +(Hello.) +] +] +d3 1572864 +[ +r4 15229091 +(1) +] +eop +post 42 25400000 473628672 1000 43725786 30785863 2 1 +fd1 0 11374260171 655360 655360 0 5 'cmr10' +post_post 152 2 223 223 223 223 +.fi +.RE +The command +.RS +.nf +dt2dv hello.dtl hello.dvi +.fi +.RE +will reconstruct the original DVI file. +.\"====================================================================== +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR dt2dv (1), +.BR dvitype (1), +.BR tex (1). +.\"====================================================================== +.SH FILES +.TP \w'\fI*.dvi\fP'u+3n +.I *.dvi +binary \*(Te\& DVI file. +.TP +.I *.dtl +text representation of a \*(Te\& DVI file in +.I "DVI Text Language" +format. +.\"====================================================================== +.SH AUTHOR +.B dv2dt +and +.BR dt2dv (1) +were written by +.RS +.nf +Geoffrey Tobin +Department of Electronic Engineering +La Trobe University +Bundoora, Victoria 3083 +Australia +Tel: +61 3 479 3736 +FAX: +61 3 479 3025 +Email: +.fi +.RE +.PP +These manual pages were primarily written by +.RS +.nf +Nelson H. F. Beebe, Ph.D. +Center for Scientific Computing +Department of Mathematics +University of Utah +Salt Lake City, UT 84112 +Tel: +1 801 581 5254 +FAX: +1 801 581 4148 +Email: +.fi +.RE +.\"==============================[The End]============================== diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2fax.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2fax.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f7c436d6e33 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2fax.1 @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +.TH DVI2FAX 1 "October 30, 1999" +.\" man page by Jim Van Zandt -*- nroff -*- +.SH NAME +dvi2fax \- convert a TeX DVI file to G3 fax format +.SH SYNOPSIS +\fBdvi2fax\fP [\fB-hi\fP|\fB-lo\fP] \fIfile\fP[.dvi] [\fIoptions for dvips\fP] +.SH DESCRIPTION +\fBdvi2fax\fP uses \fBdvips\fP(1) to convert a TeX DVI file to PostScript, +then \fBgs\fP(1) to convert the PostScript to G3 fax file format. +.SH OPTIONS +.LP +.B -hi +use high fax resolution (204x196 dpi) (default). +.LP +.B -lo +use low fax resolution (204x98). +.PP +\fBdvips\fP options can follow the file name. +.SH EXAMPLE +Example: dvi2fax foo -l 2 +.SH SEE ALSO +\fBdvips\fP(1), \fBgs\fP(1). diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2tty.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2tty.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..168a073373d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2tty.1 @@ -0,0 +1,131 @@ +.TH DVI2TTY Local "7 June 1986" +.SH NAME +dvi2tty \- preview a dvi\-file on an ordinary ascii terminal +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B dvi2tty +[ options ] dvi\-file +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I dvi2tty +converts a TeX DVI\-file to a format that is apprporiate for terminals +and lineprinters. The program is intended to be used for +preliminary proofreading of TeX-ed documents. +By default the output is directed to the terminal, +possibly through a pager (depending on how the program was installed), +but it can be directed to a file or a pipe. +.PP +The output leaves much to be desired, but is still +usefull if you want to avoid walking to the +laserprinter (or whatever) for each iteration of your +document. +.br +Since +.I dvi2tty +produces output for terminals and lineprinters the +representation of documents is naturally quite primitive. +Fontchanges are totally ignored, which implies that +special symbols, such as mathematical symbols, get mapped into the +characters at the corresponding positions in the "standard" fonts. +.PP +If the width of the output text requires more columns than fits +in one line (c.f. the \-w option) it is broken into several lines by +.I dvi2tty +although they will be printed as one line on regular TeX output +devices (e.g. laserprinters). To show that a broken line is really +just one logical line an asterisk (``*'') in the last position +means that the logical line is continued on the next physical +line output by +.I dvi2tty. +Such a continuation line is started with a a space and an asterisk +in the first two columns. +.PP +Options may be specified in the environment variable DVI2TTY. +Any option on the commandline, conflicting with one in the +environment, will override the one from the environment. +.PP +.B Options: +.PP +.TP +.B \-o file +Write output to file ``file''. +.TP +.B \-p list +Print the pages chosen by list. +Numbers refer to TeX\-page numbers (known as \\count0). +An example of format for list is ``1,3:6,8'' +to choose pages 1, 3 through 6 and 8. +Negative numbers can be used exactly as in TeX, +e g \-1 comes before \-4 as in ``\-p-1:-4,17''. +.TP +.B \-P list +Like \-p except that page numbers refer to +the sequential ordering of the pages in the dvi\-file. +Negative numbers don't make a lot of sense here... +.TP +.B \-w n +Specify terminal width +.I n. +Legal range 16\-132. +Default is 80. If your terminal has the +ability to display in 132 columns it might +be a good idea to use \-w132 and toggle the +terminal into this mode as output will +probably look somewhat better. +.TP +.B \-q +Don't pipe the output through a pager. +This may be the default on some systems +(depending on the whims of the SA installing the program). +.TP +.B \-f +Pipe through a pager, $PAGER if defined, or whatever your SA compiled +in (often ``more''). This may be the default, but it is still okay +to redirect output with ``>'', the pager will not be used if output +is not going to a terminal. +.TP +.B \-F +Specify the pager program to be used. +This overides the $PAGER and the default pager. +.TP +.B \-Fprog +Use ``prog'' as program to pipe output into. Can be used to choose an +alternate pager (e g ``-Fless''). +.TP +.B \-l +Mark pagebreaks with the two-character sequence ``^L''. The default is +to mark them with a formfeed character. +.TP +.B \-u +Don't make any attempts to find special Scandinavian characters. +If such characters are in the text they will map to ``a'' and ``o''. +This is probably the default outside of Scandinavia. (The SA made +the decision when the program was installed.) +.TP +.B \-s +Try to find the special Scandinavian characters that on most (?) +terminals in Scandinavia are mapped to ``{|}[\\]''. +This can be the default, and output from files not containing these +special characters will be identical regardless of this option. +.SH FILES +/usr/ucb/more \ \ \ \ +probably the default pager. +.SH ENVIRONMENT +PAGER \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ +the pager to use. +.br +DVI2TTY \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ +can be set to hold commandline options. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +TeX, dvi2ps +.SH AUTHOR +Svante Lindahl, Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm +.br +Improved C version: Marcel Mol +.br +{seismo, mcvax}!enea!ttds!zap +.br +marcel@duteca.UUCP +.SH BUGS +Blanks between words get lost quite easy. This is less +likely if you are using a wider output than the default 80. +.PP +Only one file may be specified on the commandline. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvibook.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvibook.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..dd0bce06108 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvibook.1 @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +.TH DVIBOOK 1 +.SH NAME +dvibook \- rearrange pages in DVI file into signatures +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B dvibook +[ +.B \-q +] [ +.B \-s\fI +] [ +.B \-i +.I infile +] [ +.B \-o +.I outfile +] +[ +.I infile +[ +.I outfile +] ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Dvibook +rearranges pages from a DVI file produced by TeX into ``signatures'' for +printing books or booklets, creating a new DVI file +usable by any of the TeX conversion programs. +.PP +The +.I \-s +option selects the size of signature which will be used. The signature size is +the number of sides which will be folded and bound together; the number given +should be a multiple of four. The default is to use one signature for the +whole file. Extra blank sides will be added if the file does not contain a +multiple of four pages. +.PP +Dvibook normally prints the page numbers of the pages rearranged; the +.I \-q +option suppresses this. +.SH AUTHOR +Angus Duggan, from dviselect(1), by +Chris Torek, University of Maryland +.SH "SEE ALSO" +dviconcat(1), dviselect(1), latex(1), tex(1) +.br +.I "MC-TeX User's Guide" +.br +.I "The TeXbook" +.SH BUGS +.I Dvibook +does not adjust the parameters in the postamble; however, since these +values are normally used only to size certain structures in the output +conversion programs, and the parameters never need to be adjusted upward, +this has not proven to be a problem. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviconcat.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviconcat.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9267446095a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviconcat.1 @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +.TH DVICONCAT 1 +.SH NAME +dviconcat \- concatenate DVI files +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B dviconcat +[ +.B \-m +.I magnification +] [ +.B \-o +.I outfile +] +.I "list of files" +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Dviconcat +concatenates the named +.IR file s +(or standard input, if no file names are given) +onto the standard output +or the given +.IR outfile , +creating a new DVI file +usable by any of the TeX conversion programs, +or even by +.I dviconcat +itself. +.PP +The magnification of the output file +is the same as that of the first input file +unless the +.B \-m +option is given. +When +.I dviconcat +changes the magnification of any input file, +it prints a warning to this effect. +.SH AUTHOR +Chris Torek, University of Maryland +.SH "SEE ALSO" +dviselect(1), latex(1), tex(1) +.br +.I "MC-TeX User's Guide" +.SH BUGS +The program should be called +.IR dvicat , +but that name was taken (for the driver for the C/A/T typesetter). diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvicopy.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvicopy.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..cd62db37463 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvicopy.1 @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +.TH DVICOPY 1 TeX "24 January 1999" "Web2C 7.5.5" +.SH NAME +dvicopy \- produce modified copy of DVI file +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B dvicopy +.RI [ options ] +.RI [ infile\ [ outfile ]] +.SH DESCRIPTION +This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete +documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file +or manual +.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . +.PP +.B dvicopy +reads a DVI file, expands any references to virtual fonts to base +fonts, and writes the resulting DVI file. Thus you can use virtual +fonts even if your DVI processor does not support them, by passing the +documents through +.B dvicopy +first. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +dviselect(1) diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvidvi.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvidvi.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e9906a6e874 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvidvi.1 @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ +.TH DVIDVI L "March 1994" +.SH NAME +.PP +dvidvi \- selects and/or re-arranges pages in a TeX dvi file +.SH SYNOPSIS +.PP +dvidvi [param] infile outfile +.SH DESCRIPTION +.SS Copyright +dvidvi 1.0, Copyright (C) 1988-91, Radical Eye Software +.SS Introduction +.PP +The dvidvi program converts a dvi file into another dvi file, with perhaps +certain changes. +.br +.SS Parameters +.PP +-f n page n is first page selected +.br +-l n page n is last page selected +.in +10 +.ti -10 +-n n select at most n pages. Notice that n is the number of pages +selected, independently of the number of pages actually +contained in a sheet +.ti -10 +-i { n1..n2 | n1 }[,...] +.br +include pages (ranges allowed). When this option is +used, ONLY the specified pages are selected. However, +we can exclude from these pages with the option -x +.ti -10 +-x { n1..n2 | n1 }[,...] +.br +exclude pages (ranges allowed) +.ti -10 +-q work in quiet mode, that is do not print in the screen +messages of how the work is being done. +.ti -10 +-r reverse the order of the pages. +.PP +The page numbers for the above options -f -l -i and -x can be specified +in different ways. +.in +4 +.ti -4 +1) If a number n is given, it is interpreted as the n'th page from the +beginning of the .dvi file. Of course, this number is independent of the +page number assigned by TeX. +.ti -4 +2) TeX page numbers are those who are actually written in the page; +these page numbers can be modified, for example, by using the TeX commands +\\pagenumbering, \\setcounter{page}{n}, and \\addtocounter{page}{n}. +A TeX page number can be specified by preceding the number n with the +character @. Thus, if you specify -f @25 -l @30 you select the pages +between 25 and 30, these numbers being those assigned by TeX. +.ti -4 +3) However, several pages can have the same TeX page number in a .dvi file. +For example, the introductory pages in a book are numbered i, ii, and so on +until the first chapter begins and then, the pages are numbered 1, 2, etc. +In this case, the pages numbered i and 1 in the .dvi file have the same TeX +page number. If you want to select for example the second occurrence of the +page numbered 1, you can specify a page number as (@2)1. Thus @1 is equivalent +to (@1)1. For example, if you specify -f (@2)1 -l(@2)10 you select the pages +between 1 and 10 of the first chapter, not the introductory pages between +i and x. +.PP +There is another parameter that tells dvidvi how you want to change page +layout and specifications. This is the -m parameter. +.in +4 +.ti -4 +* The number preceding the colon is the modulo value. Everything will be +done in chunks of pages this big. If there is no colon, than the default +value is assumed to be one. The last chunk of pages is padded with as many +blank pages as necessary. +.ti -4 +* Following the colon is a comma-separated list of page numbers. These +page numbers are with respect to the current chunk of pages, and must lie +in the range zero to the modulo value less one. If a negative sign +precedes the number, then the page is taken from the mirror chunk; if there +are m chunks, then the mirror chunk of chunk n is the chunk numbered m-n-1. +Put simply, it is the chunk numbered the same, only from the end. This can +be used to reverse pages. If no number is given, the page number defaults +to 1. +.ti -4 +* Following each page number is an optional offset value in parenthesis, +which consists of a pair of comma-separated dimensions. Each dimension is +a decimal number with an optional unit of measure. The default unit of +measure is inches, or the last unit of measure used. All units are in true +dimensions. Allowable units of measure are the same that TeX allows: in, +mm, cm, pt, pc, dd, and cc. +.SH EXAMPLES +.PP +.in +10 +.ti -10 +-m - Reverses the order of the pages. This time, both the modulo and the +page number are defaulted. +.ti -10 +-m 2:0 Selects the first, third, fifth, etc. pages from the file. Print +this one after printing the next, taking the paper out of the +feed tray and reinserting it into the paper feed. +.ti -10 +-m 2:-1 Selects the second, fourth, etc. pages, and writes them in reverse +order. +.ti -10 +-m 4:-1,2(4.25in,0in) +.ti -10 +-m 4:-3,0(4.25in,0in) +.br +Useful for printing a little booklet, four pages to a sheet, +double-sided, for stapling in the middle. Print the first one, +put the stack back into the printer upside down, and print the +second. The `in' specifications are superfluous. +.ti -10 +-m ,(1pt,1) +.br +Scare your system administrator! Actually, things are so blurry with this +option, you may want to send enemies letters printed like this. *Long* +letters. +.ti -10 +-m 4:0(5.5in,4.25),3(0,4.25) +.ti -10 +-m 4:1(0in,4.25),2(5.5,4.25) +.br +Print a four-page card on one sheet. Print the first, rotate the paper 180 +degrees and feed it again. (PostScript people can do funny tricks with +PostScript so this isn't necessary.) + diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvihp.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvihp.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..cd88772978a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvihp.1 @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +.TH DVIHP 1 "October 30, 1999" +.\" man page by Jim Van Zandt -*- nroff -*- +.SH NAME +dvihp \- convert a TeX DVI file to Hewlett-Packard PCL +.SH SYNOPSIS +\fBdvihp\fP [\fIoptions\fP] \fIdvifile\fP[.dvi] +.SH DESCRIPTION +\fBdvihp\fP translates the given \fIdvifile\fP to Hewlett-Packard PCL +using \fBdvicopy\fP(1) then $DVILJ (dvilj4 by default). +.P +In the absence of other options, pipe the PCL to $SPOOL (lpr by default). +.SH OPTIONS +Options are recognized from dvips where possible: +.IP \fB-A\fP +print odd pages +.IP \fB-B\fP +print even pages +.IP "\fB-d\fP \fIn\fP" +set debug bits to \fIn\fP (see documentation) +.IP "\fB-D\fP \fIn\fP" +set resolution to \fIn\fP +.IP \fB-f\fP +run as filter +.IP "\fB-l\fP \fIn\fP" +don't print pages after \fIn\fP +.IP \fB-m\fP +manual feed +.IP "\fB-n\fP \fIn\fP" +print \fIn\fP pages +.IP "\fB-O\fP \fIa\fP,\fIb\fP" +set/change paper offset to \fIa\fP,\fIb\fP mm. +.IP "\fB-o\fP \fIs\fP" +output to \fIs\fP instead of spooling +.IP "\fB-p\fP \fIn\fP" +don't print pages before \fIn\fP. +.IP \fB-Ps\fP +pass directly to lpr. +.IP \fB-v\fP +verbose operation. +.IP "\fB-x\fP \fIn\fP" +set magnification to \fIn\fP. +.IP \fB--help\fP +write usage summary. +.P +Other options are passed to the dvilj program. +.SH BUGS +Email bug reports to tex-k@mail.tug.org. +.SH SEE ALSO +\fBdvicopy\fP(1), \fBdvilj4\fP(1). diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..40de4732e83 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj.1 @@ -0,0 +1,275 @@ +.TH DVILJK 1 "10 June 1996" +.ad b +.SH NAME +dvilj4, dvilj4l, dvilj2p, dvilj \- convert a TeX DVI file to PCL, for HP LaserJet printers +.SH SYNOPSIS +\f3dvilj\f1 +[\f3\-\-D\f2number\f1] +[\f3\-c\f2copies\f1] +[\f3\-d\f2mode\f1] +[\f3\-D\f1] +[\f3\-E\f1] +[\f3\-e\f2outputfile\f1] +[\f3\-f\f2frompage\f1] +[\f3\-g\f1] +[\f3\-h\f2headerfile\f1] +[\f3\-l\f1] +[\f3\-M\f2flag\f1] +[\f3\-m\f2mag\f1] +[\f3\-p\f2pages\f1] +[\f3\-q\f1] +[\f3\-r\f1] +[\f3\-t\f2topage\f1] +[\f3\-s\f2pagesize\f1] +[\f3\-v\f1] +[\f3\-V\f2mode\f1] +[\f3\-w\f1] +[\f3\-x\f2xoff(mm)\f1] +[\f3\-y\f2yoff(mm)\f1] +[\f3\-X\f2xoff(dots)\f1] +[\f3\-Y\f2yoff(dots)\f1] +[\f3\-z\f1] +[\f3\-\f1] +[\f2filename\f1] +.SH DESCRIPTION +Dvilj and siblings convert TeX-output .dvi files into PCL (the +Hewlett-Packard Printer Control Language) commands suitable for printing +on a HP LaserJet+, HP LaserJet IIP (using dvilj2p), HP LaserJet 4 (using +dvilj4), and fully compatible printers. +.PP +Dvilj4 also provides support for the builtin Intellifont and TrueType +fonts; TFM and VF files are provided in the distribution. +Virtual fonts are not supported directly by Dvilj, so you must run +.BR dvicopy (1) +first, or otherwise expand the virtual fonts +.PP +All programs are generated from one source file dvi2xx.c. +They are usually called via a shell script or as a line printer +filter. One such script, dvihp, is included in the distribution. It +provides command-line options similar to those of dvips(1). +.SH OPTIONS +.TP \w'-Dnumber'u+2n +\f3--D\f2number\f1 +Debug according to the bits of \f2number\f1; see the Kpathsea manual for +values. Also turns on general verbosity. +.TP +\f3-c\f2number\f1 +print each page \f2number\f1 times (including original) +.TP +\f3-d\f2number\f1 +print in duplex mode. The option -d\f21\f1 means long edge binding, +-d\f22\f1 stands for short edge binding. This option is only +selectable from \fIdvilj2p\fP, and is known to work on the LaserJet IId, +LaserJet IIId, and LaserJet 4. +.TP +\f3-D\f1[-] +Double-sided printing - see below; -D\f21\f1 prints odd sides only, +-D\f22\f1 is for even pages, a trailing \f2-\f1 suppresses printing of +empty padding pages. +.TP +\f3-E\f1 +Switch printer into econo mode (dvilj4 only). +.TP +\f3-e\f2outfile\f1 +Send output to \f2outfile\f1 instead of the basename of dvi file +extended with `.lj'. +If \f2outfile\f1 is `-' (as in `-e-') the output is directed +to standard output and can be directly piped into a spooler. +.TP +\f3-f\f2pagenum\f1 +Print pages with TeX page numbers greater than or equal to \f2pagenum\f1. +.TP +\f3-g\f1 +``go'' mode: do not reset printer at start of job. +.TP +\f3-h\f2headerfile\f1 +Copy \f2headerfile\f1 to output before translation of the DVI file. +Used to send arbitrary commands to the laserprinter. +.TP +\f3-l\f1 +print output in landscape mode; supported +only by dvilj2p and dvilj4. +.TP +\f3-M\f2flag\f1 +Do (not) call mktexpk to generate fonts on demand. \f3-M\f21\f1 and +\f3-M\f1 are equivalent. \f3-M\f20\f1 enables invoking mktexpk. (This +is the same as dvips.) The default behavior (i.e., if no +\f3-M\f1 option is given) is chosen at compile-time; as distributed, +mktexpk is enabled. \f3-M\f1 is only valid if +dvi2xx was compiled with support for mktexpk. +.TP +\f3-m\f2magnification\f1 +Specify the magnification to use. The following are available: +.br +\f3-m#\f2usermag\f1 e.g., \f3#900\f1 +.br +\f3-m0\f1 equivalent to \f3-m#1000\f1 +.br +\f3-mh\f1 equivalent to \f3-m#1095\f1 +.br +\f3-m1\f1 equivalent to \f3-m#1200\f1 +.br +\f3-mq\f1 equivalent to \f3-m#1250\f1 +.br +\f3-m2\f1 equivalent to \f3-m#1440\f1 +.br +\f3-m3\f1 equivalent to \f3-m#1728\f1 +.br +\f3-m4\f1 equivalent to \f3-m#2074\f1 +.br +\f3-m5\f1 equivalent to \f3-m#2488\f1 +.TP +\f3-p\f2pagecount\f1 +print \f2pagecount\f1 pages after the starting page. +.TP +\f3-q\f1 +Quiet operation: omit final statistics, etc. +.TP +\f3-r\f1 +toggle page reversal; by default, pages are reversed. +.TP +\f3-s\f2pagesize \f1 +Specify the page size: +.br +\f3-s1\f1: executive (7.25in x 10.5in) +.br +\f3-s2\f1: letter (8.5in x 11in) +.br +\f3-s3\f1: legal (8.5in x 14in) +.br +\f3-s26\f1: A4 (210mm x 297mm) +.br +\f3-s80\f1: monarch (3.875in x 7.5in) +.br +\f3-s81\f1: commercial-10 (4.125in x 9.5in) +.br +\f3-s90\f1: international DL (110mm x 220mm) +.br +\f3-s91\f1: international C5 (162mm x 229mm) +.br +All values are from the LJ II technical reference manual. +If the -s commandline option is omitted, no clipping is performed +at the bottom of the page. +.TP +\f3-t\f2pagenum\f1 +Print pages with TeX page numbers less than or equal to \f2pagenum\f1. +.TP +\f3-v\f1 +Verbose mode: list fonts used, etc. +.TP +\f3-V\f2mode\f1 +compatibility mode. Use \f2K\f1 for Kyocera, \f2B\f1 for Brother, +\f26\f1 for LJ6 printers. +.TP +\f3-w\f1 +Omit warnings. +.TP +\f3-x\f2offset\f1 +global x-offset in mm on output page +relative to 1 inch/1 inch origin +.TP +\f3-y\f2offset\f1 +global y-offset in mm on output page +relative to 1 inch/1 inch origin +.TP +\f3-X\f2offset\f1 +global x-offset in dots on output page +(overrides 1 inch/1 inch origin) +.TP +\f3-Y\f2offset\f1 +global y-offset in dots on output page +(overrides 1 inch/1 inch origin) +.TP +\f3-z\f1 +print a test page with the page counter at end of job +.TP +\f3-\f1 +Take input from standard input (must be seekable), write to standard output. +.PP +If no arguments are specified a brief usage message is displayed. +.SH \especial COMMANDS +TeX `\especial' commands that are implemented: +.TP \w'\f3\especial{hpfile=}\f1'u+2n +\f3\especial{file=}\f1 +copy specified file to the printer; either vector- or bitmap-graphics PMP +commands +.TP +\f3\especial{hpfile=}\f1 +Same as `file'. +.TP 0 +others: +There are a few other special commands implented for the LJ-series, +which should only be used in connection with the distributed style +files (e.g., graybox.sty). They may change in forthcoming versions. +.PP +You can include Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) files in the PCL files output +by dvilj if you convert them to PCL first. The distribution includes a +script `epspcl' to do this (using Ghostscript, so your Ghostscript must +have the necessary LaserJet driver(s) compiled in). +.SH DOUBLE PAGE PRINTING +The command line option -D causes the printer to print +in doublepage mode, that is, roughly speaking, printing first +the even pages and then the odd pages of a document. +If -D is used to print both even and odd pages (-D is used +without the optional \f21\f1 or \f22\f1) +the following will happen after +half of the pages is printed: +\f3LJ:\f1 +the printer stops, shows message "FEED" and switches +on manual feed led. The printer continues when either +the printed pages are fed into the manual page feeder, +or the operator pushes the continue button (after placing first +the printed pages into the paper tray). +.PP +If -D1 was specified only odd pages will be printed, -D2 can be used +for even pages. A trailing `-' (as in -D-, -D1- or -D2-) supresses +printing of empty pages which are generated for padding otherwise. +.PP +The driver allows the -D option for both print-directions (front-to-back +or back-to-front printing). It tries to be clever in certain cases: +when a document has an odd number of pages it inserts in the +right place an empty page +when a document starts with page 0 the driver inserts an empty +page after the 0-page +when a piece of a document is printed that starts with +an even page-number it prints this page at the backside +of the first page to ensure that the odd sides are always +on the frontside. The 0-page is treated like an odd page. +.PP +The doubleside option works for all LJs, not only for the +new D model with does doubleside-printing (actually, I don't +know whether it makes much sense on the new LJ II D at all). +.PP +Caveat on the doubleside-option: When it is used frequently +or on very large files, it might become necessary to clean +the printer much more frequently. +.PP +The command line option -pX can be used to abort printing +after the output of X pages (can lead to strange results together +with -D). I personally dislike this option. The secure way of +printing a part of a document is using -f (from) and -t (to). +.SH ENVIRONMENT +Dviljk uses the same environment variables and algorithms for finding +font files as TeX and its friends do. See the documentation for the +Kpathsea library for details. (Repeating it here is too cumbersome.) +.PP +DVILJFONTS, if set, overrides all other font paths. +.PP +DVILJMAKEPK, if set, overrides `mktexpk' as the name of the command to +execute to create a PK file if one isn't found. +.PP +The DVILJSIZES variable may be set to indicate which sizes of fonts are +available. It should consist of a list of numbers separated by colons. If +the list begins with a colon, the system default sizes are used, as well. +Sizes are expressed in dots per inch; decimals may be used for ``pxl'' files: +for example, a 300 dots per inch file magnified by half a step comes out to +1643 dots per five inches, which should be encoded as 328.6. \fIdvilj\fR +tries the actual size of the font before trying any of the given sizes. +.PP +KPATHSEA_DEBUG: Trace Kpathsea lookups; set to -1 for complete tracing. +.SH AUTHOR +Gustaf Neumann, Wirtschaftsuniversitaet Wien +.br +neumann@wu-wien.ac.at +.PP +dviljk changes by kb@mail.tug.org; email bug reports to tex\-k@mail.tug.org. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj2p.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj2p.1 new file mode 120000 index 00000000000..67bb7d80a78 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj2p.1 @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +dvilj.1 \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4.1 new file mode 120000 index 00000000000..67bb7d80a78 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4.1 @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +dvilj.1 \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4l.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4l.1 new file mode 120000 index 00000000000..67bb7d80a78 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4l.1 @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +dvilj.1 \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj6.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj6.1 new file mode 120000 index 00000000000..67bb7d80a78 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj6.1 @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +dvilj.1 \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdfm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdfm.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..674a15790a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdfm.1 @@ -0,0 +1,322 @@ +.de EX +.sp +.in +5 +.nf +.ft CW +.. +.de EE +.in -5 +.ft R +.sp +.fi +.. +.TH dvipdfm 1 5/28/2001 +.SH NAME +dvipdfm \- Produce PDF files directly from DVI files + +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B dvipdfm +.RI [ options ] +.IR file [.dvi] + +.SH DESCRIPTION +The program +.B dvipdfm +generates a +.SM PDF +file from a +.SM DVI +file. +.SM DVI +files are the output format +produced by TeX. +Output from +.B groff +can be converted to +.SM DVI +format +using +.BR grodvi . + +The program +.B dvipdfm +recognizes several commonly used +.BR \especial +commands, which are extensions to the +.SM DVI +format. +Specifically, it understands +color specials, papersize specials, +tpic specials (which allow it to be used with +.BR pic ), +hypertex specials, and some PostScript +specials. These extensions allow documents +to contain color, figures, and hyperlinks. +The program tries to mimic +the behavior of +.B dvips +so that many +macro packages produced for use with +.B dvips +will work with +.B dvipdfm. +Dvipdfm understands its own specific +.B \especial +commands to allow access to PDF features +such as annotations and bookmarks. +For more details, consult the +.I "Dvipdfm User's Manual," +which is distributed with +.B dvipdfm. + +.SH OPTIONS + +.TP 5 +.B \-\^c +Ignore color +.BR \especials . +The +.B \-\^c +toggles a flag that disables color +.B \especial +processing. +Unless changed in the configuration file, +that flag is off, and color +.BR \especial "s" +are interpreted normally. +The +.B \-\^c +option may be used to produce a black and white document +from a document containing color TeX +.B \especial +commands. + +.TP 5 +.B \-\^d +Remove thumbnail images after including them. +(See the +.B \-\^t +option for more information.) + +.TP 5 +.B \-\^e +Toggle partial font embedding flag. If partial +font embedding is off, embedded fonts are +.I fully +embedded. +The default, if not changed in the configuration file, +is to embed only those glyphs actually used in the document. + +.TP 5 +.B \-\^f map_file +Set the name of the font map file to +.IR map_file . +The format of the font map file +is documented in the +.IR "Dvipdfm User's Manual" . + +.TP 5 +.B \-\^l +Select landscape mode. In other words, exchange the +.I x +and +.I y +dimensions of the paper. + +.TP 5 +.B \-\^m " mag" +Magnify the input document by +.IR mag . + +.TP 5 +.B \-\^o " name" +Generate PDF output file having the name +.IR name . +By default, the name of the output +file is +.IR file .pdf. + +.TP 5 +.B \-\^p " paper" +Select the papersize by name (e.g., +.BR letter ", " legal ", " ledger ", " tabloid ", " a3 ", " a4 ", or " a5 +) + +.TP 5 +.B \-\^r " size" +Set resolution of bitmapped fonts to +.B size +dots per inch. Bitmapped fonts are generated +by the Kpathsea library, which uses MetaFont. Bitmapped +fonts are included as type 3 fonts in the PDF output file. + +.TP 5 +.B \-\^s " page_specifications" +Select the pages of the +.SM DVI +file to be converted. +The +.I page_specifications +consists of a comma separated list of +.I page_ranges: + +.EX +.IR "page_specifications := page_specification" "[," page_specifications "]" +.EE + +where + +.EX +.IR "page_specification := single_page" | page_range + +.IR "page_range := " [ first_page ]\^\-\^[ last_page ] +.EE + +An empty +.I first_page +is implied to be the first page of the +.SM DVI +file. +An empty +.I last_page +is treated as the last page of the +.SM DVI +file. + +Examples: +.RS +.TP 5 +.B "\-\^s 1,3,5" +includes pages 1, 3, and 5; +.TP 5 +.B "\-\^s \-" +includes all pages; +.TP 5 +.B "\-\^s \-,\-" +includes two copies of all pages in the +.SM DVI +file; +and +.TP 5 +.B "\-\^s 1\-10" +includes the first ten pages of the +.SM DVI +file. +.RE +.TP 5 +.B \-\^t +Search for thumbnail images of each page +in the directory named by the +.B TMPDIR +environment variable. +The thumbnail images must be named in a specific format. +They must have the same base name +as the +.SM DVI +file and they must have the page number as the extension +to the file name. Dvipdfm does not +generate the thumbnails itself, but it is distributed with a wrapper +program named +.B dvipdft +that does so. + +.TP 5 +.B \-\^v +Increase verbosity. +Results of the +.B \-\^v +option are cumulative (e.g., +.B \-\^vv +) increases the verbosity by two increments. + +.TP 5 +.B \-\^x x_offset +Set the left margin to +.IR x_offset . +The default left margin is +.BR 1.0in . +The dimension may be specified in any units understood by TeX (e.g., +.BR bpt ", " pt ", " in ", " cm +) + +.TP 5 +.B \-\^y y_offset +Set the top margin to +.IR y_offset . +The default top margin is +.BR 1.0in . +The dimension may be specified in any units understood by TeX (e.g., +.BR bpt ", " pt ", " in ", " cm +) + +.TP 5 +.B \-\^z compression_level +Set the compression level to +.IR compression_level . +Compressions levels range from 0 (no compression) to +9 (maximum compression) and correspond to the values understood by zlib. + +.SH ENVIRONMENT + +.B Dvipdfm +uses the +.B kpathsea +library for locating the files that it opens. Hence, +the environment variables documented in the +.I Kpathsea library +documentation influence +.B dvipdfm. + +Dvipdfm also reads the following environment variables: + +.TP 5 +TMP +The directory to search for thumbnail images of each page. + +.SH FILES +The precise location of the following files is determined by the +.I Kpathsea library +configuration. The location may be determined by using kpsewhich, e.g., +.nf +.B kpsewhich \-progname=dvipdfm \-format='other text files' config +.fi + +.TP 5 +.I config +Startup options + +.TP 5 +.I t1fonts.map +The default font map file (this name may be changed in the config file). + +.TP 5 +.I *.tfm +TeX font metrics + +.TP 5 +.I *.vf +TeX virtual font files + +.TP 5 +.I *.pfb +PostScript Type 1 font files + +.TP 5 +.I +texmf.cnf +The Kpathsea library configuration file. +The location of this file may be found by typing +.nf +.B kpsewhich texmf.cnf +.fi + + +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR tex "(1), " dvips "(1), " groff "(1), " grodvi "(1), " pic "(1), " +and the +.I "Kpathsea library" +info documentation. + +.SH AUTHOR +Mark A. Wicks + diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdft.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdft.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..803db249e4e --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdft.1 @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +.TH "dvipdft" "1" "May 2004" "teTeX" "teTeX" +.PP +.SH "NAME" +dvipdft \- create thumbnail images for use with dvipdfm +.PP +.SH "SYNOPSIS" +.PP +\fBdvipdft\fP [ \fI DVIPDFM-OPTIONS\fP \&.\&.\&. ] \fI filename.dvi\fP +.PP +.SH "DESCRIPTION" +.PP +\fBdvipdft\fP creates thumbnail pictures of the pages in your file +and subsequently runs dvipdfm to create a PDF file with these +thumbnails. +.PP +.SH "OPTIONS" +.HP +All options are simply handed on to dvipdfm +.HP +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IP +\fBdvipdfm\fP(1) +.PP +.SH "BUGS" +.PP +None known\&. +.PP +.SH "AUTHOR" +.PP +\fBdvipdft\fP was written by Mark A. Wicks and Thomas Esser. +.PP +This manual page was written by Frank Küster , +for the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by others without +contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the manual page +are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this manual page +should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipng.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipng.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a0862bd5abe --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipng.1 @@ -0,0 +1,483 @@ +.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.14 +.\" +.\" Standard preamble: +.\" ======================================================================== +.de Sh \" Subsection heading +.br +.if t .Sp +.ne 5 +.PP +\fB\\$1\fR +.PP +.. +.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) +.if t .sp .5v +.if n .sp +.. +.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text +.ft CW +.nf +.ne \\$1 +.. +.de Ve \" End verbatim text +.ft R +.fi +.. +.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will +.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left +.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a +.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to +.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' +.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>. +.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr +.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' +.ie n \{\ +. ds -- \(*W- +. ds PI pi +. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch +. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch +. ds L" "" +. ds R" "" +. ds C` "" +. ds C' "" +'br\} +.el\{\ +. ds -- \|\(em\| +. ds PI \(*p +. ds L" `` +. ds R" '' +'br\} +.\" +.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for +.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index +.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the +.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. +.if \nF \{\ +. de IX +. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" +.. +. nr % 0 +. rr F +.\} +.\" +.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes +.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. +.hy 0 +.if n .na +.\" +.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). +.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. +. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff +.if n \{\ +. ds #H 0 +. ds #V .8m +. ds #F .3m +. ds #[ \f1 +. ds #] \fP +.\} +.if t \{\ +. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) +. ds #V .6m +. ds #F 0 +. ds #[ \& +. ds #] \& +.\} +. \" simple accents for nroff and troff +.if n \{\ +. ds ' \& +. ds ` \& +. ds ^ \& +. ds , \& +. ds ~ ~ +. ds / +.\} +.if t \{\ +. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" +. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' +. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' +. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' +. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' +. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' +.\} +. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents +.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' +.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' +.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] +.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' +.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' +.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] +.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] +.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e +.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E +. \" corrections for vroff +.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' +.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' +. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) +.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ +\{\ +. ds : e +. ds 8 ss +. ds o a +. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga +. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy +. ds th \o'bp' +. ds Th \o'LP' +. ds ae ae +. ds Ae AE +.\} +.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C +.\" ======================================================================== +.\" +.IX Title "DVIPNG 1" +.TH DVIPNG 1 "2005-04-04" "dvipng 1.6" "User commands" +.SH "NAME" +dvipng \- A DVI\-to\-PNG translator +.SH "SYNOPSIS" +.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" +dvipng [options] filename +.PP +dvipng [options] [filename] \- +.SH "DESCRIPTION" +.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" +This program makes \s-1PNG\s0 and/or \s-1GIF\s0 graphics from \s-1DVI\s0 files as obtained +from TeX and its relatives. +.PP +If \s-1GIF\s0 support is enabled, \s-1GIF\s0 output is chosen by using the +\&\fBdvigif\fR binary or with the \fB\-\-gif\fR option. +.PP +The benefits of \fBdvipng\fR/\fBdvigif\fR include +.IP "\(bu" 4 +Speed. It is a very fast bitmap-rendering code for \s-1DVI\s0 files. On a +fairly low-end laptop, it takes less than a second to generate 150 +one-formula images. This makes dvipng suitable for generating large +amounts of images on\-the\-fly, as needed in preview\-latex, WeBWorK and +others. +.IP "\(bu" 4 +It does not read the postamble, so it can be started before TeX +finishes. There is a \-\-follow switch that makes dvipng wait at \s-1EOF\s0 for +further output, unless it finds the \s-1POST\s0 marker that indicates the end +of the \s-1DVI\s0. +.IP "\(bu" 4 +Interactive query of options. dvipng can read options interactively +through stdin, and all options are usable. It is even possible to change +the input file through this interface. +.IP "\(bu" 4 +Supports \s-1PK\s0, \s-1VF\s0, PostScript Type1, and TrueType fonts, color specials +and simple PostScript inclusion specials. +.IP "\(bu" 4 +and more... +.SH "OPTIONS" +.IX Header "OPTIONS" +Many of the parameterless options listed here can be turned off by +suffixing the option with a zero (\fB0\fR); for instance, to turn off +page reversal, use \fB\-r0\fR. Such options are marked with a trailing +\&\fB*\fR. +.IP "\fB\-\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-" +Read additional options from standard input after processing the command +line. +.IP "\fB\-\-help\fR" 4 +.IX Item "--help" +Print a usage message and exit. +.IP "\fB\-\-version\fR" 4 +.IX Item "--version" +Print the version number and exit. +.IP "\fB\-bd\fR \fInum\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-bd num" +.PD 0 +.IP "\fB\-bd\fR \fIcolor_spec\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-bd color_spec" +.IP "\fB\-bd '\fR\fInum\fR\fB \fR\fIcolor_spec\fR\fB'\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-bd 'num color_spec'" +.PD +Set the pixel width of the transparent border (default 0). Using this +option will make the image edges transparent, but it only affects pixels +with the background color. Giving a \fIcolor_spec\fR will set the +fallback color, to be used in viewers that cannot handle transparency +(the default is the background color). The color spec should be in +TeX color \especial syntax, e.g., 'rgb 1.0 0.0 0.0'. Setting the +fallback color makes the default border width 1 px. +.IP "\fB\-\-bdpi\fR \fInum\fR" 4 +.IX Item "--bdpi num" +Set the base (Metafont) resolution, both horizontal and vertical, to +\&\fInum\fR dpi (dots per inch). This option is necessary when manually +selecting Metafont mode with the \-\-mode option (see below). +.IP "\fB\-bg\fR \fIcolor_spec\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-bg color_spec" +Choose background color for the images. This option will be ignored if +there is a background color \especial in the \s-1DVI\s0. The color spec should +be in TeX color \especial syntax, e.g., 'rgb 1.0 0.0 0.0'. You can +also specify 'Transparent' or 'transparent' which will give you a +transparent background with the normal background as a fallback color. A +capitalized 'Transparent' will give a full-alpha transparency, while an +all-lowercase 'transparent' will give a simple fully transparent +background with non-transparent antialiased pixels. The latter would be +suitable for viewers who cannot cope with a true alpha channel. \s-1GIF\s0 +images do not support full alpha transparency, so in case of \s-1GIF\s0 output, +both variants will use the latter behaviour. +.IP "\fB\-d\fR \fInum\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-d num" +Set the debug flags, showing what dvipng (thinks it) is doing. This will +work unless dvipng has been compiled without the \fB\s-1DEBUG\s0\fR option +(not recommended). Set the flags as you need them, use \fB\-d \-1\fR as +the first option for maximum output. +.IP "\fB\-D\fR \fInum\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-D num" +Set the output resolution, both horizontal and vertical, to \fInum\fR +dpi (dots per inch). +.Sp +One may want to adjust this to fit a certain text font size (e.g., on +a web page), and for a text font height of \fIfont_px\fR pixels (in +Mozilla) the correct formula is +.Sp +.Vb 1 +\& = * 72.27 / 10 [px * TeXpt/in / TeXpt] +.Ve +.Sp +The last division by ten is due to the standard font height 10pt in +your document, if you use 12pt, divide by 12. Unfortunately, some +proprietary browsers have font height in pt (points), not pixels. You +have to rescale that to pixels, using the screen resolution (default +is usually 96 dpi) which means the formula is +.Sp +.Vb 1 +\& = * 96 / 72 [pt * px/in / (pt/in)] +.Ve +.Sp +On some high-res screens, the value is instead 120 dpi. Good luck! +.IP "\fB\-\-depth*\fR" 4 +.IX Item "--depth*" +Report the depth of the image. This only works reliably when the +LaTeX style \fBpreview.sty\fR from preview-latex is used. It +reports the number of pixels from the bottom of the image to the +baseline of the image. This can be used for vertical positioning of the +image in, e.g., web documents, where one would use (Cascading +StyleSheets 1) +.Sp +.Vb 1 +\& +.Ve +.Sp +The depth is a negative offset in this case, so the minus sign is +necessary, and the unit is pixels (px). +.IP "\fB\-\-dvinum*\fR" 4 +.IX Item "--dvinum*" +Set this option to make the output page number be the TeX page +numbers rather than the physical page number. See the \fB\-o\fR switch. +.IP "\fB\-fg\fR \fIcolor_spec\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-fg color_spec" +Choose foreground color for the images. This option will be ignored if +there is a foreground color \especial in the \s-1DVI\s0. The color spec should +be in TeX color \especial syntax, e.g., 'rgb 1.0 0.0 0.0'. +.IP "\fB\-\-follow*\fR" 4 +.IX Item "--follow*" +Enable follow mode. One of the benefits of dvipng is that it does not +read the postamble, so it can be started before TeX finishes. This +switch makes dvipng wait at \s-1EOF\s0 for further output, unless it finds the +\&\s-1POST\s0 marker that indicates the end of the \s-1DVI\s0. This is similar to +\&\fBtail \-f\fR but for DVI-to-PNG conversion. +.IP "\fB\-\-freetype*\fR" 4 +.IX Item "--freetype*" +Enable/disable FreeType font rendering (default on). This option is +available if the FreeType2 font library was present at compilation time. +If this is the case, dvipng will have direct support for PostScript +Type1 and TrueType fonts internally, rather than using \fBgsftopk\fR +for rendering the fonts. If you have PostScript versions of Computer +Modern installed, there will be no need to generate bitmapped variants +on disk of these. Then, you can render images at different (and unusual) +resolutions without cluttering the disk with lots of bitmapped fonts. +Note that if you have both FreeType and T1lib on your system, FreeType +will be preferred by dvipng. If you for some reason would want to use +T1lib rendering, use this option. +.IP "\fB\-\-gamma\fR \fInum\fR" 4 +.IX Item "--gamma num" +Control the interpolation of colors in the greyscale anti-aliasing +color palette. Default value is 1.0. For 0 < \fInum\fR < 1, the +fonts will be lighter (more like the background), and for \fInum\fR > +1, the fonts will be darker (more like the foreground). +.IP "\fB\-\-gif*\fR" 4 +.IX Item "--gif*" +The images are output in the \s-1GIF\s0 format, if \s-1GIF\s0 support is +enabled. This is the default for the \fBdvigif\fR binary, which only +will be available when \s-1GIF\s0 support is enabled. See also the +\&\fB\-\-png\fR option. +.IP "\fB\-\-height*\fR" 4 +.IX Item "--height*" +Report the height of the image. This only works reliably when the +LaTeX style \fBpreview.sty\fR from preview-latex is used. It +reports the number of pixels from the top of the image to the +baseline of the image. The total height of the image is obtained as the +sum of the values reported from \-\-height and the \-\-depth. +.IP "\fB\-l [=]\fR\fInum\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-l [=]num" +The last page printed will be the first one numbered \fInum\fR. Default +is the last page in the document. If \fInum\fR is prefixed by an equals +sign, then it (and the argument to the \fB\-p\fR option, if specified) +is treated as a physical (absolute) page number, rather than a value to +compare with the TeX \fB\ecount0\fR values stored in the \s-1DVI\s0 file. +Thus, using \fB\-l =9\fR will end with the ninth page of the document, +no matter what the pages are actually numbered. +.IP "\fB\-\-mode\fR \fImode\fR" 4 +.IX Item "--mode mode" +Use \fImode\fR as the Metafont device name for the \s-1PK\s0 fonts (both for +path searching and font generation). This needs to be augmented with the +base device resolution, given with the \fB\-\-bdpi\fR option. See the +file <\fBftp://ftp.tug.org/tex/modes.mf\fR> for a list of resolutions and +mode names for most devices. +.IP "\fB\-M*\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-M*" +Turns off automatic \s-1PK\s0 font generation (\fImktexpk\fR). This will have +no effect when using PostScript fonts, since no \s-1PK\s0 font generation will +be done anyway. +.IP "\fB\-\-noghostscript*\fR" 4 +.IX Item "--noghostscript*" +This switch prohibits the internal call to GhostScript for displaying +PostScript specials. \fB\-\-noghostscript0\fR turns the call back on. +.IP "\fB\-\-nogssafer*\fR" 4 +.IX Item "--nogssafer*" +Normally, if GhostScript is used to render PostScript specials, the +GhostScript interpreter is run with the option \fB\-dSAFER\fR. The +\&\fB\-nogssafer\fR option runs GhostScript without \fB\-dSAFER\fR. The +\&\fB\-dSAFER\fR option in Ghostscript disables PostScript operators such +as deletefile, to prevent possibly malicious PostScript programs from +having any effect. +.IP "\fB\-o\fR \fIname\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-o name" +Send output to the file \fIname\fR. A single occurrence of \fB%d\fR or +\&\fB%01d\fR, ..., \fB%09d\fR will be exchanged for the physical +page number (this can be changed, see the \fB\-\-dvinum\fR switch). The +default output filename is \fIfile\fR\fB%d.png\fR where the input \s-1DVI\s0 +file was \fIfile\fR\fB.dvi\fR. +.IP "\fB\-O\fR \fIx\-offset\fR\fB,\fR\fIy\-offset\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-O x-offset,y-offset" +Move the origin by \fIx\-offset\fR,\fIy\-offset\fR, a comma-separated +pair of dimensions such as \fB.1in,\-.3cm\fR. +The origin of the page is shifted from the default position +(of one inch down, one inch to the right from the upper left corner of +the paper) by this amount. +.IP "\fB\-p [=]\fR\fInum\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-p [=]num" +The first page printed will be the first one numbered \fInum\fR. Default +is the first page in the document. If \fInum\fR is prefixed by an +equals sign, then it (and the argument to the \fB\-l\fR option, if +specified) is treated as a physical (absolute) page number, rather than +a value to compare with the TeX \fB\ecount0\fR values stored in the +\&\s-1DVI\s0 file. Thus, using \fB\-p =3\fR will start with the third page of +the document, no matter what the pages are actually numbered. +.IP "\fB\-\-picky*\fR" 4 +.IX Item "--picky*" +No images are output when a warning occurs. Normally, dvipng will +output an image in spite of a warning, but there may be something +missing in this image. One reason to use this option would be if you +have a more complete but slower fallback converter. Mainly, this is +useful for failed figure inclusion and unknown \especial occurrences, +but warnings will also occur for missing or unknown color specs and +missing \s-1PK\s0 fonts. +.IP "\fB\-\-png*\fR" 4 +.IX Item "--png*" +The images are output in the \s-1PNG\s0 format. This is the default for the +\&\fBdvipng\fR binary. See also the \fB\-\-gif\fR option. +.IP "\fB\-pp\fR \fIfirstpage\fR\fB\-\fR\fIlastpage\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-pp firstpage-lastpage" +Print pages \fIfirstpage\fR through \fIlastpage\fR; but not quite +equivalent to \fB\-p\fR \fIfirstpage\fR \fB\-l\fR \fIlastpage\fR. For example, +when rendering a book, there may be several instances of a page in the +\&\s-1DVI\s0 file (one in \f(CW\*(C`\efrontmatter\*(C'\fR, one in \f(CW\*(C`\emainmatter\*(C'\fR, and one +in \f(CW\*(C`\ebackmatter\*(C'\fR). In case of several pages matching, \fB\-pp\fR +\&\fIfirstpage\fR\fB\-\fR\fIlastpage\fR will render \fIall\fR pages that +matches the specified range, while \fB\-p\fR \fIfirstpage\fR \fB\-l\fR +\&\fIlastpage\fR will render the pages from the \fIfirst\fR occurrence +of \fIfirstpage\fR to the \fIfirst\fR occurrence of \fIlastpage\fR. +This is the (undocumented) behaviour of dvips. In dvipng you can give +both kinds of options, in which case you get all pages that matches the +range in \fB\-pp\fR between the pages from \fB\-p\fR to \fB\-l\fR. Also +multiple \fB\-pp\fR options accumulate, unlike \fB\-p\fR and \fB\-l\fR. +The \fB\-\fR separator can also be \fB:\fR. Note that \fB\-pp \-1\fR +will be interpreted as \*(L"all pages up to and including 1\*(R", if you want a +page numbered \-1 (only the table of contents, say) put \fB\-pp \-1\-\-1\fR, +or more readable, \fB\-pp \-1:\-1\fR. +.IP "\fB\-q*\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-q*" +Run quietly. Don't chatter about pages converted, etc. to standard +output; report no warnings (only errors) to standard error. +.IP "\fB\-Q\fR \fInum\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-Q num" +Set the quality to \fInum\fR. That is, choose the number of antialiasing +levels for \s-1PK\s0 and T1lib rendering to be \fInum\fR*\fInum\fR. The default +value is 4 which gives 16 levels of antialiasing for antialiased fonts +from these two. If FreeType is available, its rendering is unaffected by +this option. +.IP "\fB\-r*\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-r*" +Toggle output of pages in reverse/forward order. By default, the first +page in the \s-1DVI\s0 is output first. +.IP "\fB\-T\fR \fIimage_size\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-T image_size" +Set the image size to \fIimage_size\fR which can be either of +\&\fBbbox\fR, \fBtight\fR, or a comma-separated pair of dimensions +\&\fIhsize\fR,\fIvsize\fR such as \fB.1in,.3cm\fR. The default is +\&\fBbbox\fR which produces a \s-1PNG\s0 that includes all ink put on the page +and in addition the \s-1DVI\s0 origin, located 1in from the top and 1in from +the left edge of the paper. This usually gives whitespace above and to +the left in the produced image. The value \fBtight\fR will make dvipng +only include all ink put on the page, producing neat images. +This option overrides any papersize special in the \s-1DVI\s0 file. +.IP "\fB\-\-t1lib*\fR" 4 +.IX Item "--t1lib*" +Enable/disable T1lib font rendering (default on). This option is +available if the T1lib font library was present at compilation time. If +this is the case, dvipng will have direct support for PostScript Type1 +fonts internally, rather than using \fBgsftopk\fR for rendering the +fonts. If you have PostScript versions of Computer Modern installed, +there will be no need to generate bitmapped variants on disk of these. +Then, you can render images at different (and unusual) resolutions +without cluttering the disk with lots of bitmapped fonts. Note that if +you have both FreeType and T1lib on your system FreeType will be +preferred by dvipng, and if you for some reason rather want to use +T1lib, give the option \fB\-\-freetype0\fR (see above). +.IP "\fB\-\-truecolor*\fR" 4 +.IX Item "--truecolor*" +On systems with a fairly new \fBlibgd\fR, one can choose to generate +truecolor output. This will not be necessary in general unless you +include truecolor images via a PostScript special (i.e., the +\&\fBgraphics\fR or \fBgraphicx\fR package). It will lead to longer +execution time, mostly because more data is written to disk. +.IP "\fB\-v*\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-v*" +Enable verbose operation. This will currently indicate what fonts is +used, in addition to the usual output. +.IP "\fB\-x\fR \fInum\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-x num" +Set the x magnification ratio to \fInum\fR/1000. Overrides +the magnification specified in the \s-1DVI\s0 file. Must be between 10 and +100000. It is recommended that you use standard magstep values (1095, +1200, 1440, 1728, 2074, 2488, 2986, and so on) to help reduce the total +number of \s-1PK\s0 files generated. \fInum\fR may be a real number, not an +integer, for increased precision. +.IP "\fB\-z\fR \fInum\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-z num" +Set the \s-1PNG\s0 compression level to \fInum\fR. This option is enabled if +your \fBlibgd\fR is new enough. The default compression level is 1, +which selects maximum speed at the price of slightly larger PNGs. For an +older \fBlibgd\fR, the hard-soldered value 5 is used. The include file +\&\fBpng.h\fR says +``Currently, valid values range from 0 \- 9, corresponding directly to +the zlib compression levels 0 \- 9 (0 \- no compression, 9 \- \*(L"maximal\*(R" +compression). Note that tests have shown that zlib compression levels +3\-6 usually perform as well as level 9 for \s-1PNG\s0 images, and do +considerably fewer calculations. In the future, these values may not +correspond directly to the zlib compression levels.'' +.SH "NOTES" +.IX Header "NOTES" +The full manual is accessible in the info format, on most systems by typing +.PP +.Vb 1 +\& info dvipng +.Ve +.SH "COPYRIGHT" +.IX Header "COPYRIGHT" +This program is released under the \s-1GNU\s0 General Public License, see the +\&\s-1COPYING\s0 file in the dvipng distribution or +<\fBhttp://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html\fR>. +.PP +Copyright (c) 2002\-2005 Jan\-Ake Larsson diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvips.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvips.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1ff6e3f0e64 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvips.1 @@ -0,0 +1,517 @@ +.TH DVIPS 1 "27 May 2004" +.SH NAME +dvips \- convert a TeX DVI file to PostScript +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B dvips +[ +.I options +] +.IR file [\fB.dvi\fP] +.SH DESCRIPTION +THIS MAN PAGE IS OBSOLETE! +See the Texinfo documentation instead. +You can read it either in Emacs or with the standalone +.B info +program which comes with the GNU texinfo distribution as +prep.ai.mit.edu:pub/gnu/texinfo*.tar.gz. +.PP +The program +.B dvips +takes a DVI file +.IR file [\fB.dvi\fP] +produced by TeX (or by some other processor such as GFtoDVI) and +converts it to PostScript, normally sending the result directly to the +(laser)printer. The DVI file may be specified without the +.B .dvi +extension. Fonts used may either be resident in the printer or defined +as bitmaps in PK files, or a `virtual' combination of both. If the +.B mktexpk +program is installed, +.B dvips +will automatically invoke METAFONT to generate fonts that don't already +exist. +.PP +For more information, see the Texinfo manual +.IR dvips.texi , +which should be installed somewhere on your system, hopefully accessible +through the standard Info tree. +.SH OPTIONS +.TP +.B -a +Conserve memory by making three passes over the .dvi file instead of two +and only loading those characters actually used. Generally only useful +on machines with a very limited amount of memory, like some PCs. +.TP +.B -A +Print only odd pages (TeX pages, not sequence pages). +.TP +.B -b num +Generate +.I num +copies of each page, but duplicating the page body rather than using the +.I #numcopies +option. This can be useful in conjunction with a header file setting +.I \ebop-hook +to do color separations or other neat tricks. +.TP +.B -B +Print only even pages (TeX pages, not sequence pages). +.TP +.B -c num +Generate +.I num +copies of every page. Default is 1. (For collated copies, see the +.I -C +option below.) +.TP +.B -C num +Create +.I num +copies, but collated (by replicating the data in the PostScript file). +Slower than the +.I -c +option, but easier on the hands, and faster than resubmitting the same +PostScript file multiple times. +.TP +.B -d num +Set the debug flags. This is intended only for emergencies or for +unusual fact-finding expeditions; it will work only if +.B dvips +has been compiled with the DEBUG option. If nonzero, prints additional +information on standard error. The number is taken as a set of +independent bits. The meaning of each bit follows. 1=specials; +2=paths; 4=fonts; 8=pages; 16=headers; 32=font compression; 64=files; +128=memory; 256=Kpathsea stat(2) calls; 512=Kpathsea hash table lookups; +1024=Kpathsea path element expansion; 2048=Kpathsea searches. To trace +everything having to do with file searching and opening, use 3650 (2048 ++ 1024 + 512 + 64 + 2). To track all classes, you can use `-1' (output +is extremely voluminous). +.TP +.B -D num +Set the resolution in dpi (dots per inch) to +.IR num . +This affects the choice of bitmap fonts that are loaded and also the +positioning of letters in resident PostScript fonts. Must be between 10 +and 10000. This affects both the horizontal and vertical resolution. +If a high resolution (something greater than 400 dpi, say) is selected, +the +.I -Z +flag should probably also be used. +.TP +.B -e num +Make sure that each character is placed at most this many pixels from +its `true' resolution-independent position on the page. The default +value of this parameter is resolution dependent. Allowing individual +characters to `drift' from their correctly rounded positions by a few +pixels, while regaining the true position at the beginning of each new +word, improves the spacing of letters in words. +.TP +.B -E +makes +.B dvips +attempt to generate an EPSF file with a tight bounding box. This only +works on one-page files, and it only looks at marks made by characters +and rules, not by any included graphics. In addition, it gets the glyph +metrics from the +.I tfm +file, so characters that lie outside their enclosing +.I tfm +box may confuse it. In addition, the bounding box might be a bit too +loose if the character glyph has significant left or right side +bearings. Nonetheless, this option works well for creating small EPSF +files for equations or tables or the like. (Note, of course, that +.B dvips +output is resolution dependent and thus does not make very good EPSF +files, especially if the images are to be scaled; use these EPSF files +with a great deal of care.) +.TP +.B -f +Run as a filter. Read the +.I .dvi +file from standard input and write the PostScript to standard output. +The standard input must be seekable, so it cannot be a pipe. If you +must use a pipe, write a shell script that copies the pipe output to a +temporary file and then points +.B dvips +at this file. This option also disables the automatic reading of the +.I PRINTER +environment variable, and turns off the automatic sending of control D +if it was turned on with the +.I -F +option or in the configuration file; use +.I -F +after this option if you want both. +.TP +.B -F +Causes Control-D (ASCII code 4) to be appended as the very last +character of the PostScript file. This is useful when +.B dvips +is driving the printer directly instead of working through a spooler, +as is common on extremely small systems. NOTE! DO NOT USE THIS OPTION! +.TP +.B -G +Causes +.B dvips +to shift non-printing characters to higher-numbered positions. +This may be useful sometimes. +.TP +.B -h name +Prepend file +.I name +as an additional header file. (However, if the name is simply `-' +suppress all header files from the output.) This header file gets added +to the PostScript +.IR userdict . +.TP +.B -i +Make each section be a separate file. Under certain circumstances, +.B dvips +will split the document up into `sections' to be processed +independently; this is most often done for memory reasons. Using this +option tells +.B dvips +to place each section into a separate file; the new file names are +created replacing the suffix of the supplied output file name by a +three-digit sequence number. This option is most often used in +conjunction with the +.I -S +option which sets the maximum section length in pages. For instance, +some phototypesetters cannot print more than ten or so consecutive pages +before running out of steam; these options can be used to automatically +split a book into ten-page sections, each to its own file. +.TP +.B -j +Download only needed characters from Type 1 fonts. This is the +default in the current release. Some debugging flags trace this operation. +You can also control partial downloading on a per-font basis, via the +.B psfonts.map +file. +.TP +.B -k +Print crop marks. This option increases the paper size (which should be +specified, either with a paper size special or with the +.I -T +option) by a half inch in each dimension. It translates each page by a +quarter inch and draws cross-style crop marks. It is mostly useful with +typesetters that can set the page size automatically. +.TP +.B -K +This option causes comments in included PostScript graphics, font files, +and headers to be removed. This is sometimes necessary to get around +bugs in spoolers or PostScript post-processing programs. Specifically, +the %%Page comments, when left in, often cause difficulties. Use of +this flag can cause some included graphics to fail, since the PostScript +header macros from some software packages read portions of the input +stream line by line, searching for a particular comment. This option +has been turned off by default because PostScript previewers and +spoolers have been getting better. +.TP +.B -l num +The last page printed will be the first one numbered +.I num +Default is the last page in the document. If the +.I num +is prefixed by an equals sign, then it (and any argument to the +.I -p +option) is treated as a sequence number, rather than a value to compare +with +.I \ecount0 +values. Thus, using +.I -l =9 +will end with the ninth page of the document, no matter what the pages +are actually numbered. +.TP +.B -m +Specify manual feed for printer. +.TP +.B -mode mode +Use +.I mode +as the Metafont device name for path searching and font +generation. This overrides any value from configuration files. With +the default paths, explicitly specifying the mode also makes the program +assume the fonts are in a subdirectory named +.IR mode . +.TP +.B -M +Turns off the automatic font generation facility. If any fonts are +missing, commands to generate the fonts are appended to the file +.I missfont.log +in the current directory; this file can then be executed and deleted to +create the missing fonts. +.TP +.B -n num +At most +.I num +pages will be printed. Default is 100000. +.TP +.B -N +Turns off structured comments; this might be necessary on some systems +that try to interpret PostScript comments in weird ways, or on some +PostScript printers. Old versions of TranScript in particular cannot +handle modern Encapsulated PostScript. +.TP +.B -noomega +This will disable the use of Omega extensions when interpreting DVI files. +By default, the additional opcodes +.I 129 +and +.I 134 +are recognized by dvips as Omega extensions and interpreted as requests to +set 2-byte characters. The only drawback is that the virtual font array will +(at least temporarily) require 65536 positions instead of the default 256 +positions, i.e. the memory requirements of dvips will be slightly larger. If +you find this unacceptable or encounter another problem with the Omega +extensions, you can switch this extension off by using +.B -noomega +(but please do send a bug report if you find such problems - see the bug +address in the +.B AUTHORS +section below). +.TP +.B -o name +The output will be sent to file +.I name +If no file name is given, the default name is +.I file.ps +where the .dvi file was called +.IR file.dvi ; +if this option isn't given, any default in the configuration file is +used. If the first character of the supplied output file name is an +exclamation mark, then the remainder will be used as an argument to +.IR popen ; +thus, specifying +.I !lpr +as the output file will automatically queue the file for printing. +This option also disables the automatic reading of the +.I PRINTER +environment variable, and turns off the automatic sending of control D +if it was turned on with the +.I -F +option or in the configuration file; use +.I -F +after this option if you want both. +.TP +.B -O offset +Move the origin by a certain amount. The +.I offset +is a comma-separated pair of dimensions, such as +.I .1in,-.3cm +(in the same syntax used in the +.I papersize +special). The origin of the page is shifted from the +default position (of one inch down, one inch to the right from the upper +left corner of the paper) by this amount. +.TP +.B -p num +The first page printed will be the first one numbered +.IR num . +Default is the first page in the document. If the +.I num +is prefixed by an equals sign, then it (and any argument to the +.I -l +option) is treated as a sequence number, rather than a value to compare +with +.I \ecount0 +values. Thus, using +.I -p =3 +will start with the third page of the document, no matter what the pages +are actually numbered. +.TP +.B -pp pagelist +A comma-separated list of pages and ranges (a-b) may be given, which +will be interpreted as +.I \ecount0 +values. Pages not specified will not be printed. Multiple +.B -pp +options may be specified or all pages and page ranges can be +specified with one +.B -pp +option. +.TP +.B -P printername +Sets up the output for the appropriate printer. This is implemented by +reading in +.I config.printername +, which can then set the output pipe (as in, +.I !lpr -Pprintername +as well as the font paths and any other +.I config.ps +defaults for that printer only. Note that +.I config.ps +is read before +.I config.printername +In addition, another file called +.I ~/.dvipsrc +is searched for immediately after +.IR config.ps ; +this file is intended for user defaults. If no +.I -P +command is given, the environment variable +.I PRINTER +is checked. If that variable exists, and a corresponding configuration +file exists, that configuration file is read in. +.TP +.B -q +Run in quiet mode. Don't chatter about pages converted, etc.; report +nothing but errors to standard error. +.TP +.B -r +Stack pages in reverse order. Normally, page 1 will be printed first. +.TP +.B -R +Run in secure mode. This means that ``backtick'' commands from a +.I \especial{} +or +.I \epsffile{} +macro in the (La)TeX source like +.I \especial{psfile="`zcat foo.ps.Z"} +or +.I \epsffile[72 72 540 720]{"`zcat screendump.ps.gz"} +are not executed. +.TP +.B -s +Causes the entire global output to be enclosed in a save/restore pair. +This causes the file to not be truly conformant, and is thus not +recommended, but is useful if you are driving the printer directly and +don't care too much about the portability of the output. +.TP +.B -S num +Set the maximum number of pages in each `section'. This option is most +commonly used with the +.I -i +option; see that documentation above for more information. +.TP +.B -t papertype +This sets the paper type to +.IR papertype . +The +.I papertype +should be defined in one of the configuration files, along with the +appropriate code to select it. (Currently known types include +.BR letter , +.BR legal , +.BR ledger , +.BR a4 , +.BR a3 ). +You can also specify +.BR -t " " landscape , +which rotates a document by 90 degrees. To rotate a document whose size +is not letter, you can use the +.I -t +option twice, once for the page size, and once for landscape. +You should not use any +.I -t +option when the DVI file already contains a +.I papersize +special, as is done by some LaTeX packages, notably hyperref.sty. + +The upper left corner of each page in the +.I .dvi +file is placed one inch from the left and one inch from the top. Use of +this option is highly dependent on the configuration file. Note that +executing the +.B letter +or +.B a4 +or other PostScript operators cause the document to be nonconforming and +can cause it not to print on certain printers, so the paper size should +not execute such an operator if at all possible. +.TP +.B -T papersize +Set the paper size to the given pair of dimensions. This option takes +its arguments in the same style as +.IR -O . +It overrides any paper size special in the dvi file. +.TP +.B -u psmapfile +Set +.I psmapfile +to be the file that dvips uses for looking up PostScript font aliases. If +.I psmapfile +begins with a +.B + +character, then the rest of the name is used as the name of the map file, +and the map file is appended to the list of map files (instead of replacing +the list). In either case, if +.I psmapfile +has no extension, then +.B .map +is added at the end. +.TP +.B -U +Disable a PostScript virtual memory saving optimization that stores the +character metric information in the same string that is used to store +the bitmap information. This is only necessary when driving the Xerox +4045 PostScript interpreter. It is caused by a bug in that interpreter +that results in `garbage' on the bottom of each character. Not +recommended unless you must drive this printer. +.TP +.B -v +Print the +.B dvips +version number and exit. +.TP +.B -V +Download non-resident PostScript fonts as bitmaps. This requires use of +`gsftopk' or `pstopk' or some other such program(s) in order to generate +the required bitmap fonts; these programs are supplied with +.BR dvips . +.TP +.B -x num +Set the +magnification ratio to +.IR num /1000. +Overrides the magnification specified in the .dvi file. Must be +between 10 and 100000. Instead of an integer, +.I num +may be a real number for increased precision. +.TP +.B -X num +Set the horizontal resolution in dots per inch to +.IR num . +.TP +.B -y num +Set the +magnification ratio to +.IR num /1000 +times the magnification specified in the .dvi file. +See +.B -x +above. +.TP +.B -Y num +Set the vertical resolution in dots per inch to +.IR num . +.TP +.B -z +Pass +.B html +hyperdvi specials through to the output for eventual +distillation into PDF. This is not enabled by default to avoid +including the header files unnecessarily, and use of temporary files in +creating the output. +.TP +.B -Z +Causes bitmapped fonts to be compressed before they are downloaded, +thereby reducing the size of the PostScript font-downloading +information. Especially useful at high resolutions or when very large +fonts are used. Will slow down printing somewhat, especially on early +68000-based PostScript printers. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +mf(1), afm2tfm(1), tex(1), latex(1), lpr(1), +.IR dvips.texi . +.SH ENVIRONMENT +Dvipsk uses the same environment variables and algorithms for finding +font files as TeX and its friends do. See the documentation for the +Kpathsea library for details. (Repeating it here is too cumbersome.) +.PP +KPATHSEA_DEBUG: Trace Kpathsea lookups; set to -1 for complete tracing. +.PP +PRINTER: see above. +.SH NOTES +PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. +.SH AUTHOR +Tomas Rokicki ; extended to virtual fonts +by Don Knuth. Path searching and configuration modifications by +kb@mail.tug.org. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvired.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvired.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f76e58087a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvired.1 @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +.TH dvired 1 "09/94" "teTeX" "teTeX" +.SH NAME +dvired \- print dvi-files +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B dvired +[ +.B options +] +.B file +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I dvired +behaves like +.IR dvips , +except for the fact that two logical pages are put onto each physical +sheet of paper. + +For +.IR options , +see +.IR dvips (1). +This program only interprets the following options: + +.I \-o file +\- redirect output into +.I file. + +.I \-P printer +\- direct output to +.I printer. + +.I \-f +\- direct output to stdout. + +Any other option is passed directly to +.IR dvips . + +.SH EXAMPLES +It is assumed that the PRINTER-variable is set. + +.B dvired \-Plw foo +\- send output to printer +.IR lw . +.br +.B dvired \-o foo.ps foo +\- send output to file +.IR foo.ps . +.br +.B dvired \-pp4-7 foo +\- send 4 pages (reduced onto 2 sheets) of +.I foo +to the printer. +.br +.B dvired foo \-f | ghostview \- +\- preview output with ghostview. + +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR dvips (1) +.SH BUGS +.I dvired +is fixed on A4 paper size. If you want to use it with other paper, you have +to change the settings within the source. +.SH AUTHOR +Thomas Esser diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviselect.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviselect.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..814f102308a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviselect.1 @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ +.TH DVISELECT 1 +.SH NAME +dviselect \- extract pages from DVI files +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B dviselect +[ +.B \-s +] [ +.B \-i +.I infile +] [ +.B \-o +.I outfile +] +.I "list of pages" +[ +.I infile +[ +.I outfile +] ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Dviselect +selects pages from a DVI file produced by TeX, +creating a new DVI file +usable by any of the TeX conversion programs, +or even by +.I dviselect +itself. +.PP +A +.I range +is a string of the form +.IR even , +.IR odd , +or +.I first:last +where both +.I first +and +.I last +are optional numeric strings, with negative numbers indicated by +a leading underscore character ``_''. If both +.I first +and +.I last +are omitted, the colon may also be omitted, or may be replaced +with an asterisk ``*''. A +.I page range +is a list of ranges separated by periods. A +.I "list of pages" +is described by a set of page ranges separated by commas and/or white space. +.PP +.I Dviselect +actually looks at the ten +.I count +variables that TeX writes; the first of these (\ecount0) is the +page number, with \ecount1 through \ecount9 having varied uses +depending on which macro packages are in use. (Typically \ecount1 +might be a chapter or section number.) A page is included in +.IR dviselect 's +output if all its \ecount values match any one of the ranges +listed on the command line. For example, the command +``dviselect *.1,35:'' +might select everything in chapter 1, as well as pages 35 and up. +``dviselect 10:30'' would select pages 10 through 30 (inclusive). +``:43'' means everything up to and including page 43 (including +negative-numbered pages). +To get all even-numbered pages, use ``even''; +to get all odd-numbered pages, use ``odd''. +If a Table of Contents has negative page numbers, ``:_1'' will select it. +Note that ``*'' must be quoted from the shell; +the empty string is more convenient to use, if harder to read. +.PP +Instead of \ecount values, +.I dviselect +can also select by ``absolute page number'', where the first page +is page 1, the second page 2, and so forth. Absolute page numbers +are indicated by a leading equal sign ``=''. Ranges of absolute +pages are also allowed: ``dviselect =3:7'' will extract the third +through seventh pages. Dot separators are not legal in absolute +ranges, and there are no negative absolute page numbers. +Even/odd specifiers, however, are legal; +``dviselect =even'' selects every other page, +starting with the second. +.PP +More precisely, an asterisk or an empty string implies no limit; +an equal sign means absolute page number rather than \ecounts; +a leading colon means everything up to and including the given page; a +trailing colon means everything from the given page on; +the word ``even'' means only even values shall be accepted; +the word ``odd'' means only odd values shall be accepted; and +a period indicates that the next \ecount should be examined. +If fewer than 10 ranges are specified, the remaining \ecounts +are left unrestricted (that is, ``1:5'' and ``1:5.*'' are equivalent). +A single number \fIn\fP is treated as if it were the range \fIn:n\fP. +An arbitrary number of page selectors may be given, separated by commas +or whitespace; a page is selected if any of the selectors matches +its \ecounts or absolute page number. +.PP +Dviselect normally prints the page numbers of the pages selected; the +.I \-s +option suppresses this. +.SH AUTHOR +Chris Torek, University of Maryland +.SH "SEE ALSO" +dviconcat(1), latex(1), tex(1) +.br +.I "MC-TeX User's Guide" +.br +.I "The TeXbook" +.SH BUGS +A leading ``-'' ought to be allowed for negative numbers, but it +is currently used as a synonym for ``:'', for backwards compatibility. +.PP +Section or subsection selection will sometimes fail, for the DVI +file lists only the \ecount values that were active when the page +ended. Clever macro packages can alleviate this by making use of +other ``free'' \ecount registers. Chapters normally begin on new +pages, and do not suffer from this particular problem. +.PP +The heuristic that decides which arguments are page selectors +and which are file names is often wrong. +Using shell redirection or the \-i and \-o options is safest. +.PP +.I Dviselect +does not adjust the parameters in the postamble; however, since these +values are normally used only to size certain structures in the output +conversion programs, and the parameters never need to be adjusted upward, +this has not proven to be a problem. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitodvi.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitodvi.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..549b5a5e8c7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitodvi.1 @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ +.TH DVITODVI 1 +.SH NAME +dvitodvi \- rearrange pages in a DVI file +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B dvitodvi +[ +.B \-q +] [ +.B \-i +.I infile +] [ +.B \-o +.I outfile +] +[ +.B \-w\fIwidth\fR +] +[ +.B \-h\fIheight\fR +] +.I pagespecs +[ +.I infile +[ +.I outfile +] ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Dvitodvi +rearranges pages from a DVI file, creating a new DVI file. +.I Dvitodvi +can be used to perform a large number of arbitrary re-arrangements of +Documents, including arranging for printing 2-up, 4-up, booklets, reversing, +selecting front or back sides of documents, scaling, etc. +.PP +.I pagespecs +follow the syntax: +.RS +.TP 12 +.I pagespecs +.I = [modulo:][mag@]specs +.TP +.I specs +.I = spec[+specs][,specs] +.TP +.I spec +.I = [-]pageno[(xoff,yoff)] +.RE +.sp +.I modulo +is the number of pages in each block. The value of +.I modulo +should be greater than 0; the default value is 1. +The optional +.I mag +parameter adjusts the file's magnification by the magnification specified. The +magnification and modulo can be specified in reverse order if desired. +.I specs +are the page specifications for the pages in each block. The value of the +.I pageno +in each +.I spec +should be between 0 (for the first page in the block) and \fImodulo\fR-1 +(for the last page in each block) inclusive. +The optional dimensions +.I xoff +and +.I yoff +shift the page by the specified (positive) amount. +.I xoff +and +.I yoff +are in PostScript's points, but may be followed by the units +.B "cm" +or +.B "in" +to convert to centimetres or inches, or the flag +.B "w" +or +.B "h" +to specify as a multiple of the width or height. +If the optional minus sign is specified, the page is relative to the end of +the document, instead of the start. + +If page \fIspec\fRs are separated by +.B \+ +the pages will be merged into one page; if they are separated by +.B \, +they will be on separate pages. +If there is only one page specification, with +.I pageno +zero, the \fIpageno\fR may be omitted. +.PP +The +.I \-w +option gives the width which is used by the +.B "w" +dimension specifier, and the +.I \-h +option gives the height which is used by the +.B "h" +dimension specifier. These dimensions are also used (after scaling) to set the +clipping path for each page. +.PP +Dvitodvi normally prints the page numbers of the pages re-arranged; the +.I \-q +option suppresses this. +.SH EXAMPLES +This section contains some sample re-arrangements. To put two pages on one +sheet (of landscaped A3 paper), the pagespec to use is: +.sp +.ce +2:0+1(21cm,0) +.sp +To reduce an A3 page to A4 size, the pagespec to use is: +.sp +.ce +700@(-.3in,-.3in) +.sp +To select all of the odd pages in reverse order, use: +.sp +.ce +2:-0 +.sp +.SH AUTHOR +Angus Duggan, from dviselect(1), by +Chris Torek, University of Maryland +.SH "SEE ALSO" +dviconcat(1), dvibook(1), dviselect(1), latex(1), tex(1) +.br +.I "MC-TeX User's Guide" +.br +.I "The TeXbook" +.SH BUGS +.I Dvitodvi +does not adjust some of the parameters in the postamble. This may be a problem +if these values are used to size certain structures in the output +conversion programs. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitomp.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitomp.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a6b74030943 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitomp.1 @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +.TH DVITOMP 1 "October 30, 1999" +.\" man page by Jim Van Zandt -*- nroff -*- +.SH NAME +dvitomp \- convert a TeX DVI file to a MetaPost MPXFILE +.SH SYNOPSIS +\fBdvitomp\fP [\fIoptions\fP] \fIdvifile\fP[.dvi] [\fImpxfile\fP[.mpx]] +.SH DESCRIPTION +\fBdvitomp\fP translates the given \fIdvifile\fP to a MetaPost +MPXFILE. The default \fImpxfile\fP is the basename of \fIdvifile\fP +extended with ".mpx". +.SH OPTIONS +.IP \fB-help\fP +write usage summary and exit. +.IP \fB-version\fP +output version information and exit. +.SH BUGS +Email bug reports to tex-k@mail.tug.org. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitype.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitype.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a68e4f34ec3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitype.1 @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +.TH DVITYPE 1 "19 December 1994" "Web2C 7.5.5" +.\"===================================================================== +.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP +.if n .ds TX TeX +.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff +.el .ds OX TeX for nroff +.\" the same but obliqued +.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX +.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds BX BibTeX +.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX +.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds LX LaTeX +.\"===================================================================== +.SH NAME +dvitype \- translate a dvi file for humans +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B dvitype +.I dvi_name[.dvi] +.\"===================================================================== +.SH DESCRIPTION +This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete +documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file +or manual +.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . +.PP +The +.B dvitype +program translates a DVI (DeVice Independent) file output by (for example) +.BR tex (1) +or +.BR gftodvi (1), +to a file that humans can read. It also serves as a DVI file-validating +program (i.e., if +.B dvitype +can read it, it's correct) and as an example of a DVI-reading +program for future device drivers. +.PP +The output file can include all commands, just the important +ones, or none at all (in which case only errors are reported). +A subinterval of pages may be selected for transliteration; the +magnification and resolution of the ``output device'' may be +changed; and so on. All options are specified with an on-line dialog. +.PP +The +.I .dvi +extension is supplied if omitted from +.IR dvi_name . +The output goes to +.IR stdout . +.\"===================================================================== +.SH ENVIRONMENT +The environment variable TEXFONTS is used to search for the TFM files +used in the DVI file. See +.BR tex (1) +for the details of the searching. +If TEXFONTS is not set, it uses the system default. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR gftype (1), +.BR pktype (1). +.br +Donald E. Knuth, +.IR \*(OXware . +.\"===================================================================== +.SH BUGS +The interactive dialog should be replaced by command-line options, as +with +.BR gftype . +.SH AUTHORS +Donald E. Knuth wrote the program. It was published as part of the +.I \*(OXware +technical report, available from the \*(TX Users Group. +Howard Trickey and Pavel Curtis originally ported it to Unix. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/e2pall.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/e2pall.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b102568b53a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/e2pall.1 @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +.TH "e2pall" "1" "August 2000" "teTeX" "teTeX" +.PP +.SH "NAME" +e2pall \- convert all EPS files in a LaTeX document to PDF +.PP +.SH "SYNOPSIS" +.PP +\fBe2pall\fP \fITEXFILE\fP +.PP +.SH "DESCRIPTION" +.PP +\fBe2pall\fP searches through \fITEXFILE\fP for \eincludegraphics +commands to find the base names of image files\&. When it finds one, +\fBe2pall\fP runs \fBepstopdf\fP(1) to create a PDF file from the EPS +file\&. +.PP +\fBe2pall\fP will check to be sure that an existing PDF file is +up-to-date with the EPS file, and will not run \fBepstopdf\fP(1) if +the PDF file is newer than the EPS file\&. +.PP +.SH "BUGS" +.PP +.IP "" +Seems to be broken +.IP "" +Cannot handle \einput{\fIfilename\fP} or +\eincludegraphics{\fIfilename\fP} split over more than one +line +.IP "" +Must be run from same directory as the LaTeX file +.IP "" +Does not look down $TEXINPUTS +.IP "" +Cannot handle documents that use \einclude commands +.IP "" +Assumes \fIall\fP files included with \eincludegraphics are EPS +files +.IP +.PP +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.PP +\fBepstopdf\fP(1) +.PP +.SH "AUTHOR" +.PP +\fBe2pall\fP was written by Jody Klymak and published in a posting to +the (mailing list)\&. +.PP +This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly +, for +the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions +without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the +manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this +manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&. +.PP diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ebb.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ebb.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1a44ed97e20 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ebb.1 @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +.TH "ebb" "1" "May 2004" "teTeX" "teTeX" +.PP +.SH "NAME" +ebb \- extract a bounding box from JPEG, PNG, and PDF files +.PP +.SH "SYNOPSIS" +.PP +\fBebb\fP [ \fI -v\fP | \fI-b\fP ] \fI graphic_file\fP +.PP +.SH "DESCRIPTION" +.PP +\fBebb\fP extracts the bounding box from JPEG, PNG, and PDF files +(with lower- or uppercase extensions) and writes it into a file with +the extension \fB.bb\fP, together with some header information. These +files can then be used by \fBdvipdfm\fP or other programs. +.PP +.SH "OPTIONS" +.HP +\fB\-v\fR : be verbose +.HP +\fB\-b\fR : Write .bb file in binary mode (has no effect on Linux and +other systems conforming to POSIX). +.HP +.PP +.SH "AUTHOR" +.PP +\fBebb\fP was written by Mark A. Wicks. +.PP +This manual page was written by Frank Küster , +for the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used and modified by +others without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in +the manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this +manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary +author)\&. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/eplain.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/eplain.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ec798867b6d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/eplain.1 @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ +.TH EPLAIN 1 "14 December 1993" "Web2C 7.5.5" +.\"===================================================================== +.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP +.if n .ds TX TeX +.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff +.el .ds OX TeX for nroff +.\" the same but obliqued +.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX +.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds BX BibTeX +.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX +.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds LX LaTeX +.if t .ds AX \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds AX AmSTeX +.if t .ds AY \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(LX +.if n .ds AY AmSLaTeX +.\"===================================================================== +.SH NAME +eplain \- extended plain TeX +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B eplain +[ first-line ] +.\"===================================================================== +.SH DESCRIPTION +This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete +documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file +or manual +.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . +.PP +.B eplain +is an extension of plain \*(TX described in the book +.IR "\*(OX for the Impatient" . +It adds these features (among others) to plain \*(TX: +.TP \w'\(bu'u+2n +\(bu +left-justified displays +.TP +\(bu +double-column output +.TP +\(bu +tables of contents +.TP +\(bu +.I \ehrule +and +.I \evrule +with a different default than 0.4pt +.TP +\(bu +time of day +.TP +\(bu +verbatim file listing +.TP +\(bu +generalized footnotes +.TP +\(bu +blank and black boxes +.TP +\(bu +citations using \*(BX +.\"===================================================================== +.SH FILES +.TP +.I eplain/doc/eplain.texi +\*(TXable documentation of +.B etex +macros in +.B texinfo +format. +.TP +.I eplain.info* +Online GNU Emacs +.BR info (1) +files produced from +.IR eplain.texi . +.PP +The complete +.I eplain +distribution is available via anonymous ftp to the Internet host +.I ftp.cs.umb.edu +from the file +.I pub/tex/eplain.tar.Z +which is linked to another file containing the most recent version of +the package. Major \*(TX archive sites should also have it. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR emacs (1), +.BR info (1), +.BR initex (1), +.BR tex (1), +.BR xinfo (1). +.br +Karl Berry, +.IR eplain , +TUGboat 11(4), 571--572, 1990. +.br +Paul W. Abrahams with Karl Berry and Kathryn A. Hargreaves, +.IR "\*(OX for the Impatient" , +Addison-Wesley, 1990, ISBN 0-201-51375-7. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epsffit.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epsffit.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f708df244e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epsffit.1 @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +.TH EPSFFIT 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" +.SH NAME +epsffit \- fit encapsulated PostScript file (EPSF) into constrained size +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B epsffit +[ +.B \-c +] [ +.B \-r +] [ +.B \-a +] [ +.B \-m +] [ +.B \-s +] +.I "llx lly urx ury" +[ +.B infile +[ +.B outfile +] ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Epsffit +fits an EPSF file (encapsulated PostScript) to a given bounding box. +The coordinates of the box are given by \fB(llx,lly)\fR for the lower +left, and \fB(urx,ury)\fR for the upper right, in PostScript units (points). +.PP +If no input or output files are specified, +.I epsffit +read from the standard input and writes to the standard output. +.SH OPTIONS +.IP \fB\-c\fP 1i +Center the image in the given bounding box. +.IP \fB\-r\fP 1i +Rotate the image by 90 degrees counter-clockwise. +.IP \fB\-a\fP 1i +Adjust the aspect ratio to fit the bounding box. The default is to preserve +the aspect ratio. +.IP \fB\-m\fP 1i +Rotates the image to maximise the size if it would fit the specified bounding +box better. +.IP \fB\-s\fP 1i +Add a \fIshowpage\fP at the end of the file to force the image to print. +.SH AUTHOR +Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 +.SH "SEE ALSO" +psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1) +.SH TRADEMARKS +.B PostScript +is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epstopdf.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epstopdf.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..451e5a3ca1e --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epstopdf.1 @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +.TH EPSTOPDF 1 "October 30, 1999" +.\" man page by Jim Van Zandt -*- nroff -*- +.SH NAME +epstopdf \- convert an EPS file to PDF +.SH SYNOPSIS +\fBepstopdf\fP [\fIoptions\fP] \fIepsfile\fP +.SH DESCRIPTION +\fBepstopdf\fP transforms the Encapsulated PostScript file +\fIepsfile\fP so that it is guaranteed to start at the 0,0 coordinate, +and it sets a page size exactly corresponding to the BoundingBox. +This means that when Ghostscript renders it, the result needs no +cropping, and the PDF MediaBox is correct. The result is piped to +Ghostscript and a PDF version written. +.P +If the bounding box is not right, of course, you have problems... +.SH OPTIONS +.IP "\fB--outfile\fP=\fIfile\fP" +write result to \fIfile\fP instead of standard output. +.IP "\fB--\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBfilter\fP" +read standard input (default: --nofilter). +.IP "\fB--\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBgs\fP" +run ghostscript (default: --gs). +.IP "\fB--\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBcompress\fP" +use compression (default: --compress). +.IP "\fB--\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBhires\fP" +scan HiresBoundingBox (default: --nohires). +.IP "\fB--\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBexact\fP" +scan ExactBoundingBox (default: --noexact). +.IP "\fB--\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBdebug\fP" +debug informations (default: --nodebug). +.IP "\fB--help\fP +print usage +.SH EXAMPLE +Examples for producing "test.pdf": +.nf + +epstopdf test.eps +produce postscript | epstopdf --filter >test.pdf +produce postscript | epstopdf -f -d -o=test.pdf + +.fi +Example: look for HiresBoundingBox and produce corrected PostScript: +.nf + +epstopdf -d --nogs -hires test.ps>testcorr.ps +.fi +.SH BUGS +The only thing I have not allowed for is the case of +"%%BoundingBox: (atend)", which is more complicated. +.SH SEE ALSO +\fBgs\fP(1). +.SH AUTHOR +Sebastian Rahtz, for Elsevier Science. +Now with extra tricks from Hans Hagen's texutil. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/etex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/etex.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..16277a606cc --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/etex.1 @@ -0,0 +1,429 @@ +.TH ETEX 1 "21 August 2004" "Web2C 7.5.5" +.\"===================================================================== +.if n .ds MF Metafont +.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 +.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP +.if n .ds TX TeX +.if n .ds MF Metafont +.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 +.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff +.el .ds OX TeX for nroff +.\" the same but obliqued +.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX +.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds BX BibTeX +.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX +.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds LX LaTeX +.if t .ds AX \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds AX AmSTeX +.if t .ds AY \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(LX +.if n .ds AY AmSLaTeX +.\"===================================================================== +.SH NAME +etex, einitex, evirtex \- extended TeX +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B etex +.RI [ options ] +[\fB&\fR \fIformat\fR ] +[ \fIfile\fR | \fB\e\fR \fIcommands\fR ] +.\"===================================================================== +.SH DESCRIPTION +Run the e-\*(TX typesetter on +.IR file , +usually creating +.IR file.dvi . +If the file argument has no extension, ".tex" will be appended to it. +Instead of a filename, a set of e-\*(TX commands can be given, the first +of which must start with a backslash. +With a +.BI & format +argument e-\*(TX uses a different set of precompiled commands, +contained in +.IR format.fmt ; +it is usually better to use the +.B -fmt +.I format +option instead. +.PP +e-\*(TX is the first concrete result of an international research & +development project, the NTS Project, which was established under the +aegis of DANTE e.V. during 1992. The aims of the project are to +perpetuate and develop the spirit and philosophy of \*(TX, whilst +respecting Knuth's wish that \*(TX should remain frozen. +.PP +e-\*(TX can be used in two different modes: in +.I compatibility mode +it is supposed to be completely interchangable with standard \*(TX. +In +.I extended mode +several new primitives are added that facilitate (among other things) +bidirectional typesetting. +.PP +An extended mode format is generated by prefixing the name of the +source file for the format with an asterisk (*). Such formats are +often prefixed with an `e', hence +.B etex +as the extended version of +.B tex +and +.B elatex +as the extended version of +.BR latex . +However, +.B eplain +is an exception to this rule. +.PP +The +.B einitex +and +.B evirtex +commands are e-\*(TX's analogues to the +.B initex +and +.B virtex +commands. In this installation, they are symbolic links to the +.B etex +executable. These symbolic links may not exist at all. +.PP +e-\*(TX's handling of its command-line arguments is similar to that of +the other \*(TX programs in the +.I web2c +implementation. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH OPTIONS +This version of e-\*(TX understands the following command line options. +.TP +.BI -fmt \ format +.rb +Use +.I format +as the name of the format to be used, instead of the name by which +e-\*(TX was called or a +.I %& +line. +.TP +.B -enc +.rb +Enable the enc\*(TX extensions. This option is only effective in +combination with +.BR -ini . +For documentation of the enc\*(TX extensions see +.BR http://www.olsak.net/enctex.html . +.TP +.B -etex +.rb +Enable the e-\*(TX extensions. This option is only effective in +combination with +.BR -ini . +.TP +.B -file-line-error +.rb +Print error messages in the form +.I file:line:error +which is similar to the way many compilers format them. +.TP +.B -no-file-line-error +.rb +Disable printing error messages in the +.I file:line:error +style. +.TP +.B -file-line-error-style +.rb +This is the old name of the +.B -file-line-error +option. +.TP +.B -halt-on-error +.rb +Exit with an error code when an error is encountered during processing. +.TP +.B -help +.rb +Print help message and exit. +.TP +.B -ini +.rb +Start in +.I INI +mode, which is used to dump formats. The +.I INI +mode can be used for typesetting, but no format is preloaded, and +basic initializations like setting catcodes may be required. +.TP +.BI -interaction \ mode +.rb +Sets the interaction mode. The mode can be either +.IR batchmode , +.IR nonstopmode , +.IR scrollmode , +and +.IR errorstopmode . +The meaning of these modes is the same as that of the corresponding +\ecommands. +.TP +.B -ipc +.rb +Send DVI output to a socket as well as the usual output file. Whether +this option is available is the choice of the installer. +.TP +.B -ipc-start +.rb +As +.BR -ipc , +and starts the server at the other end as well. Whether this option +is available is the choice of the installer. +.TP +.BI -jobname \ name +.rb +Use +.I name +for the job name, instead of deriving it from the name of the input file. +.TP +.BI -kpathsea-debug \ bitmask +.rb +Sets path searching debugging flags according to the bitmask. See the +.I Kpathsea +manual for details. +.TP +.BI -mktex \ fmt +.rb +Enable +.RI mktex fmt , +where +.I fmt +must be either +.I tex +or +.IR tfm . +.TP +.B -mltex +.rb +Enable ML\*(TX extensions. Only effective in combination with +.BR -ini . +.TP +.BI -no-mktex \ fmt +.rb +Disable +.RI mktex fmt , +where +.I fmt +must be either +.I tex +or +.IR tfm . +.TP +.BI -output-comment \ string +.rb +Use +.I string +for the +.I DVI +file comment instead of the date. +.TP +.BI -output-directory \ directory +.rb Write output files in +.I directory +instead of the current directory. Look up input files in +.I directory +first, the along the normal search path. +.TP +.B -parse-first-line +.rb +If the first line of the main input file begins with +.I %& +parse it to look for a dump name or a +.B -translate-file +option. +.TP +.B -no-parse-first-line +.rb +Disable parsing of the first line of the main input file. +.TP +.BI -progname \ name +.rb +Pretend to be program +.IR name . +This affects both the format used and the search paths. +.TP +.B -recorder +.rb +Enable the filename recorder. This leaves a trace of the files opened +for input and output in a file with extension +.IR .fls . +.TP +.B -shell-escape +.rb +Enable the +.BI \ewrite18{ command } +construct. The +.I command +can be any shell command. This construct is normally +disallowed for security reasons. +.TP +.B -no-shell-escape +.rb +Disable the +.BI \ewrite18{ command } +construct, even if it is enabled in the +.I texmf.cnf +file. +.TP +.B -src-specials +.rb +Insert source specials into the +.I DVI +file. +.TP +.BI -src-specials \ where +.rb +Insert source specials in certain placed of the +.I DVI +file. +.I where +is a comma-separated value list: +.IR cr , +.IR display , +.IR hbox , +.IR math , +.IR par , +.IR parent , +or +.IR vbox . +.TP +.BI -translate-file \ tcxname +.rb +Use the +.I tcxname +translation table to set the mapping of input characters and +re-mapping of output characters. +.TP +.BI -default-translate-file \ tcxname +.rb +Like +.B -translate-file +except that a +.I %& +line can overrule this setting. +.TP +.B -version +.rb +Print version information and exit. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH ENVIRONMENT +See the Kpathsearch library documentation (the `Path specifications' +node) for precise details of how the environment variables are used. +The +.B kpsewhich +utility can be used to query the values of the variables. +.PP +One caveat: In most e-\*(TX formats, you cannot use ~ in a filename you +give directly to e-\*(TX, because ~ is an active character, and hence is +expanded, not taken as part of the filename. Other programs, such as +\*(MF, do not have this problem. +.PP +.TP +TEXMFOUTPUT +Normally, e-\*(TX puts its output files in the current directory. If +any output file cannot be opened there, it tries to open it in the +directory specified in the environment variable TEXMFOUTPUT. +There is no default value for that variable. For example, if you say +.I etex paper +and the current directory is not writable, if TEXMFOUTPUT has +the value +.IR /tmp , +e-\*(TX attempts to create +.I /tmp/paper.log +(and +.IR /tmp/paper.dvi , +if any output is produced.) +.TP +TEXINPUTS +Search path for +.I \einput +and +.I \eopenin +files. +This should probably start with ``.'', so +that user files are found before system files. An empty path +component will be replaced with the paths defined in the +.I texmf.cnf +file. For example, set TEXINPUTS to ".:/home/usr/tex:" to prepend the +current direcory and ``/home/user/tex'' to the standard search path. +.TP +TEXFORMATS +Search path for format files. +.TP +TEXPOOL +search path for +.B etex +internal strings. +.TP +TEXEDIT +Command template for switching to editor. The default, usually +.BR vi , +is set when e-\*(TX is compiled. +.TP +TFMFONTS +Search path for font metric +.RI ( .tfm ) +files. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH FILES +The location of the files mentioned below varies from system to +system. Use the +.B kpsewhich +utility to find their locations. +.TP +.I etex.pool +Text file containing e-\*(TX's internal strings. +.TP +.I texfonts.map +Filename mapping definitions. +.TP +.I *.tfm +Metric files for e-\*(TX's fonts. +.TP +.I *.fmt +Predigested e-\*(TX format (.\|fmt) files. +.br +.\"===================================================================== +.SH NOTES +This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete +documentation for this version of e-\*(TX can be found in the info +manual +.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . +.\"===================================================================== +.SH BUGS +This version of e-\*(TX implements a number of optional extensions. +In fact, many of these extensions conflict to a greater or lesser +extent with the definition of e-\*(TX. When such extensions are +enabled, the banner printed when e-\*(TX starts is changed to print +.B e-TeXk +instead of +.BR e-TeX . +.PP +This version of e-\*(TX fails to trap arithmetic overflow when +dimensions are added or subtracted. Cases where this occurs are rare, +but when it does the generated +.I DVI +file will be invalid. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR tex (1), +.BR mf (1). +.\"===================================================================== +.SH AUTHORS +e-\*(TX was developed by Peter Breitenlohner (and the NTS team). +.PP +\*(TX was designed by Donald E. Knuth, +who implemented it using his \*(WB system for Pascal programs. +It was ported to Unix at Stanford by Howard Trickey, and +at Cornell by Pavel Curtis. +The version now offered with the Unix \*(TX distribution is that +generated by the \*(WB to C system +.RB ( web2c ), +originally written by Tomas Rokicki and Tim Morgan. +.PP +The enc\*(TX extensions were written by Petr Olsak. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extconv.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extconv.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8bc5a66cc78 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extconv.1 @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ +.\" man page for bg5conv +. +.TH EXTCONV 1 11-Aug-2005 "CJK Version 4.6.0" +. +.\" ==== +.\" ==== macro definitions +.\" ==== +. +.\" here we define \TeX for troff and nroff +.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP +.if n .ds TX TeX +. +.\" and here the same for \LaTeX +.if t \{\ +.ie '\*(.T'dvi' \ +.ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.15v'\s-3A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX +.el .ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.22v'\s-2A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.22v'\fP\*(TX +.\} +.if n .ds LX LaTeX +. +.\" \LaTeXe +.\" note that we need \vareps for TeX instead of \eps which can only be +.\" accessed with the \N escape sequence (in the Math Italic font) +.if t \{\ +.ie '\*(.T'dvi' .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\f(MI\N'34'\fP\v'-0.20v' +.el .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\(*e\v'-0.20v' +.\} +.if n .ds LE LaTeX\ 2e +. +.\" a typewriter font +.if t \{\ +.de C +\fC\\$1\fP\\$2 +.. +.\} +.if n \{\ +.de C +\\$1\\$2 +.. +.\} +. +.\" ==== +.\" ==== end of macro definitions +.\" ==== +. +. +. +.SH NAME +extconv \- convert a TeX document in either Big\ 5+ or GBK encoding into +`preprocessed' form. +. +. +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B extconv +< +.I infile +> +.I outfile +. +. +.SH DESCRIPTION +Big\ 5+ and GBK encodings use the characters +.C { , +.C } , +and +.C \e +which have special meanings in \*(TX +documents. +.PP +After processing a \*(LE +document which contains such characters with +.B \%extconv +you need not care about these special characters. +.PP +This filter is part of the +.B CJK +macro package for \*(LE. +. +. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR bg5conv (1), +.BR \%sjisconv (1), +.BR \%cefconv (1), +.BR cef5conv (1), +.BR \%cefsconv (1), +.br +the +.B CJK +documentation files. +. +. +.SH AUTHOR +Werner Lemberg +.C diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extractres.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extractres.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..86252b6b5b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extractres.1 @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +.TH EXTRACTRES 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" +.SH NAME +extractres \- filter to extract resources from a PostScript document +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B extractres +[ +.B \-m +] < +.I document.ps +> +.I output.ps +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Extractres +extracts resources (fonts, procsets, patterns, files, etc) appearing in a +PostScript document, and puts appropriate +.I %%IncludeResource +comments in the document prologue. The extracted resources are written to +files with the same name as the resource, and an appropriate extension. The +pipeline +.sp +.ce +extractres file.ps | includeres >out.ps +.sp +will move all resources appearing in a document to the document prologue, +removing redundant copies. The output file can then be put through page +re-arrangement filters such as +.I psnup +or +.I pstops +safely. +.PP +The +.B \-m +option combines the resources of the same name into one file; this must be +used for some programs which download fonts a bit at a time. +.SH AUTHOR +Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 +.SH "SEE ALSO" +psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1) +.SH TRADEMARKS +.B PostScript +is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. +.SH BUGS +.I extractres +does not alter the +.I %%DocumentSuppliedResources +comments. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fdf2tex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fdf2tex.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d306652f34a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fdf2tex.1 @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +.TH FDF2TEX "1" "May 2004" "teTeX " "ConTeXt" +.SH NAME +fdf2tex \- Convert PDF formular data (FDF) into something (Con)TeX(t) can +handle +.PP +.SH "SYNOPSIS" +\fBfdf2tex\fP \fIinfile\fP [ \fIoutfile\fP ] +.PP +\fBfdf2tan\fP \fIinfile\fP +.PP +.SH DESCRIPTION +.PP +Converts PDF formular data (FDF) into something (Con)TeX(t) can +handle. These commands are usually called indirectly during ConTeXt +file processing. +.HP +.SH "BUGS" +.PP +Probably none - all errors are in this manpage +.PP +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.PP +\fBtexexec\fP(1)\&. +.PP +The TeXExec manual, \fImtexexec\&.pdf\fP\&. +.PP +.SH "AUTHOR" +.IP +This manual page was written by Frank Küster , +for the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used and modified by +others without contacting the author\&. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixdlsrps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixdlsrps.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..35f0e0593c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixdlsrps.1 @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +.TH FIXDLSRPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" +.SH NAME +fixdlsrps \- filter to fix DviLaser/PS documents to work with PSUtils +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B fixdlsrps +< +.I dvilaser.ps +> +.I Fixed.ps +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Fixdlsrps +is a +.I perl +filter which "fixes" PostScript generated from the DviLaser/PS driver so +that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's +.B psutils +package. +.SH AUTHOR +Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 +.SH "SEE ALSO" +psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1) +.SH TRADEMARKS +.B PostScript +is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixfmps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixfmps.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0f031b2d763 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixfmps.1 @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +.TH FIXFMPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" +.SH NAME +fixfmps \- filter to fix Framemaker documents so PSUtils work +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B fixfmps +< +.I Framemaker.ps +> +.I Fixed.ps +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Fixfmps +is a +.I perl +filter which "fixes" PostScript from Framemaker so +that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's +.B psutils +package. +.SH AUTHOR +Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 +.SH "SEE ALSO" +psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1) +.SH TRADEMARKS +.B PostScript +is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixmacps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixmacps.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..97efc859999 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixmacps.1 @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +.TH FIXMACPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" +.SH NAME +fixmacps \- filter to fix Macintosh documents with saner version of md +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B fixmacps +< +.I Macintosh.ps +> +.I Fixed.ps +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Fixmacps +is a +.I perl +filter which "fixes" PostScript generated from a Macintosh PC +that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's +.B psutils +package. +.SH FILES +md68_0.ps, md71_0.ps - sanitised versions of the md +prologue. +.SH AUTHOR +Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 +.SH "SEE ALSO" +psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1) +.SH TRADEMARKS +.B PostScript +is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpsditps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpsditps.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3945b7ad193 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpsditps.1 @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +.TH FIXPSDITPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" +.SH NAME +fixpsditps \- filter to fix Transcript psdit documents so PSUtils work +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B fixpsditps +< +.I psdit.ps +> +.I Fixed.ps +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Fixpsditps +is a +.I perl +filter which "fixes" PostScript from Transcript's psdit program so +that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's +.B psutils +package. +.SH AUTHOR +Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 +.SH "SEE ALSO" +psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1) +.SH TRADEMARKS +.B PostScript +is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpspps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpspps.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ead4f0bcf14 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpspps.1 @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +.TH FIXPSPPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" +.SH NAME +fixpspps \- filter to fix PSPrint PostScript so PSUtils work +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B fixpspps +< +.I PSPrint.ps +> +.I Fixed.ps +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Fixpspps +is a +.I perl +filter which "fixes" PostScript from PSPrint so +that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's +.B psutils +package. +.SH AUTHOR +Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 +.SH "SEE ALSO" +psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1) +.SH TRADEMARKS +.B PostScript +is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixscribeps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixscribeps.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a3fcec62ae2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixscribeps.1 @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +.TH FIXSCRIBEPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" +.SH NAME +fixscribeps \- filter to fix Scribe documents so PSUtils work +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B fixscribeps +< +.I Scribe.ps +> +.I Fixed.ps +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Fixscribeps +is a +.I perl +filter which "fixes" PostScript from Scribe so +that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's +.B psutils +package. +.SH AUTHOR +Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 +.SH "SEE ALSO" +psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1) +.SH TRADEMARKS +.B PostScript +is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixtpps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixtpps.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c65bb070fba --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixtpps.1 @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +.TH FIXTPPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" +.SH NAME +fixtpps \- filter to fix Tpscript documents to work with PSUtils +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B fixtpps +< +.I Tpscript.ps +> +.I Fixed.ps +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Fixtpps +is a +.I perl +filter which "fixes" PostScript generated from the Troff Tpscript driver so +that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's +.B psutils +package. +.SH AUTHOR +Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 +.SH "SEE ALSO" +psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1) +.SH TRADEMARKS +.B PostScript +is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwfwps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwfwps.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..31e71500cf4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwfwps.1 @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +.TH FIXWFWPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" +.SH NAME +fixwfwps \- filter to fix Word for Windows documents so PSUtils work +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B fixwfwps +< +.I WordforWindows.ps +> +.I Fixed.ps +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Fixwfwps +is a +.I perl +filter which "fixes" PostScript from Word for Windows so +that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's +.B psutils +package. +.SH AUTHOR +Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 +.SH "SEE ALSO" +psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1) +.SH TRADEMARKS +.B PostScript +is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwpps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwpps.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..61052fc68f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwpps.1 @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +.TH FIXWPPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" +.SH NAME +fixwpps \- filter to fix WP documents so PSUtils work +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B fixwpps +< +.I WordPerfect.ps +> +.I Fixed.ps +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Fixwpps +is a +.I perl +filter which "fixes" PostScript from WordPerfect 5.0 and 5.1 so +that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's +.B psutils +package. +.SH AUTHOR +Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 +.SH "SEE ALSO" +psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1) +.SH TRADEMARKS +.B PostScript +is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwwps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwwps.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ed58e11f94b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwwps.1 @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +.TH FIXWWPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" +.SH NAME +fixwwps \- filter to fix Windows Write documents so PSUtils work +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B fixwwps +< +.I WinWrite.ps +> +.I Fixed.ps +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Fixwwps +is a +.I perl +filter which "fixes" PostScript from Windows Write so +that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's +.B psutils +package. +.SH AUTHOR +Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 +.SH "SEE ALSO" +psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1) +.SH TRADEMARKS +.B PostScript +is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil-sys.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil-sys.1 new file mode 120000 index 00000000000..240dee18655 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil-sys.1 @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +fmtutil.1 \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..dfb96086a74 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil.1 @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +.TH "fmtutil" "8" "February 2005" "teTeX" "teTeX" +.PP +.SH "NAME" +fmtutil \- utility for maintaining TeX format files +.PP +fmtutil-sys \- utility for maintaining TeX format files system\-wide +.PP +.SH "SYNOPSIS" +.PP +\fBfmtutil\fP [ \fIOPTION\fP\&.\&.\&. ] \fICOMMAND\fP +.PP +\fBfmtutil-sys\fP [ \fIOPTION\fP\&.\&.\&. ] \fICOMMAND\fP +.PP +.SH "DESCRIPTION" +.PP +\fBfmtutil\fP is used to create or recreate format and hyphenation +files or show information about format files\&. +.PP +\fICOMMAND\fP is one of: +.PP +.IP "\fB--all\fP" +recreate all format files +.IP "\fB--byfmt\fP \fIformatname\fP" +(re)create the format for +format \fIformatname\fP +.IP "\fB--byhyphen\fP \fIhyphenfile\fP" +(re)create formats that +depend on the hyphenation file +\fIhyphenfile\fP +.IP "\fB--help\fP" +print a summary of commands and options +.IP "\fB--missing\fP" +create any missing format files +.IP "\fB--showhyphen\fP \fIformatname\fP" +print the name of the +hyphenation file for the format +\fIformatname\fP +.PP +.SH "OPTIONS" +.PP +.IP "\fB--cnffile\fP \fIfile\fP" +specify the configuration +\fIfile\fP \fBfmtutil\fP should use +.IP "\fB--dolinks\fP" +(not implemented, just for compatibility) +.IP "\fB--fmtdir\fP \fIdirectory\fP" +set the destination +directory for format files generated by +\fBfmtutil\fP to \fIdirectory\fP +.IP "\fB--force\fP" +(not implemented, just for compatibility) +.IP "\fB--quiet\fP" +(not implemented, just for compatibility) +.IP "\fB--test\fP" +(not implemented, just for compatibility) +.PP +.SH "FILES" +.PP +.IP "\fIfmtutil\&.cnf\fP" +default configuration file +.PP +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.PP +\fBkpsewhich\fP(1) +.PP +Web page: +.PP +.SH "BUGS" +.PP +None known, but report any bugs found to (mailing list)\&. +.PP +.SH "AUTHOR" +.PP +\fBfmtutil\fP was written by Thomas Esser + and is Copyright 1998 Thomas +Esser\&. +.PP +This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly +, for +the Debian GNU/Linux system and later slightly adapted for the teTeX 3 release\&. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fontinst.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fontinst.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b907280d90d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fontinst.1 @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +.TH "fontinst" "1" "May 2000" "teTeX" "teTeX" +.PP +.SH "NAME" +fontinst \- utility to run TeX as fontinst +.PP +.SH "SYNOPSIS" +.PP +\fBfontinst\fP \fIpackage\fP +.PP +.SH "DESCRIPTION" +.PP +\fBfontinst\fP runs \fBtex\fP(1) with the \fB--progname\fP flag set to +pretend to be the program fontinst (affecting Karl Berry paths)\&. +.PP +Typing +.PP +\f(CWfontinst fontinst\&.sty\fP +.PP +will start \fBtex\fP(1) and give the user an interactive prompt +(\f(CW*\fP) where fontinst commands can be typed (such as +\f(CW\elatinfamily{ptm}{}\ebye\fP)\&. +.PP +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.PP +\fBtex\fP(1) +.PP +The fontinst manual, \fIfontinst\&.tex\fP\&. +.PP +Web page: +.PP +.SH "BUGS" +.PP +None known, but report any bugs found to tex-fonts@tug\&.org (mailing list)\&. +.PP +.SH "AUTHOR" +.PP +Thomas Esser + +.PP +This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly +, for +the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions +without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the +manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this +manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/getafm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/getafm.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..33da5ca88ed --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/getafm.1 @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +.TH GETAFM 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" +.SH NAME +getafm \- create an AFM file for a PostScript font. +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B getafm +.I FontName +> +.I output.ps +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Getafm +generates a PostScript file which prints an AFM file for a font to the +printer's output channel. The output of +.I getafm +should be sent to a printer, or to GhostScript. For example, +.sp +.ce +getafm Times-Roman | gsnd - >Times-Roman.afm +.sp +.SH AUTHOR +Robert Joop (rj@rainbow.in-berlin.de), Angus Duggan +.SH "SEE ALSO" +psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1) +.SH TRADEMARKS +.B PostScript +is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. +.SH BUGS +Kerning information is not generated by +.I getafm; +it is best to use original AFM files if possible. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/getnonfreefonts.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/getnonfreefonts.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c7506d616d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/getnonfreefonts.1 @@ -0,0 +1,182 @@ +.TH getnonfreefonts 1 "October 2005" "TeXLive" "TeXLive" +.SH NAME +getnonfreefonts \- download and install fonts which cannot be +distributed on a CD +.LP +getnonfreefonts-sys \- download and install fonts system\-wide which +cannot be distributed on a CD +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B getnonfreefonts +.RI +[options] [font] +.LP +.B getnonfreefonts-sys +.RI +[options] [font] +.SH DESCRIPTION +Some font suppliers provided fonts which can be used freely but they +disallow that money is charged for the distribution. Hence, for +distributions on CD or DVD it is usually impossible to include +these fonts. + +.BI getnonfreefonts +is a script which downloads and installs these fonts. Actually, it +first downloads the program +.BI getfont +from CTAN which is then executed. +.BI getfont +does the real work. It will be updated occasionally to support more +fonts. + +.BI getnonfreefonts +and +.BI getnonfreefonts-sys +are identical except that +.BI getnonfreefonts +installs files to +.RI $TEXMFHOME +while +.BI getnonfreefonts-sys +installs files to +.RI $TEXMFLOCAL +\. + +.BI getfont +will not be installed permanently on your system. It only +exists while +.BI getnonfreefonts +is running. +.BI getnonfreefonts +passes all arguments to +.BI getfont. + +If a font is specified, only this font will be installed, otherwise +all supported fonts will be installed. + +To get a list of supported fonts, run +.BI getnonfreefonts +.BI --lsfonts + +.SH OPTIONS +Only the options evaluated by +.BI getnonfreefonts +are described here. Run +.BI getnonfreefonts +.BI --help +to get a complete list. + +.TP +.B --ctan= +.rg +.B +can be either +.B +de +for ftp://ftp.dante.de (Hamburg, Germany), +.B +uk +for ftp://tex.ac.uk (Cambridge, UK), +or +.B us +for ftp://ctan.tug.org (Colchester, VT, US) + +The default is ftp://tex.ac.uk. + +.TP +.B --afm +.rg +Install AFM files as well. They are not installed by default. You do +not need them if you don't know what they are good for. + +.TP +.B -n, --noinstall +.rg +Do not install anything. Useful to check whether fonts are available +which are not installed yet. + + +.TP +.B --shell +.rg +Run +.BI getnonfreefonts +in a shell. +.BI getfont +can be called directly and will exist on your system until you leave +the shell. If your internet connection is very slow, you can save some time. +Run +.BI getfont --help +first. + + +.TP +.B -h, --help +.rg +Get a complete list of options. This list will be more complete and +more up-to-date than this manual page. + +.SH ENVIRONMENT +If the environt variable +.BI CTAN +is set to +.B ftp:// +then this will be the default. The argument is an URL. + +.BI Example: +If your +.BI ~/.profile +contains the line +.BI CTAN=ftp://ftp.dante.de +then this will be the default. +If you are at a university which mirrors CTAN, you can set +.BI CTAN +to this mirror. It will work only if the mirror has the same +directory structure as CTAN, i.e if the directory +.BI tex-archive +is not omitted. + +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +.B getnonfreefonts --help +.rg +Display all options and a list of supported fonts. Note that the +program +.B getfont +is installed temporarily and executed. You get more information than +this manual page can provide. + +.TP +.B getnonfreefonts +.rg +Install all supported fonts which are not installed yet. + +.TP +.B getnonfreefonts utopia +.rg +Install Adobe Utopia if it is not installed yet. + +.TP +.B getnonfreefonts --force --afm utopia +.rg +Install Adobe Utopia and the corresponding AFM files even if Utopia is +already installed. + +.TP +.B getnonfreefonts --noinstall +.rg +No fonts will be installed. Instead you are told which fonts are +available and which of them are already installed. + +.TP +.B getnonfreefonts --shell +.rg +No fonts are installed. You'll get an interactive shell where you can +invoke +.BI getfont +manually. Run +.B getfont --help +first. + + +.SH BUGS +Please send bug reports to Reinhard Kotucha . diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftodvi.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftodvi.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ae7f4c0e3b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftodvi.1 @@ -0,0 +1,167 @@ +.TH GFTODVI 1 "14 December 1993" "Web2C 7.5.5" +.\"===================================================================== +.if n .ds MF Metafont +.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 +.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP +.if n .ds TX TeX +.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff +.el .ds OX TeX for nroff +.\" the same but obliqued +.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX +.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds BX BibTeX +.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX +.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds LX LaTeX +.\"===================================================================== +.SH NAME +gftodvi \- make proof sheets from generic font files +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B gftodvi +[ +.BI \-overflow-label-offset =real +] +[ +.B \-verbose +] +[ +.I gf_file_name +] +.\"===================================================================== +.SH DESCRIPTION +This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete +documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file +or manual +.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . +.PP +The +.B gftodvi +program converts a generic font +.RI ( gf ) +file output by, for example, +.BR mf (1), +to a device independent (DVI) file (that can then be typeset using the same +software that has already been written for \*(TX). The characters in the +.I gf +file will appear one per page, with labels, titles, and annotations +as specified in Appendix H (Hardcopy Proofs) of +.IR "The \*(MFbook" . +.PP +.B gftodvi +uses other fonts in addition to the main +.I gf +file. +A `gray' font is used to typeset the +pixels that actually make up the character. (We wouldn't +want all the pixels to be simply black, since then labels, +key points, and other information would be lost.) A `title' font +is used for the information at the top of the page. A `label' font +is used for the labels on key points of the figure. A `slant' +font is used to typeset diagonal lines, which +otherwise have to be simulated using horizontal and vertical rules. +The default gray, title, and label fonts are +.IR gray , +.IR cmr8 , +and +.IR cmtt10 , +respectively; there is no default slant font. +.PP +To change the default fonts, you can give +.BR special +commands in your +\*(MF source file, or you can change the fonts online. An online dialog +ensues if you end the +.I gf_file_name +with a `/'. For example, +.br +.ti +2 +gftodvi cmr10.300gf/ +.br +.ti +2 +Special font substitution: grayfont black +.br +.ti +2 +OK; any more? grayfontarea /home/art/don/ +.br +.ti +2 +OK; any more? slantfont /home/fonts/slantimagen6 +.br +.ti +2 +OK; any more? +.br +will use +.I /home/art/don/black +as the `gray' font and +.I /home/fonts/slantimagen6 +as the `slant' font (this name indicates +a font for lines with slope 1/6 at the resolution of an Imagen printer). +.PP +The +.I gf_file_name +on the command line must be complete. (The program prompts +you for it if you don't give it.) Because +the resolution is part of the extension, it would not make +sense to append a default extension as is done with \*(TX or +DVI-reading software. The output file name defaults to the same +root as the +.I gf +file, with the +.I dvi +extension added. For example, the input file +.I cmr10.2602gf +would become +.IR cmr10.dvi . +.\"===================================================================== +.SH OPTIONS +The argument to +.B \-overflow-label-offset +specifies the distance from the right edge of the character +bounding box at which the overflow equations (if any) are typeset. +The value is given in \*(TX points. The default is a little over two +inches. +.PP +Without the +.B \-verbose +option, +.B gftodvi +operates silently. With it, a banner and progress report are printed on +.IR stdout . +.\"===================================================================== +.SH ENVIRONMENT +.B gftodvi +looks for +.I gf_file_name +using the +environment variable GFFONTS. If that is not set, it uses the variable +TEXFONTS. If that is not set, it uses the system default. +.PP +See +.BR tex (1) +for the details of the searching. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH FILES +.TP +.I {gray.tfm,.\|.\|.} +The default fonts. +.TP +.I {gray.mf,.\|.\|.} +The \*(MF sources. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR tex (1), +.BR mf (1). +.br +Donald E. Knuth, +.I "The \*(MFbook" +(Volume C of +.IR "Computers and Typesetting" ), +Addison-Wesley, 1986, ISBN 0-201-13445-4. +.br +Donald E. Knuth et al., +.IR \*(MFware . +.\"===================================================================== +.SH AUTHORS +Donald E. Knuth wrote the program. It was published as part of the +.I \*(MFware +technical report, available from the \*(TX Users Group. +Paul Richards ported it to Unix. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftopk.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftopk.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..38b2d1084d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftopk.1 @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ +.TH GFTOPK 1 "14 December 1993" "Web2C 7.5.5" +.\"===================================================================== +.if n .ds MF Metafont +.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 +.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP +.if n .ds TX TeX +.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff +.el .ds OX TeX for nroff +.\" the same but obliqued +.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX +.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds BX BibTeX +.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX +.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds LX LaTeX +.\"===================================================================== +.SH NAME +gftopk \- convert generic font files to packed font files +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B gftopk +[ +.B \-v +] +.I gf_file_name +[ +.I pk_file_name +] +.\"===================================================================== +.SH DESCRIPTION +This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete +documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file +or manual +.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . +.PP +The +.B gftopk +program converts a generic font file output by, for example, +.BR mf (1), +to a +packed font file for use by DVI-reading programs. Packed +font files +.RI ( pk " files)" +are much smaller than the corresponding +.I gf +files, +so they are generally the font format of choice. +.PP +The +.I gf_file_name +on the command line must be complete. Because +the resolution is part of the extension, it would not make +sense to append a default extension as is done with \*(TX or +DVI-reading software. The +.I pk_file_name +defaults to the same (stripped) name as +.IR gf_file_name , +and it is placed in the current +working directory with the +.I pk +suffix replacing +.IR gf . +For example, the input file +.I cmr10.300gf +would become +.IR cmr10.300pk . +.\"===================================================================== +.SH OPTIONS +Unless the +.B \-v +switch is given, +.B gftopk +operates silently. With +.BR \-v , +the version number of the program and statistics about the +packing are output to +.IR stdout . +.\"===================================================================== +.SH ENVIRONMENT +.B gftopk +looks for +.I gf_file_name +first in the current directory. If it is not present there, it uses the +environment variable GFFONTS. If that is not set, it uses the variable +TEXFONTS. If that is not set, it uses the system default. +.PP +See +.BR tex (1) +for the details of the searching. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR gftype (1), +.BR pktogf (1), +.BR pktype (1). +.br +Donald E. Knuth et al., +.IR \*(MFware . +.\"===================================================================== +.SH AUTHORS +Tomas Rokicki wrote the program. It was published as +part of the +.I \*(MFware +technical report, available from the \*(TX Users Group. +Paul Richards originally ported it to Unix. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftype.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftype.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..41a203badd1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftype.1 @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ +.TH GFTYPE 1 "14 December 1993" "Web2C 7.5.5" +.\"===================================================================== +.if n .ds MF Metafont +.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 +.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP +.if n .ds TX TeX +.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff +.el .ds OX TeX for nroff +.\" the same but obliqued +.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX +.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds BX BibTeX +.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX +.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds LX LaTeX +.\"===================================================================== +.SH NAME +gftype \- translate a generic font file for humans to read +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B gftype +[ +.B \-i +] +[ +.B \-m +] +.I gf_file_name +[ +.I output_file_name +] +.\"===================================================================== +.SH DESCRIPTION +This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete +documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file +or manual +.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . +.PP +The +.B gftype +program +translates a +.I gf +(generic font) file output by, for example, +.BR mf (1), +to a file that humans can read. +It also serves as a +.I gf +file-validating +program (i.e., if +.B gftype +can read it, it's correct) and as an example of a +.IR gf -reading +program for other software that wants to read +.I gf +files. +.PP +The +.I gf_file_name +on the command line must be complete. Because +the resolution is part of the extension, it would not make +sense to append a default extension as is done with \*(TX or +DVI-reading software. If no +.I output_file_name +is specified, the output goes to +.IR stdout . +.\"===================================================================== +.SH OPTIONS +The output file includes +bitmap images of the characters, if +.B \-i +is given on the command line, and a symbolic listing of the +.I gf +commands, if +.B \-m +is specified. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH ENVIRONMENT +.B gftype +looks for +.I gf_file_name +using the +environment variable GFFONTS. If that is not set, it uses the variable +TEXFONTS. If that is not set, it uses the system default. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR dvitype (1), +.BR pktype (1). +.br +Donald E. Knuth et al., +.IR \*(MFware . +.\"===================================================================== +.SH AUTHORS +David Fuchs and Don Knuth wrote the program. It was published as +part of the +.I \*(MFware +technical report, available from the \*(TX Users Group. +Paul Richards originally ported it to Unix. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gsftopk.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gsftopk.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..cbbafa8e609 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gsftopk.1 @@ -0,0 +1,301 @@ +.\" Copyright (c) 1993-1998 Paul Vojta +.\" +.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy +.\" of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to +.\" deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the +.\" rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or +.\" sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is +.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: +.\" +.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in +.\" all copies or substantial portions of the Software. +.\" +.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR +.\" IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, +.\" FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL +.\" PAUL VOJTA BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER +.\" IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN +.\" CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. +.\" + +.\" small and boldface (not all -man's provide it) +.de SB +\&\fB\s-1\&\\$1 \\$2\s0\fR +.. +.TH GSFTOPK 1 "28 November 1998" +.SH NAME +gsftopk \- render a ghostscript font in TeX pk form +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B gsftopk +[\-i \fIpath\fP] +[\-q] +[\-t] +[\-\-debug=\fIn\fP] +[\-\-dosnames] +[\-\-interpreter=\fIpath\fP] +[\-\-mapline=\fIline\fP] +[\-\-mapfile=\fIfile\fP] +[\-\-quiet] +[\-\-test] +[\-\-help] +[\-\-version] +.I font +.I dpi +.SH ARGUMENTS +.IP \fIfont\fP \w'\fIfont\fP'u+2m +Name of the font to be created. +.IP \fIdpi\fP +Desired resolution of the font to be created, in dots per inch. This may +be a real number. +.SH DESCRIPTION +.B gsftopk +is a program which calls up the ghostscript program +.BR gs (1) +to render a given font at a given resolution. It packs the resulting +characters into the +.B pk +file format and writes them to a file whose name is formed from the font +name and the resolution (rounded to the nearest integer). The font may +be in any format acceptable to Ghostscript, including +.RI . pfa , +.RI . pfb , +.RI . gsf , +and +.RI . ttf +files. +.PP +This program should normally be called by a script, such as +.BR mktexpk , +to create fonts on demand. +.PP +.B gsftopk +obtains the character widths from the +.RI . tfm +file, which must exist in the standard search path. It also must be +able to find the font in a map file (such as +.BR psfonts.map ), +formatted as in +.BR dvips (1)), +unless the +.B \-\-mapline +option is used. The set of map files is given by the +.B \-\-mapfile +option, or in the files +.BR config.ps , +.BR $HOME/.dvipsrc , +and +.B config.gsftopk +(as would be used by +.BR "dvips -Pgsftopk" ). +.PP +The following +.B pk +"specials" are added at the end of the output file, to provide an internal +check on the contents of the file: +"\fBjobname=\fP\fIfont\fP", +"\fBmag=1\fP", +"\fBmode=modeless\fP", and +"\fBpixels_per_inch=\fP\fIdpi\fP". +This is in accordance with the TeX Directory Standard (TDS). +.SH OPTIONS +.TP +.B \-\-debug=\fIn\fP +Set the +.B Kpathsea +debug flags according to the integer +.IR n . +.TP +.B \-\-dosnames +Use a name of the form +.IB font .pk +instead of +.IB font . dpi pk\fR.\fP +.TP +.B \-h\fR,\fP \-\-help +Print a brief help synopsis and exit. +.TP +.B \-i \fIpath\fP\fR,\fP \-\-interpreter=\fIpath\fP +Use +.I path +as the Ghostscript interpreter. +.TP +.B \-\-mapfile=\fIfile\fP +Use +.I file +to look for the map information for +.IR font . +This should be the full name of the file (in other words, no path searching +algorithms are applied). +.TP +.B \-\-mapline=\fIline\fP +Use +.I line +instead of looking for an entry in a map file. +The first word of +.I line +must match +.IR font . +.TP +.B \-q\fR,\fP \-\-quiet +Operate quietly; i.e., without writing any messages to the standard output. +.TP +.B \-t\fR,\fP \-\-test +Test run: return zero status if the font can be found in the map file(s), +and nonzero status if it cannot. If this option is specified, then the +.I dpi +argument is optional (since the font will not be generated). +.TP +.B \-v\fR,\fP \-\-version +Print the version number and exit. +.SH ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES +.IP \fBDVIPSRC\fP \w'\fBGSFTOPKHEADERS\fP'u+2m +Name of file to read instead of +.BR $HOME/.dvipsrc . +This should be the full name of the file (in other words, no path searching +algorithms are applied). +.IP \fBGSFTOPKFONTS\fP +See +.SB TFMFONTS. +.IP \fBGSFTOPKHEADERS\fP +See +.SB TEXPSHEADERS. +.IP \fBPSHEADERS\fP +See +.SB TEXPSHEADERS. +.IP \fBTEXCONFIG\fP +Colon-separated list of paths to search for map files. +An extra colon in the list will include the +compiled-in default paths at that point. A double slash will enable recursive +subdirectory searching at that point in the path. +.IP \fBTFMFONTS\fP +Colon-separated list of paths to search for the +.RI . tfm +file associated with the font. Double slashes and extra colons behave as with +.SB TEXCONFIG. +This information may also be supplied by using the environment variables +.SB TFMFONTS +or +.SB GSFTOPKFONTS. +These environment variables are checked in the order +.SB GSFTOPKFONTS, +.SB TFMFONTS, +.SB TFMFONTS; +the first one (if any) having a value is used. +.IP \fBTEXPSHEADERS\fP +Colon-separated list of paths to search for the Ghostscript driver file +.B render.ps +and for any PostScript header or font files +.RI (. enc , +.RI . pfa , +.RI . pfb , +.RI . gsf , +or +.RI . ttf +files). Double slashes and extra colons behave as with +.SB TEXCONFIG. +This information may also be supplied by using the environment variables +.SB PSHEADERS +or +.SB GSFTOPKHEADERS. +These environment variables are checked in the order +.SB GSFTOPKHEADERS, +.SB TEXPSHEADERS, +.SB PSHEADERS; +the first one (if any) having a value is used. +.IP \fBTFMFONTS\fP +See +.SB TFMFONTS. +.SH CONFIGURATION +In order to determine the set of map files to be used and the path for +finding PostScript files, +.B gsftopk +reads, in order, the files +.BR config.ps , +.BR .dvipsrc , +and +.BR config.gsftopk . +The files +.B config.ps +and +.B config.gsftopk +are searched for using the environment variable +.SB TEXCONFIG, +the +.B Kpathsea +configuration file, +or the compiled-in default paths. The file +.B .dvipsrc +is searched for in the user's home directory. +.PP +These files are in the same format as for +.B dvips +(as well as being in the same locations). The entries used by +.B gsftopk +are as follows. +.TP +.RI "H " path +Indicates that the Ghostscript driver file +.B render.ps +and the PostScript header and font files are to be searched for using +.IR path . +.TP +.RI "p " file +Indicates that the list of map files is to be erased and replaced by +.IR file . +.TP +.RI "p +" file +Indicates that +.I file +is to be added to the list of map files. +.PP +All other entries are ignored. +.PP +This is similar to the handling of these options when running +.BR "dvips -Pgsftopk" . +For more details, see the +.B Kpathsea +manual. +.SH BUGS +.B gsftopk +sometimes has trouble with fonts with very complicated characters +(such as the Seal of the University of California). This is because +.B gsftopk +uses the +.B charpath +operator to determine the bounding box of each character. If the character +is too complicated, then old versions of Ghostscript fail, causing +.B gsftopk +to terminate with an error message +.IP +.B "Call to gs stopped by signal 10" +.LP +(The number may vary from system to system; it corresponds to a bus error +or a segmentation fault.) The best way to fix this bug is to install a +current version of ghostscript. As an alternative, +.B gsftopk +can be instructed to use the bounding box provided with the font (if one +exists) instead of finding a bounding box for each character. To do this, +include the string +.IP +.B /usefontbbox true def +.LP +in the font map file; +.IR e.g. , +.IP +.B ucseal """/usefontbbox true def""" +.LP +This will not affect use of the font by +.BR dvips . +.SH SEE ALSO +.BR gs (1), +.BR gftopk (1), +.BR tex (1), +.BR xdvi (1), +.BR dvips (1) +.SH AUTHOR +Written by Paul Vojta. This program was inspired by Karl Berry's +.BR gsrenderfont . +.SH MODIFICATIONS +Modified by Yves Arrouye to use Karl Berry's +.B Kpathsea +library. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gzip.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gzip.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6fa79862bfc --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gzip.1 @@ -0,0 +1,478 @@ +.PU +.TH GZIP 1 local +.SH NAME +gzip, gunzip, zcat \- compress or expand files +.SH SYNOPSIS +.ll +8 +.B gzip +.RB [ " \-acdfhlLnNrtvV19 " ] +.RB [ \-S\ suffix ] +[ +.I "name \&..." +] +.ll -8 +.br +.B gunzip +.RB [ " \-acfhlLnNrtvV " ] +.RB [ \-S\ suffix ] +[ +.I "name \&..." +] +.br +.B zcat +.RB [ " \-fhLV " ] +[ +.I "name \&..." +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Gzip +reduces the size of the named files using Lempel-Ziv coding (LZ77). +Whenever possible, +each file is replaced by one with the extension +.B "\&.gz," +while keeping the same ownership modes, access and modification times. +(The default extension is +.B "\-gz" +for VMS, +.B "z" +for MSDOS, OS/2 FAT, Windows NT FAT and Atari.) +If no files are specified, or if a file name is "-", the standard input is +compressed to the standard output. +.I Gzip +will only attempt to compress regular files. +In particular, it will ignore symbolic links. +.PP +If the compressed file name is too long for its file system, +.I gzip +truncates it. +.I Gzip +attempts to truncate only the parts of the file name longer than 3 characters. +(A part is delimited by dots.) If the name consists of small parts only, +the longest parts are truncated. For example, if file names are limited +to 14 characters, gzip.msdos.exe is compressed to gzi.msd.exe.gz. +Names are not truncated on systems which do not have a limit on file name +length. +.PP +By default, +.I gzip +keeps the original file name and timestamp in the compressed file. These +are used when decompressing the file with the +.B \-N +option. This is useful when the compressed file name was truncated or +when the time stamp was not preserved after a file transfer. +.PP +Compressed files can be restored to their original form using +.I gzip -d +or +.I gunzip +or +.I zcat. +If the original name saved in the compressed file is not suitable for its +file system, a new name is constructed from the original one to make it +legal. +.PP +.I gunzip +takes a list of files on its command line and replaces each +file whose name ends with .gz, -gz, .z, -z, _z or .Z +and which begins with the correct magic number with an uncompressed +file without the original extension. +.I gunzip +also recognizes the special extensions +.B "\&.tgz" +and +.B "\&.taz" +as shorthands for +.B "\&.tar.gz" +and +.B "\&.tar.Z" +respectively. +When compressing, +.I gzip +uses the +.B "\&.tgz" +extension if necessary instead of truncating a file with a +.B "\&.tar" +extension. +.PP +.I gunzip +can currently decompress files created by +.I gzip, zip, compress, compress -H +or +.I pack. +The detection of the input format is automatic. When using +the first two formats, +.I gunzip +checks a 32 bit CRC. For +.I pack, gunzip +checks the uncompressed length. The standard +.I compress +format was not designed to allow consistency checks. However +.I gunzip +is sometimes able to detect a bad .Z file. If you get an error +when uncompressing a .Z file, do not assume that the .Z file is +correct simply because the standard +.I uncompress +does not complain. This generally means that the standard +.I uncompress +does not check its input, and happily generates garbage output. +The SCO compress -H format (lzh compression method) does not include a CRC +but also allows some consistency checks. +.PP +Files created by +.I zip +can be uncompressed by gzip only if they have a single member compressed +with the 'deflation' method. This feature is only intended to help +conversion of tar.zip files to the tar.gz format. To extract zip files +with several members, use +.I unzip +instead of +.I gunzip. +.PP +.I zcat +is identical to +.I gunzip +.B \-c. +(On some systems, +.I zcat +may be installed as +.I gzcat +to preserve the original link to +.I compress.) +.I zcat +uncompresses either a list of files on the command line or its +standard input and writes the uncompressed data on standard output. +.I zcat +will uncompress files that have the correct magic number whether +they have a +.B "\&.gz" +suffix or not. +.PP +.I Gzip +uses the Lempel-Ziv algorithm used in +.I zip +and PKZIP. +The amount of compression obtained depends on the size of the +input and the distribution of common substrings. +Typically, text such as source code or English +is reduced by 60\-70%. +Compression is generally much better than that achieved by +LZW (as used in +.IR compress ), +Huffman coding (as used in +.IR pack ), +or adaptive Huffman coding +.RI ( compact ). +.PP +Compression is always performed, even if the compressed file is +slightly larger than the original. The worst case expansion is +a few bytes for the gzip file header, plus 5 bytes every 32K block, +or an expansion ratio of 0.015% for large files. Note that the actual +number of used disk blocks almost never increases. +.I gzip +preserves the mode, ownership and timestamps of files when compressing +or decompressing. + +.SH OPTIONS +.TP +.B \-a --ascii +Ascii text mode: convert end-of-lines using local conventions. This option +is supported only on some non-Unix systems. For MSDOS, CR LF is converted +to LF when compressing, and LF is converted to CR LF when decompressing. +.TP +.B \-c --stdout --to-stdout +Write output on standard output; keep original files unchanged. +If there are several input files, the output consists of a sequence of +independently compressed members. To obtain better compression, +concatenate all input files before compressing them. +.TP +.B \-d --decompress --uncompress +Decompress. +.TP +.B \-f --force +Force compression or decompression even if the file has multiple links +or the corresponding file already exists, or if the compressed data +is read from or written to a terminal. If the input data is not in +a format recognized by +.I gzip, +and if the option --stdout is also given, copy the input data without change +to the standard ouput: let +.I zcat +behave as +.I cat. +If +.B \-f +is not given, +and when not running in the background, +.I gzip +prompts to verify whether an existing file should be overwritten. +.TP +.B \-h --help +Display a help screen and quit. +.TP +.B \-l --list +For each compressed file, list the following fields: + + compressed size: size of the compressed file + uncompressed size: size of the uncompressed file + ratio: compression ratio (0.0% if unknown) + uncompressed_name: name of the uncompressed file + +The uncompressed size is given as -1 for files not in gzip format, +such as compressed .Z files. To get the uncompressed size for such a file, +you can use: + + zcat file.Z | wc -c + +In combination with the --verbose option, the following fields are also +displayed: + + method: compression method + crc: the 32-bit CRC of the uncompressed data + date & time: time stamp for the uncompressed file + +The compression methods currently supported are deflate, compress, lzh +(SCO compress -H) and pack. The crc is given as ffffffff for a file +not in gzip format. + +With --name, the uncompressed name, date and time are +those stored within the compress file if present. + +With --verbose, the size totals and compression ratio for all files +is also displayed, unless some sizes are unknown. With --quiet, +the title and totals lines are not displayed. +.TP +.B \-L --license +Display the +.I gzip +license and quit. +.TP +.B \-n --no-name +When compressing, do not save the original file name and time stamp by +default. (The original name is always saved if the name had to be +truncated.) When decompressing, do not restore the original file name +if present (remove only the +.I gzip +suffix from the compressed file name) and do not restore the original +time stamp if present (copy it from the compressed file). This option +is the default when decompressing. +.TP +.B \-N --name +When compressing, always save the original file name and time stamp; this +is the default. When decompressing, restore the original file name and +time stamp if present. This option is useful on systems which have +a limit on file name length or when the time stamp has been lost after +a file transfer. +.TP +.B \-q --quiet +Suppress all warnings. +.TP +.B \-r --recursive +Travel the directory structure recursively. If any of the file names +specified on the command line are directories, +.I gzip +will descend into the directory and compress all the files it finds there +(or decompress them in the case of +.I gunzip +). +.TP +.B \-S .suf --suffix .suf +Use suffix .suf instead of .gz. Any suffix can be given, but suffixes +other than .z and .gz should be avoided to avoid confusion when files +are transferred to other systems. A null suffix forces gunzip to try +decompression on all given files regardless of suffix, as in: + + gunzip -S "" * (*.* for MSDOS) + +Previous versions of gzip used +the .z suffix. This was changed to avoid a conflict with +.IR pack "(1)". +.TP +.B \-t --test +Test. Check the compressed file integrity. +.TP +.B \-v --verbose +Verbose. Display the name and percentage reduction for each file compressed +or decompressed. +.TP +.B \-V --version +Version. Display the version number and compilation options then quit. +.TP +.B \-# --fast --best +Regulate the speed of compression using the specified digit +.IR # , +where +.B \-1 +or +.B \-\-fast +indicates the fastest compression method (less compression) +and +.B \-9 +or +.B \-\-best +indicates the slowest compression method (best compression). +The default compression level is +.BR \-6 +(that is, biased towards high compression at expense of speed). +.SH "ADVANCED USAGE" +Multiple compressed files can be concatenated. In this case, +.I gunzip +will extract all members at once. For example: + + gzip -c file1 > foo.gz + gzip -c file2 >> foo.gz + +Then + gunzip -c foo + +is equivalent to + + cat file1 file2 + +In case of damage to one member of a .gz file, other members can +still be recovered (if the damaged member is removed). However, +you can get better compression by compressing all members at once: + + cat file1 file2 | gzip > foo.gz + +compresses better than + + gzip -c file1 file2 > foo.gz + +If you want to recompress concatenated files to get better compression, do: + + gzip -cd old.gz | gzip > new.gz + +If a compressed file consists of several members, the uncompressed +size and CRC reported by the --list option applies to the last member +only. If you need the uncompressed size for all members, you can use: + + gzip -cd file.gz | wc -c + +If you wish to create a single archive file with multiple members so +that members can later be extracted independently, use an archiver +such as tar or zip. GNU tar supports the -z option to invoke gzip +transparently. gzip is designed as a complement to tar, not as a +replacement. +.SH "ENVIRONMENT" +The environment variable +.B GZIP +can hold a set of default options for +.I gzip. +These options are interpreted first and can be overwritten by +explicit command line parameters. For example: + for sh: GZIP="-8v --name"; export GZIP + for csh: setenv GZIP "-8v --name" + for MSDOS: set GZIP=-8v --name + +On Vax/VMS, the name of the environment variable is GZIP_OPT, to +avoid a conflict with the symbol set for invocation of the program. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +znew(1), zcmp(1), zmore(1), zforce(1), gzexe(1), zip(1), unzip(1), compress(1), +pack(1), compact(1) +.SH "DIAGNOSTICS" +Exit status is normally 0; +if an error occurs, exit status is 1. If a warning occurs, exit status is 2. +.PP +Usage: gzip [-cdfhlLnNrtvV19] [-S suffix] [file ...] +.in +8 +Invalid options were specified on the command line. +.in -8 +.IR file : +not in gzip format +.in +8 +The file specified to +.I gunzip +has not been compressed. +.in -8 +.IR file: +Corrupt input. Use zcat to recover some data. +.in +8 +The compressed file has been damaged. The data up to the point of failure +can be recovered using +.in +8 +zcat file > recover +.in -16 +.IR file : +compressed with +.I xx +bits, can only handle +.I yy +bits +.in +8 +.I File +was compressed (using LZW) by a program that could deal with +more +.I bits +than the decompress code on this machine. +Recompress the file with gzip, which compresses better and uses +less memory. +.in -8 +.IR file : +already has .gz suffix -- no change +.in +8 +The file is assumed to be already compressed. +Rename the file and try again. +.in -8 +.I file +already exists; do you wish to overwrite (y or n)? +.in +8 +Respond "y" if you want the output file to be replaced; "n" if not. +.in -8 +gunzip: corrupt input +.in +8 +A SIGSEGV violation was detected which usually means that the input file has +been corrupted. +.in -8 +.I "xx.x%" +.in +8 +Percentage of the input saved by compression. +(Relevant only for +.BR \-v +and +.BR \-l \.) +.in -8 +-- not a regular file or directory: ignored +.in +8 +When the input file is not a regular file or directory, +(e.g. a symbolic link, socket, FIFO, device file), it is +left unaltered. +.in -8 +-- has +.I xx +other links: unchanged +.in +8 +The input file has links; it is left unchanged. See +.IR ln "(1)" +for more information. Use the +.B \-f +flag to force compression of multiply-linked files. +.in -8 +.SH CAVEATS +When writing compressed data to a tape, it is generally necessary to +pad the output with zeroes up to a block boundary. When the data is +read and the whole block is passed to +.I gunzip +for decompression, +.I gunzip +detects that there is extra trailing garbage after the compressed data +and emits a warning by default. You have to use the --quiet option to +suppress the warning. This option can be set in the +.B GZIP +environment variable as in: + for sh: GZIP="-q" tar -xfz --block-compress /dev/rst0 + for csh: (setenv GZIP -q; tar -xfz --block-compr /dev/rst0 + +In the above example, gzip is invoked implicitly by the -z option of +GNU tar. Make sure that the same block size (-b option of tar) is used +for reading and writing compressed data on tapes. (This example +assumes you are using the GNU version of tar.) +.SH BUGS +The --list option reports incorrect sizes if they exceed 2 gigabytes. +The --list option reports sizes as -1 and crc as ffffffff if the +compressed file is on a non seekable media. + +In some rare cases, the --best option gives worse compression than +the default compression level (-6). On some highly redundant files, +.I compress +compresses better than +.I gzip. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/hbf2gf.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/hbf2gf.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f36ae3c7cea --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/hbf2gf.1 @@ -0,0 +1,736 @@ +.\" man page for hbf2gf +. +.TH HBF2GF 1 11-Aug-2005 "CJK Version 4.6.0" +.SH NAME +hbf2gf \- convert a CJK bitmap font into subfonts usable by TeX and Omega. +. +. +.SH SYNOPSIS +.na +.nh +.B hbf2gf +.RB [ -q ] +.IR \%configuration-file [ .cfg ] +.br +.B hbf2gf +'in +\n(.ku +.RB [ -q ] +.RB [ -p ] +.RB [ -g ] +.RB [ -n ] +.I \%subfont-name \%x-resolution +.RI [ \%y-scale \ | \ \%y-resolution ] +.br +.in +.B hbf2gf +.B -t +.RB [ -q ] +.I \%subfont-name +.br +.B "hbf2gf --version" +| +.B --help +.ad +.hy +. +. +. +.\" ==== +.\" ==== macro definitions +.\" ==== +. +.\" here we define \TeX for troff and nroff +.if t .ds TX \fRT\h'-0.1667m'\v'0.20v'E\v'-0.20v'\h'-0.125m'X\fP +.if n .ds TX TeX +. +.\" and here the same for \LaTeX +.if t \{\ +.ie '\*(.T'dvi' \ +.ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.15v'\s-3A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX +.el .ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.22v'\s-2A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.22v'\fP\*(TX +.\} +.if n .ds LX LaTeX +. +.\" \LaTeXe +.\" note that we need \vareps for TeX instead of \eps which can only be +.\" accessed with the \N escape sequence (in the Math Italic font) +.if t \{\ +.ie '\*(.T'dvi' .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\f(MI\N'34'\fP\v'-0.20v' +.el .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\(*e\v'-0.20v' +.\} +.if n .ds LE LaTeX\ 2e +. +.\" a definition for \Delta +.if t .ds DE \(*D +.if n .ds DE Delta_ +. +.\" a typewriter font +.if t \{\ +.de C +\fC\\$1\fP\\$2 +.. +.\} +.if n \{\ +.de C +\\$1\\$2 +.. +.\} +. +.\" an addition to .TP to allow two labels for the same item +.de TQ +.br +.ns +.TP +.. +. +.\" ==== +.\" ==== end of macro definitions +.\" ==== +. +. +. +.SH DESCRIPTION +CJK bitmap fonts can't be directly used with \*(TX +because the number of characters in such fonts exceeds\ 256, the limit of a +\*(TX +font. +Thus it is necessary to split these fonts into subfonts, and this is +exactly what +.B hbf2gf +does. +.PP +As the name says, +.B hbf2gf +uses CJK fonts in a certain format which is called +.B Hanzi Bitmap Font +.RB ( HBF ) +format. +It simply consists of the CJK bitmap file(s) and a text file in a format +very similar to the BDF format of the X\ Window System which describes the +bitmap font files: the encoding, the size, etc. +The produced +.C GF +files can then be converted with +.B gftopk +into standard +.C PK +files. +.PP +.B hbf2gf +can be called in three modes: +. +.PP +.in +2m +.B hbf2gf +.RB [ -q ] +.IR configuration-file [ .cfg ] +.PP +.in +5m +This call normally creates a set of +.C GF +files, one +.C PL +file, and a batch file which must be executed after +.B hbf2gf +has finished. +This script will then call +.B gftopk +to convert all +.C GF +files into +.C PK +files, and it will call +.B pltotf +to convert the +.C PL +file into a +.C TFM +file. +Finally it will copy the +.C TFM +file so that each +.C PK +file has its +.C TFM +file (which are all identical). +.PP +.in +5m +If +.B ofm_file +is set to `yes' in the configuration file, +.C OFM +and +.C OVF +files will be created too. +. +.PP +.in +5m +.B -q +makes +.B hbf2gf +quiet. +.PP +.in +2m +.na +.nh +.B hbf2gf +'in +\n(.ku +.RB [ -q ] +.RB [ -p ] +.RB [ -g ] +.RB [ -n ] +.I \%subfont-name \%x-resolution +.RI [ \%y-scale \ | \ \%y-resolution ] +.ad +.hy +.PP +.in +5m +This mode is intended for use with +.B \%mktexpk +and its derivates. +Only one +.C GF +file together with a +.C PL +file for the given subfont will be computed, taking the horizontal +resolution and a vertical scaling factor (if the value is smaller than\ 10) +resp. the vertical resolution (otherwise) from the command line, ignoring +the +.B nmb_fonts +parameter of the configuration file. +The last two characters (which are interpreted as the subfont number) are +stripped to get the name for the configuration file (which must end with +`\c +.C \&.cfg '). +No job file will be created. +If option +.B -p +is set, no +.C PL +file is created. +If +.B -g +is set, no +.C GF +file is created. +The extension can be controlled with +.BR -n ; +if set, the extension is `\c +.C \&.gf ', +otherwise `\c +.C \&. <\c +.IR resolution >\c +.C gf '. +.B -q +makes +.B hbf2gf +quiet. +. +.PP +.in +2m +.na +.nh +.B hbf2gf +'in +\n(.ku +.B -t +.RB [ -q ] +.I \%subfont-name +.ad +.hy +.PP +.in +5m +This mode is intended for use with scripts like +.BR \%mktexpk ; +it tests whether the specified subfont name leads to an +.B hbf2gf +configuration file. +It returns 0 on success and prints out the name of that configuration file +(provided the +.B -q +switch isn't set). +This test isn't a thorough one; it only removes the last two characters +and checks whether a configuration file with that name exists. +.PP +See the next section for more details about configuration files. +.PP +Specifying the option +.B --version +returns the current version of +.B hbf2gf +and the used file search library (e.g.\ \c +.BR kpathsea ). +Usage information is shown with the +.B --help +parameter. +. +. +.SH "CONFIGURATION FILE" +Here a sample configuration file (\c +.C gsfs14.cfg ) +for a 56\(mu56 Chinese font in GB encoding; note that all information +about the font is in the +.C jfs56.hbf +file. +See the +.B "FILE SEARCHING" +section how HBF fonts and +.B hbf2gf +configuration files are found. +See the +.B AVAILABILITY +section where to get CJK fonts together with its +.C HBF +files: +.PP +.if t \fC +.nf + hbf_header jfs56.hbf + mag_x 1 + threshold 128 + comment jianti fansongti 56x56 pixel font + + design_size 14.4 + + y_offset -13 + + nmb_files -1 + + output_name gsfs14 + + checksum 123456789 + + dpi_x 300 + + pk_files no + tfm_files yes + + coding codingscheme GuoBiao encoded TeX text + + pk_directory $HBF_TARGET/pk/modeless/gb2312/gsfs14/ + tfm_directory $HBF_TARGET/tfm/gb2312/gsfs14/ +.fi +.if t \fP +.PP +A configuration file is a plain text file consisting of keywords and its +arguments. +A keyword must start a line, otherwise the whole line will be ignored. +If the word starting a line is not a keyword, the line will be ignored too. +Empty lines will also be skipped. +The search for keywords is case insensitive; in contrast, the arguments will +be taken exactly as given (except `yes' and `no' which can be written with +uppercase or lowercase letters). +Each keyword has one argument which must be separated by whitespace (blanks +or tabs) from the keyword and must be on the same line. +Each line must not be longer than 256 characters. +.PP +You can use environment variables in the configuration file. +The escape character starting an environment variable in the configuration +file is always `\c +.C $ ', +even for operating systems like DOS which has other conventions. +.B hbf2gf +recognizes only environment variable names which start with a letter or an +underscore, followed by alphanumeric characters or underscores. +You can surround the variable with braces to indicate where the variable +name ends, for example +.C ${FOO} . +To get a dollar sign you must write `\c +.C $$ '. +The expansion of environment variables in hbf2gf itself (without the help of +either kpathsea, emtexdir, or MiKTeX searching routines) is very limited; +this feature has been carried over from previous versions. +It can't expand variables set in texmf.cnf; it also can't handle more than +one directory as the variable's value. +.B Don't use it except for the `pk_directory' and `tfm_directory' +.B parameters! +.PP +This is the list of all necessary keywords: +.TP +.B hbf_header +The HBF header file name of the input font(s). +.B hbf2gf +uses the given searching mechanism (kpathsea, emtexdir, or MiKTeX) to locate +this file. +.TP +.B output_name +The name stem of the output files. +A running two digit decimal number starting with `\c +.C 01 ' +will be appended. +For Unicode fonts see the keyword +.B unicode +below. +This value is in almost all cases identical to the name of the configuration +file. +.PP +And now all optional keywords: +.TP +.B x_offset +Increases the character width. +Will be applied on both sides; default for non-rotated glyphs is the value +given in the HBF header +.RB ( HBF_BITMAP_BOUNDING_BOX ) +scaled to +.B design_size +(in pixels). +.TP +.B y_offset +Shifts all characters up or down; default for non-rotated glyphs is the value +given in the HBF header +.RB ( HBF_BITMAP_BOUNDING_BOX ) +scaled to +.B design_size +(in pixels). +.TP +.B design_size +The design size (in points) of the font. +.B x_offset +and +.B y_offset +refer to this size. +Default is\ 10.0. +.TP +.B slant +The slant of the font (given as \*(DEx\ /\ \*(DEy). +Only values in the range 0\ \(<=\ \fBslant\fP\ \(<=\ 1 are allowed. +Default is\ 0.0. +.TP +.B rotation +If set to `yes', all glyphs will be rotated 90\ degrees counter-clockwise. +The default offsets as given in the HBF header will be ignored (and set +to\ 0). +Default is `no'. +.TP +.B mag_x +.TQ +.B mag_y +Scaling values of the characters to reach design size. +If only one magnification is given, x and y values are assumed to be equal. +Default is \fBmag_x\fP\ =\ \fBmag_y\fP\ =\ 1.0. +.PP +.TP +.B threshold +A value between 1 and\ 254 defining a threshold for converting the internal +graymap into the output bitmap; lower values cut more pixels. +Default value is\ 128. +.PP +.TP +.B comment +A comment describing the font; default is none. +.PP +.TP +.B nmb_fonts +The number of subfonts to create. +Default value is -1 for creating all fonts. +.TP +.B unicode +If `yes', a two digit hexadecimal number will be used as a running number, +starting with the value of the first byte of the first code range. +Default is `no'. +.TP +.B min_char +The minimum value of the encoding. +You should set this value to get correct subfile offsets if it is not +identical to the lowest character code in the HBF file. +.PP +.TP +.B dpi_x +.TQ +.B dpi_y +The horizontal and vertical resolution (in dpi) of the printer. +If only one resolution is given, x and y values are assumed to be equal. +Default is\ 300. +.TP +.B checksum +A checksum to identify the +.C GF +files with the appropriate +.C TFM +files. +The default value of this unsigned 32bit integer is\ 0. +.TP +.B coding +A comment describing the coding scheme; default is none. +.PP +.TP +.B pk_directory +The destination directory of the +.C PK +files; default: none. +Attention! +The batch file will not check whether this directory exists. +.TP +.B tfm_directory +The destination directory of the +.C TFM +files; default: none. +Attention! +The batch file will not check whether this directory exists. +.TP +.B pk_files +Whether to create +.C PK +files or not; default is `yes'. +.TP +.B tfm_files +Whether to create +.C TFM +files or not; default is `yes'. +.TP +.B ofm_file +Whether to create an +.C OPL +file or not; default is `no'. +The batch file will then use +.B ovp2ovf +of the Omega distribution to convert it into an +.C OFM +and an +.C OVF +file. +The +.C OPL +file simply maps all subfonts back to a single Omega font. +.TP +.B long_extension +If `yes', +.C PK +files will include the resolution in the extension (e.g. +.C gsso1201.300pk ). +This affects the batch file only (default is `yes'). +.TP +.B rm_command +The shell command to remove files; default: `rm'. +.TP +.B cp_command +The shell command to copy files; default: `cp'. +.TP +.B job_extension +The extension of the batch file which calls +.B gftopk +and +.B pltotf +to convert the +.C GF +and the +.C PL +files into +.C PK +and +.C TFM +files respectively; default is none. +. +. +.SH "FILE SEARCHING" +.B hbf2gf +uses either the +.BR kpathsea , +.BR emtexdir , +or +.B MiKTeX +library for searching files +.RB ( emtexdir +will work only on operating systems which have an MS-DOSish background, +i.e., MS-DOS, OS/2, Windows; +.B MiKTeX +is for Win32 systems). +. +.SS kpathsea +Please note that older versions of +.B kpathsea +(<3.2) have no special means to seach for program related files. +Additionally, versions older than 3.3 have no default path for miscellaneous +fonts, thus we use the paths for PostScript related stuff if necessary for +fonts resp. configuration files. +The actual version of kpathsea is displayed on screen if you call +.B hbf2gf +.BR --version . +.PP +Here is a table of the file type and the corresponding +.B kpathsea +variables. +.PP +Version\ 3.3 and newer (this won't change again in the future!): +.PP +.in +4m +.ta 2i +.br +.C "\&.hbf MISCFONTS" +.br +.C "\&.cfg HBF2GFINPUTS" +.PP +Version\ 3.2: +.PP +.in +4m +.ta 2i +.br +.C "\&.hbf T1FONTS" +.br +.C "\&.cfg HBF2GFINPUTS" +.PP +And here the same for pre-3.2-versions of +.B kpathsea: +.PP +.in +4m +.ta 2i +.br +.C "\&.hbf T1FONTS" +.br +.C "\&.cfg TEXCONFIG" +.PP +Finally, the same for versions\ \(<=2.6: +.PP +.in +4m +.ta 2i +.br +.C "\&.hbf DVIPSHEADERS" +.br +.C "\&.cfg TEXCONFIG" +.PP +Please consult the info files of +.B kpathsea +for details on these variables. +The decision which naming scheme to use for variables will be done during +compilation. +.PP +You should set the +.C TEXMFCNF +variable to the directory where your +.C texmf.cnf +configuration file resides. +.PP +Here is the proper command to find out to which value a +.B kpathsea +variable is set (we use +.C MISCFONTS +as an example). +This is especially useful if a variable isn't set in +.C texmf.cnf +or in the environment, thus pointing to the default value which is +hard-coded into the +.B kpathsea +library. +.PP +.in +2m +.C "kpsewhich -progname=hbf2gf -expand-var='$MISCFONTS'" +.PP +We select the program name also since it is possible to specify +variables which are searched only for a certain program -- in our +example it would be +.C MISCFONTS.hbf2gf . +.PP +A similar but not identical method is to say +.PP +.in +2m +.C "kpsewhich -progname=hbf2gf -show-path='misc fonts'" +.PP +[A full list of format types can be obtained by saying `\c +.C "kpsewhich --help" ' +on the command line prompt.] +This is exactly the how +.B hbf2gf +searches for files; the disadvantage is that all variables are expanded +which can cause very long strings. +. +.SS emtexdir +.PP +Here the list of suffixes and its related environment variables to be set in +.C autoexec.bat +(resp. in +.C config.sys +for OS/2): +.PP +.in +4m +.ta 2i +.br +.C "\&.hbf HBFONTS" +.br +.C "\&.cfg HBFCFG" +.PP +If one of the variables isn't set, a warning message is emitted. +The current directory will always be searched. +As usual, one exclamation mark appended to a directory path causes +subdirectories one level deep to be searched, two exclamation marks causes +all subdirectories to be searched. +Example: +.PP +.in +2m +.C HBFONTS=c:\\\\fonts\\\\hbf!!;d:\\\\myfonts\\\\hbf! +.PP +Constructions like `\c +.C c:\\\\fonts!!\\\\hbf ' +aren't possible. +. +.SS MikTeX +.PP +Please consult the documentation files of +.B MiKTeX +for more details. +. +. +.SH LIMITATIONS +The x and y output size must not exceed +.BR MAX_CHAR_SIZE , +which is defined at compile time; its default value is 1023\ (pixel). +. +. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR ttf2pk (1) +.PP +.C hbf2gf.w : +'in +\n(.ku +this is the source code written in +.B CWEB +which can be converted into a pretty-printed \*(TX +document using +.BR cweave . +The CJK package also contains a preformatted +.C hbf2gf.dvi +file. +.PP +the +.B CJK +documentation files (\c +.C hbf2gf.txt ). +.PP +the +.B Hanzi Bitmap File +.RB ( HBF ) +standard version\ 1.3; available at +.C ftp.ifcss.org +.PP +the Omega documentation available at +.C ftp.ens.fr +and the CTAN hosts and mirrors. +. +. +.SH FILES +.TP +.C *.cfg +The +.B hbf2gf +configuration scripts +.TP +.C *.hbf +HBF header files which describe fixed-width bitmap fonts. +Note that the bitmap font name(s) themselves as specified in the header files +are irrelevant for +.BR hbf2gf . +. +. +.SH AVAILABILITY +.B hbf2gf +is part of the CJK macro package for \*(LE +available at the CTAN hosts and its mirrors. +.PP +CJK fonts together with HBF header files can be found at +.C ftp.ifcss.org +and its mirrors. +. +. +.SH AUTHORS +Werner Lemberg +.C +.br +Ross Paterson (the HBF API) +.C diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/includeres.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/includeres.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..eb1eb04f27a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/includeres.1 @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +.TH INCLUDERES 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" +.SH NAME +includeres \- filter to include resources in a PostScript document +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B includeres +< +.I document.ps +> +.I output.ps +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Includeres +includes resources (fonts, procsets, patterns, files, etc) in place of +.I %%IncludeResource +comments in a PostScript document. The resources are searched for in the +current directory and the system default directory under the resource name, +and with an appropriate extension. +The pipeline +.sp +.ce +extractres file.ps | includeres >out.ps +.sp +will move all resources appearing in a document to the document prologue, +removing redundant copies. The output file can then be put through page +re-arrangement filters such as +.I psnup +or +.I pstops +safely. +.SH FILES +.SH AUTHOR +Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 +.SH "SEE ALSO" +psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1) +.SH TRADEMARKS +.B PostScript +is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. +.SH BUGS +.I includeres +does not alter the +.I %%DocumentNeededResources +comments. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/info.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/info.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..39ca1d32ac3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/info.1 @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ +.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.34. +.TH INFO "1" "December 2004" "info 4.8" "User Commands" +.SH NAME +info \- read Info documents +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B info +[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fIMENU-ITEM\fR...] +.SH DESCRIPTION +Read documentation in Info format. +.SH OPTIONS +.TP +\fB\-\-apropos\fR=\fISTRING\fR +look up STRING in all indices of all manuals. +.TP +\fB\-d\fR, \fB\-\-directory\fR=\fIDIR\fR +add DIR to INFOPATH. +.TP +\fB\-\-dribble\fR=\fIFILENAME\fR +remember user keystrokes in FILENAME. +.TP +\fB\-f\fR, \fB\-\-file\fR=\fIFILENAME\fR +specify Info file to visit. +.TP +\fB\-h\fR, \fB\-\-help\fR +display this help and exit. +.TP +\fB\-\-index\-search\fR=\fISTRING\fR +go to node pointed by index entry STRING. +.TP +\fB\-n\fR, \fB\-\-node\fR=\fINODENAME\fR +specify nodes in first visited Info file. +.TP +\fB\-o\fR, \fB\-\-output\fR=\fIFILENAME\fR +output selected nodes to FILENAME. +.TP +\fB\-R\fR, \fB\-\-raw\-escapes\fR +output "raw" ANSI escapes (default). +.TP +\fB\-\-no\-raw\-escapes\fR +output escapes as literal text. +.TP +\fB\-\-restore\fR=\fIFILENAME\fR +read initial keystrokes from FILENAME. +.TP +\fB\-O\fR, \fB\-\-show\-options\fR, \fB\-\-usage\fR +go to command\-line options node. +.TP +\fB\-\-subnodes\fR +recursively output menu items. +.TP +\fB\-w\fR, \fB\-\-where\fR, \fB\-\-location\fR +print physical location of Info file. +.TP +\fB\-\-vi\-keys\fR +use vi\-like and less\-like key bindings. +.TP +\fB\-\-version\fR +display version information and exit. +.PP +The first non\-option argument, if present, is the menu entry to start from; +it is searched for in all `dir' files along INFOPATH. +If it is not present, info merges all `dir' files and shows the result. +Any remaining arguments are treated as the names of menu +items relative to the initial node visited. +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +info +show top\-level dir menu +.TP +info emacs +start at emacs node from top\-level dir +.TP +info emacs buffers +start at buffers node within emacs manual +.TP +info \fB\-\-show\-options\fR emacs +start at node with emacs' command line options +.TP +info \fB\-f\fR ./foo.info +show file ./foo.info, not searching dir +.SH "REPORTING BUGS" +Email bug reports to bug\-texinfo@gnu.org, +general questions and discussion to help\-texinfo@gnu.org. +Texinfo home page: http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ +.SH COPYRIGHT +Copyright \(co 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +There is NO warranty. You may redistribute this software +under the terms of the GNU General Public License. +For more information about these matters, see the files named COPYING. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/infokey.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/infokey.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..fb8f4634f40 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/infokey.1 @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.34. +.TH INFOKEY "1" "December 2004" "infokey 4.8" "User Commands" +.SH NAME +infokey \- compile customizations for Info +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B infokey +[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fIINPUT-FILE\fR] +.SH DESCRIPTION +Compile infokey source file to infokey file. Reads INPUT\-FILE (default +$HOME/.infokey) and writes compiled key file to (by default) $HOME/.info. +.SH OPTIONS +.TP +\fB\-\-output\fR FILE +output to FILE instead of $HOME/.info +.TP +\fB\-\-help\fR +display this help and exit. +.TP +\fB\-\-version\fR +display version information and exit. +.SH "REPORTING BUGS" +Email bug reports to bug\-texinfo@gnu.org, +general questions and discussion to help\-texinfo@gnu.org. +Texinfo home page: http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ +.SH COPYRIGHT +Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +There is NO warranty. You may redistribute this software +under the terms of the GNU General Public License. +For more information about these matters, see the files named COPYING. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +The full documentation for +.B infokey +is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the +.B info +and +.B infokey +programs are properly installed at your site, the command +.IP +.B info infokey +.PP +should give you access to the complete manual. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/install-info.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/install-info.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..004d5d0f97d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/install-info.1 @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ +.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.34. +.TH INSTALL-INFO "1" "December 2004" "install-info 4.8" "User Commands" +.SH NAME +install-info \- update info/dir entries +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B install-info +[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fIINFO-FILE \fR[\fIDIR-FILE\fR]] +.SH DESCRIPTION +Install or delete dir entries from INFO\-FILE in the Info directory file +DIR\-FILE. +.SH OPTIONS +.TP +\fB\-\-delete\fR +delete existing entries for INFO\-FILE from DIR\-FILE; +don't insert any new entries. +.TP +\fB\-\-dir\-file\fR=\fINAME\fR +specify file name of Info directory file. +This is equivalent to using the DIR\-FILE argument. +.TP +\fB\-\-entry\fR=\fITEXT\fR +insert TEXT as an Info directory entry. +TEXT should have the form of an Info menu item line +plus zero or more extra lines starting with whitespace. +If you specify more than one entry, they are all added. +If you don't specify any entries, they are determined +from information in the Info file itself. +.TP +\fB\-\-help\fR +display this help and exit. +.TP +\fB\-\-info\-file\fR=\fIFILE\fR +specify Info file to install in the directory. +This is equivalent to using the INFO\-FILE argument. +.TP +\fB\-\-info\-dir\fR=\fIDIR\fR +same as \fB\-\-dir\-file\fR=\fIDIR\fR/dir. +.TP +\fB\-\-item\fR=\fITEXT\fR +same as \fB\-\-entry\fR TEXT. +An Info directory entry is actually a menu item. +.TP +\fB\-\-quiet\fR +suppress warnings. +.TP +\fB\-\-remove\fR +same as \fB\-\-delete\fR. +.TP +\fB\-\-section\fR=\fISEC\fR +put this file's entries in section SEC of the directory. +If you specify more than one section, all the entries +are added in each of the sections. +If you don't specify any sections, they are determined +from information in the Info file itself. +.TP +\fB\-\-version\fR +display version information and exit. +.SH "REPORTING BUGS" +Email bug reports to bug\-texinfo@gnu.org, +general questions and discussion to help\-texinfo@gnu.org. +Texinfo home page: http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ +.SH COPYRIGHT +Copyright \(co 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +There is NO warranty. You may redistribute this software +under the terms of the GNU General Public License. +For more information about these matters, see the files named COPYING. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +The full documentation for +.B install-info +is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the +.B info +and +.B install-info +programs are properly installed at your site, the command +.IP +.B info install-info +.PP +should give you access to the complete manual. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpseaccess.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpseaccess.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3ef9af6b2aa --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpseaccess.1 @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +.TH KPSEACCESS 1 "4 January 1998" "Kpathsea 3.5.5" +.\"===================================================================== +.if n .ds MP MetaPost +.if t .ds MP MetaPost +.if n .ds MF Metafont +.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 +.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP +.if n .ds TX TeX +.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff +.el .ds OX TeX for nroff +.\" the same but obliqued +.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX +.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds BX BibTeX +.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX +.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds LX LaTeX +.\"===================================================================== +.SH NAME +kpseaccess \- determine whether a file can be accessed +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B kpseaccess +.I [-rwx] +.I file +.\"===================================================================== +.SH DESCRIPTION +Exit successfully if +.I file +can be accessed with the specified mode. +The mode is one or more letters of +.IR rwx , +where +.I r +is for readable, +.I w +is for writable, and +.I x +is for executable. +.PP +The difference between +.B kpseaccess +and +.B test +is that the latter looks at the permission bits, while the former +checks using the +.BR access (2) +system call. This makes a difference when file systems have been +mounted read-only. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH OPTIONS +.B kpseaccess +accepts the following additional options: +.TP +.B --help +.rb +Print help message and exit. +.TP +.B --version +.rb +Print version information and exit. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR access (2) diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsepath.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsepath.1 new file mode 120000 index 00000000000..007e1178459 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsepath.1 @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +kpsetool.1 \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsereadlink.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsereadlink.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3a2e65ea0dc --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsereadlink.1 @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +.TH KPSEREADLINK 1 "4 January 1998" "Kpathsea 3.5.5" +.\"===================================================================== +.SH NAME +kpsereadlink \- print contents of symbolic link +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B kpsereadlink +.I file +.\"===================================================================== +.SH DESCRIPTION +If +.I file +is a symbolic link, print its contents (what it links to), and exit +successfully. Exit with a failure otherwise. +.PP +On systems that do not support symbolic links, +.B kpsereadlink +will always fail. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH OPTIONS +.B kpsereadlink +accepts the following additional options: +.TP +.B --help +.rb +Print help message and exit. +.TP +.B --version +.rb +Print version information and exit. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR readlink (2) diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsestat.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsestat.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5d4c7a2a54c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsestat.1 @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +.TH KPSESTAT 1 "4 January 1998" "Kpathsea 3.5.5" +.\"===================================================================== +.if n .ds MP MetaPost +.if t .ds MP MetaPost +.if n .ds MF Metafont +.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 +.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP +.if n .ds TX TeX +.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff +.el .ds OX TeX for nroff +.\" the same but obliqued +.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX +.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds BX BibTeX +.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX +.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds LX LaTeX +.\"===================================================================== +.SH NAME +kpsestat \- compute octal mode from mode of existing file +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B kpsestat +.I mode +.I file +.\"===================================================================== +.SH DESCRIPTION +.B kpsestat +prints the octal permission of +.I file +modified according to +.I mode +on standard output. The +.I mode +parameter accepts a subset of the symbolic permissions accepted by +.BR chmod (1). +Use +.I = +as the mode to obtain the unchanged permissions. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH OPTIONS +.B kpsestat +accepts the following additional options: +.TP +.B --help +.rb +Print help message and exit. +.TP +.B --version +.rb +Print version information and exit. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR chmod (1). diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsetool.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsetool.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..addd9b08344 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsetool.1 @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ +.TH "kpsetool" "1" "September 2000" "teTeX" "teTeX" +.PP +.SH "NAME" +kpsetool \- script to make teTeX-style \fBkpsetool\fP, +\fBkpsexpand\fP, and \fBkpsepath\fP available +.PP +.SH "SYNOPSIS" +.PP +\fBkpsetool \fP [ \fIOPTIONS\fP\&.\&.\&. ] \fICOMMAND\fP +.PP +\fBkpsexpand\fP [ \fIOPTIONS\fP\&.\&.\&. ] \fISTRING\fP +.PP +\fBkpsepath\fP [ \fIOPTIONS\fP\&.\&.\&. ] \fIPATHTYPE\fP +.PP +.SH "DESCRIPTION" +.PP +\fBkpsetool\fP is a Bourne shell script that makes a teTeX-style +\fBkpsetool\fP, \fBkpsexpand\fP, and \fBkpsepath\fP available\&. +\fBkpsetool\fP uses \fBweb2c\fP\'s (new) \fBkpsexpand\fP binary, so the +syntax for \fBkpsexpand\fP is incompatible with teTeX\'s as of version +0\&.4\&. +.PP +.SH "OPTIONS" +.PP +.IP "\fB-m\fP \fImode\fP" +set Metafont mode +.IP "\fB-n\fP \fIprogname\fP" +pretend to be \fIprogname\fP to kpathsea +.IP "\fB-p\fP" +act like \fBkpsepath\fP(1) +.IP "\fB-v\fP" +act like \fBkpsexpand\fP(1) +.IP "\fB-w\fP" +act like \fBkpsewhich\fP(1) +.PP +.SH "USAGE" +.PP +\fIPATHTYPE\fP can be +.PP +.IP "\fBbase\fP" +Metafont memory dump +.IP "\fBbib\fP" +BibTeX bibliography source +.IP "\fBbst\fP" +BibTeX style files +.IP "\fBcnf\fP" +Kpathsea runtime configuration files +.IP "\fBdvips_config\fP" +dvips config files +.IP "\fBdvips_header\fP" +dvips header files +.IP "\fBfmt\fP" +TeX memory dump +.IP "\fBgf\fP" +generic font bitmap +.IP "\fBmem\fP" +MetaPost memory dump +.IP "\fBmf\fP" +Metafont source +.IP "\fBmfpool\fP" +Metafont program strings +.IP "\fBmp\fP" +MetaPost source +.IP "\fBmppool\fP" +MetaPost program strings +.IP "\fBmpsupport\fP" +MetaPost support files +.IP "\fBpict\fP" +Other kinds of figures +.IP "\fBpk\fP" +packed bitmap font +.IP "\fBtex\fP" +TeX source +.IP "\fBtexpool\fP" +TeX program strings +.IP "\fBtfm\fP" +TeX font metrics +.IP "\fBtroff_font\fP" +troff fonts +.IP "\fBvf\fP" +virtual font +.PP +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.PP +\fBkpsewhich\fP(1) +.PP +\fIKpathsea: A library for path searching\fP (info or DVI file) +.PP +Web page: +.PP +.SH "BUGS" +.PP +None known, but report any bugs found to (mailing list)\&. +.PP +.SH "AUTHOR" +.PP +\fBkpsetool\fP was written by Thomas Esser + in March, 1997\&. \fBkpsetool\fP +is in the public domain\&. +.PP +This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly +, for +the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions +without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the +manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this +manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhere.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhere.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..76700ed33fe --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhere.1 @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +.TH "kpsewhere" "1" "March 2004" "teTeX" "teTeX" +.PP +.SH "NAME" +kpsewhere \- Expanding \fBkpsewhich\fP to separately iterate over each +texmf tree listed in $TEXMF. +.PP +.SH "SYNOPSIS" +.PP +\fBkpsewhere \fP [ \fIkpsewhich-OPTIONS\fP\&.\&.\&. ] \fICOMMAND\fP +.PP +.SH "DESCRIPTION" +.PP +\fBkpsewhere\fP is an extension to \fBkpsewhich\fP (as \fBwhere\fP is +for \fBwhich\fP in tcsh). The intention is to provide a way to check +for conflicts/shadowed files. It will, however, only find \fBone\fP +file per TEXMF tree. +.PP +.SH "OPTIONS" +.PP +.IP "\fB-h|--help\fP" +show a short help message +.IP "\fB\&*\fP" +all other options are directly handed to kpsewhich +.PP +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.PP +\fBkpsewhich\fP(1) +.PP +\fIKpathsea: A library for path searching\fP (info or DVI file) +.PP +Web page: +.PP +.SH "BUGS" +.PP +None known, but report any bugs found to (mailing list)\&. +.PP +.SH "AUTHOR" +.PP +\fBkpsewhere\fP was written by Hans Fredrik Nordhaug +, additions by +Thomas Esser +, in 2003 and 2004\&. \fBkpsewhere\fP +is in the public domain\&. +.PP +This manual page was written by Frank Küster , +for the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It is also in the public domain +and may be used and changed by others without contacting the author\&. +Any mistakes or omissions in the manual page are my fault; inquiries +about or corrections to this manual page should be directed to me (and +not to the primary author)\&. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhich.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhich.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..86ac0357676 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhich.1 @@ -0,0 +1,160 @@ +.TH KPSEWHICH 1 "4 January 1998" "Kpathsea 3.5.5" +.\"===================================================================== +.if n .ds MP MetaPost +.if t .ds MP MetaPost +.if n .ds MF Metafont +.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 +.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP +.if n .ds TX TeX +.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff +.el .ds OX TeX for nroff +.\" the same but obliqued +.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX +.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds BX BibTeX +.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX +.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds LX LaTeX +.\"===================================================================== +.SH NAME +kpsewhich \- standalone path lookup and and expansion for kpathsea +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B kpsewhich +.RI [ options ] +.RI [ filenames ] +.\"===================================================================== +.SH DESCRIPTION +This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete +documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file +or manual +.IR "Kpathsea: A library for path searching" . +.PP +.B kpsewhich +is used as a standalone front-end of the kpathsea library that can be +used to examine variables and find files. When the +.B -format +option is not given, the search path used when looking for a file is +inferred from the name given, by looking for a known extension. If +no known extension is found, the search path for \*(TX source files is +used. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH OPTIONS +.B kpsewhich +accepts the following options: +.TP +.BI -debug \ num +.rb +Set debugging flags. +.TP +.BI -D \ num +.rb +Use a base resolution of +.IR num ; +the default, set by the installer, is typically 600. +.TP +.BI -dpi \ num +As +.BR -D. +.TP +.BI -engine \ string +.rb +Set +.I $engine +in the environment, which is used in some search paths. +.TP +.BI -expand-braces \ string +.rb +Print variable and brace expansion of +.IR string . +.TP +.BI -expand-path \ string +.rb +Print complete path expansion of +.IR string . +.TP +.BI -expand-var \ string +.rb +Print variable expansion of +.IR string . +.TP +.BI -format \ name +.rb +Use file type +.IR name . +See the info manual for a list of valid names, or use the +.B -help +option to print the list. +.TP +.B -help +.rb +Print help message and exit. +.TP +.B -interactive +.rb +Ask for additional filenames to look up. +.TP +.BI -mktex \ fmt +.rb +enable +.RI mktex fmt +generation. +.RI ( fmt =pk/mf/tex/tfm) +.TP +.BI -mode \ string +.rb +Set device name for +.I $MAKETEX_MODE +to +.IR string ; +no default. +.TP +.B -must-exist +.rb +Search the disk as well as ls-R if necessary. +.TP +.BI -no-mktex \ fmt +.rb +disable +.RI mktex fmt +generation. +.RI ( fmt =pk/mf/tex/tfm) +.TP +.BI -path \ string +Search in the path +.IR string . +.TP +.BI -progname \ string +.rb +Set program name to +.IR string . +.\" .TP +.\" .BI -separator \ string +.\" .rb +.\" .I string +.\" separates components in +.\" .B -path +.\" output; default is +.\" .I : +.\" on UNIX systems. +.TP +.BI -show-path \ name +.rb +Output search path for file type +.IR name . +See the info manual for a list of valid names, or use the +.B -help +option to print the list. +.TP +.BI -var-value \ variable +.rb +Print the expansion of +.IR variable . +.B -version +.rb +Print version information and exit. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR mktexlsr (1), +.BR mktexmf (1), +.BR mktexpk (1), +.BR mktextfm (1). diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsexpand.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsexpand.1 new file mode 120000 index 00000000000..007e1178459 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsexpand.1 @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +kpsetool.1 \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lacheck.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lacheck.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9679e294e60 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lacheck.1 @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ +.TH "LaCheck" "1" "10/26/05" "Release 1.26" +.SH NAME +lacheck - A consistency checker for LaTeX documents. +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B lacheck +.I filename +[ +.I .tex +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +LaCheck is a general purpose consistency checker for LaTeX documents. +It reads a LaTeX document and displays warning messages, if it finds +bad sequences. It should be noted, that the badness is +.I very +subjective. LaCheck is designed to help find common mistakes in LaTeX +documents, especially those made by beginners. +.LP +The things checked are: +.LP +Mismatched groups (braces), environments and math mode +delimiters. When a mismatch is found, line numbers for +.I "both" +start and end of the mismatch is given. The error messages comes in +pairs, one for the end match and one for the beginning, marked with +\`<-\' and \`->\' respectively. +.LP +Bad spacing including missing a \`\\ \' after an abbreviation, missing +an \`\\@\' before a punctuation mark in a paragraph that is ended by +an capital letter, double spaces like \` \~\', bad usage of ellipsis +(like using ... instead of \\ldots, or using \\ldots where \\cdots +should be used), missing \~ before a \\cite or \\ref commands, space +before footnotes, italic corrections before comma, point, or italic +text, italic correction after normal text, missing italic correction +when switching from italic to normal text, and double italic +correction. +.LP +Badly placed punctuation marks around end of math mode +delimiters. This is, punctuation placed right after display math end +or punctuation placed right before text math end. Sequences of +whitespace followed by punctuation marks are also caught. +.LP +Bad use of quotation characters, i.e. constructs like "\'word" or +"word\`" are warned about, tabs in verbatim environments are caught, +certain TeX primitives are frowned upon, attempts to give font +specifiers arguments such as \\em{text} are noted, and use of @ in +LaTeX macros are reported. +.LP +LaCheck will read files that are input using \\input or \\include. +Files with suffix \`.sty\' are omitted, as they probably will cause +LaCheck to crash. +.LP +LaCheck may be invoked from within Emacs(1) using compile: + +To run: +.B "M-x compile RET lacheck RET" +, and then +.B "C-x `" +to parse the messages + +.SH OUTPUT +The output is UNIX-error like, and may be parsed using Emacs(1) +compile mode. Here is a sample: + +.PD 0 +lacheck compiler +.TP +"/usr/mef/compiler.tex", line 34: missing \`\\\\\\\\ \' after "etc." +.TP +"/usr/mef/compiler.tex", line 179: double space at " ~" +.TP +"/usr/mef/compiler.tex", line 186: <- unmatched "}" +.TP +"/usr/mef/compiler.tex", line 181: -> unmatched "$$" +.PD 1 +.LP +A control space \`\\ \' should be inserted at line 34, to prevent an +end-of-sentence space. +Also, at line 179, the first space of the sequence " ~" should +probably be deleted. +The last two lines is an example, where the user mistyped, and +probably inserted an extra "}" somewhere. + +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +Some special cases should be explained. In cases where a sentence ends +with something that LaCheck thinks is an abbreviation an missing \`\\ +\' error may also occur, if the following sentence begins with a +lowercase letter. +.LP +A mismatch error may cause more to follow, due to the chosen +algorithm. In such cases just correct the +.I "first" +error and run LaCheck again +.LP +Braces, environments and math mode must be balanced within a file. +.LP +LaCheck may be confused by unmatched stuff placed inside verbatim-like +environments called something else than exactly \`verbatim\'. +.SH FILES +lacheck +.SH SEE ALSO +tex(1), emacs(1), latex(1) +.SH BUGS +LaCheck gets confused by advanced macros, is fooled by simple macros, +can't figure out if you use a non-standard way to switch italic on or +off, does not like TeX at all, does not provide any options to turn +off specific warnings, and is at best a crude approximation. +.LP +Ideas for improvements and bug reports are very welcome. Such +should be directed to the maintainers, their email address is +. +.SH AUTHOR +Kresten Krab Thorup with modifications by Per Abrahamsen. + diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lambda.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lambda.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..29d0bbb1c10 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lambda.1 @@ -0,0 +1,292 @@ +.TH OMEGA 1 "27 December 1997" "Web2C 7.5.5" +.\"===================================================================== +.if n .ds MF Metafont +.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 +.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP +.if n .ds TX TeX +.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff +.el .ds OX TeX for nroff +.\" the same but obliqued +.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX +.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds BX BibTeX +.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX +.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds LX LaTeX +.if t .ds AX \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds AX AmSTeX +.if t .ds AY \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(LX +.if n .ds AY AmSLaTeX +.\"===================================================================== +.SH NAME +omega, iniomega, viromega \- extended unicode TeX +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B omega +.RI [ options ] +[\fB&\fR \fIformat\fR ] +[ \fIfile\fR | \fB\e\fR \fIcommands\fR ] +.\"===================================================================== +.SH DESCRIPTION +Run the Omega typesetter on +.IR file , +usually creating +.IR file.dvi . +If the file argument has no extension, ".tex" will be appended to it. +Instead of a filename, a set of Omega commands can be given, the first +of which must start with a backslash. +With a +.BI & format +argument Omega uses a different set of precompiled commands, +contained in +.IR format.fmt ; +it is usually better to use the +.B -fmt +.I format +option instead. +.PP +Omega is a version of the \*(TX program modified for multilingual +typesetting. It uses unicode, and has additional primitives for +(among other things) bidirectional typesetting. +.PP +The +.B iniomega +and +.B viromega +commands are Omega's analogues to the +.B initex +and +.B virtex +commands. In this installation, they are symlinks to the +.B omega +executable. +.PP +Omega's command line options are similar to those of \*(TX. +.PP +Omega is experimental software. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH OPTIONS +This version of Omega understands the following command line options. +.TP +.BI --oft \ format +.rb +Use +.I format +as the name of the format to be used, instead of the name by which +Omega was called or a +.I %& +line. +.TP +.B -halt-on-error +.rb +Exit with an error code when an error is encountered during processing. +.TP +.B --help +.rb +Print help message and exit. +.TP +.B --ini +.rb +Be +.BR iniomega , +for dumping formats; this is implicitly true if the program is called +as +.BR iniomega . +.TP +.BI --interaction \ mode +.rb +Sets the interaction mode. The mode can be one of +.IR batchmode , +.IR nonstopmode , +.IR scrollmode , +and +.IR errorstopmode . +The meaning of these modes is the same as that of the corresponding +\ecommands. +.TP +.B --ipc +.rb +Send DVI output to a socket as well as the usual output file. Whether +this option is available is the choice of the installer. +.TP +.B --ipc-start +.rb +As +.BR --ipc , +and starts the server at the other end as well. Whether this option +is available is the choice of the installer. +.TP +.BI --kpathsea-debug \ bitmask +.rb +Sets path searching debugging flags according to the bitmask. See the +.I Kpathsea +manual for details. +.TP +.BI --maketex \ fmt +.rb +Enable +.RI mktex fmt , +where +.I fmt +must be one of +.I tex +or +.IR tfm . +.TP +.BI --no-maketex \ fmt +.rb +Disable +.RI mktex fmt , +where +.I fmt +must be one of +.I tex +or +.IR tfm . +.TP +.BI --output-comment \ string +.rb +Use +.I string +for the DVI file comment instead of the date. +.TP +.BI -output-directory \ directory +.rb Write output files in +.I directory +instead of the current directory. Look up input files in +.I directory +first, the along the normal search path. +.TP +.B --parse-first-line +.rb +If the first line of the main input file begins with +.I %& +parse it to look for a dump name. +.TP +.BI --progname \ name +.rb +Pretend to be program +.IR name . +This affects both the format used and the search paths. +.TP +.B --recorder +.rb +Enable the filename recorder. This leaves a trace of the files opened +for input and output in a file with extension +.IR .ofl . +(This option is always on.) +.TP +.B --shell-escape +.rb +Enable the +.BI \ewrite18{ command } +construct. The +.I command +can be any Bourne shell command. This construct is normally +disallowed for security reasons. +.TP +.B --version +.rb +Print version information and exit. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH ENVIRONMENT +See the Kpathsearch library documentation (the `Path specifications' +node) for precise details of how the environment variables are used. +The +.B kpsewhich +utility can be used to query the values of the variables. +.PP +One caveat: In most Omega formats, you cannot use ~ in a filename you +give directly to Omega, because ~ is an active character, and hence is +expanded, not taken as part of the filename. Other programs, such as +\*(MF, do not have this problem. +.PP +.TP +TEXMFOUTPUT +Normally, Omega puts its output files in the current directory. If +any output file cannot be opened there, it tries to open it in the +directory specified in the environment variable TEXMFOUTPUT. +There is no default value for that variable. For example, if you say +.I tex paper +and the current directory is not writable, if TEXMFOUTPUT has +the value +.IR /tmp , +Omega attempts to create +.I /tmp/paper.log +(and +.IR /tmp/paper.dvi , +if any output is produced.) +.TP +TEXINPUTS +Search path for +.I \einput +and +.I \eopenin +files. +This should probably start with ``.'', so +that user files are found before system files. An empty path +component will be replaced with the paths defined in the +.I texmf.cnf +file. For example, set TEXINPUTS to ".:/home/usr/tex:" to prepend the +current direcory and ``/home/user/tex'' to the standard search path. +.TP +TEXEDIT +Command template for switching to editor. The default, usually +.BR vi , +is set when Omega is compiled. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH FILES +The location of the files mentioned below varies from system to +system. Use the +.B kpsewhich +utility to find their locations. +.TP +.I omega.pool +Encoded text of Omega's messages. +.TP +.I *.oft +Predigested Omega format (.\|oft) files. +.br +.\"===================================================================== +.SH NOTES +This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete +documentation for this version of Omega can be found in the info +manual +.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . +.\"===================================================================== +.SH BUGS +This version of Omega implements a number of optional extensions. +In fact, many of these extensions conflict to a greater or lesser +extent with the definition of Omega. When such extensions are +enabled, the banner printed when Omega starts is changed to print +.B Omegak +instead of +.BR Omega . +.PP +This version of Omega fails to trap arithmetic overflow when +dimensions are added or subtracted. Cases where this occurs are rare, +but when it does the generated +.I DVI +file will be invalid. +.PP +The +.I DVI +files produced by Omega may use extensions which make them incompatible +with most software designed to handle +.I DVI +files. In order to print or preview them, you should use +.B odvips +to generate a PostScript file. +.PP +Omega is experimental software, and if you are an active user it is +strongly recommended that you subscribe to the Omega mailing list. +Visit the Omega website +.B http://omega.cse.unsw.edu.au +for information on how to subscribe. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR tex (1), +.BR mf (1), +.RB odvips (1), +.\"===================================================================== +.SH AUTHORS +The primary authors of Omega are John Plaice and Yannis Haralambous. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latex.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..89d63058631 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latex.1 @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +.TH LATEX 1 "29 March 1999" "Web2C 7.5.5" +.\"===================================================================== +.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP +.if n .ds TX TeX +.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP\" for troff +.el .ds OX TeX\" for nroff +.\" the same but obliqued +.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX +.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds BX BibTeX +.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX +.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX +.if n .ds LX LaTeX +.\"===================================================================== +.SH NAME +latex, elatex, lambda, pdflatex \- structured text formatting and typesetting +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B latex +[ first line ] +.\"===================================================================== +.SH DESCRIPTION +This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete +documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file +or manual +.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . +.PP +The \*(LX language is described in the book +.IR "\*(LX \- A Document Preparation System" . +\*(LX is a \*(TX macro package, not a modification to the \*(TX source +program, so all the capabilities described in +.BR tex (1) +are present. +.PP +The \*(LX macros encourage writers to think about the content of their +documents, rather than the form. The ideal, very difficult to realize, is to +have no formatting commands (like ``switch to italic'' or ``skip 2 +picas'') in the document at all; instead, everything is done +by specific markup instructions: ``emphasize'', ``start a section''. +.PP +The primary source of documentation for \*(LX is the \*(LX manual +referenced below, and the local guide in the file +.I local-guide.tex +or +.I local.tex +or some such. +.PP +.B elatex +is the e-\*(TX extended mode version of \*(LX format. +.PP +.B lambda +is the Omega version of the \*(LX format. +.PP +.B pdflatex +is the pdf\*(TX version of the \*(LX format. +.PP +On some systems +.B latex209 +and +.B slitex +are available for compatibility with older versions of \*(LX. These +should not be used for new texts. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR amslatex (1), +.BR amstex (1), +.BR tex (1), +.br +Leslie Lamport, +.IR "\*(LX \- A Document Preparation System" , +Addison-Wesley, 1985, ISBN 0-201-15790-X. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mag.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mag.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8d9f2d4a261 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mag.1 @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +.\" e +.TH MAG 1 UMFT +.de EX +.sp +.in +5 +.nf +.ft CW +.. +.de EE +.in -5 +.ft R +.sp +.fi +.. +.SH NAME +mag \- computes fontsizes and magsteps +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B +mag +[-\fBR\fIdpi\fP\fP] magstep . . . + +.B +mag +[-\fBr\fP] [-\fBR\fP\fIdpi\fP] fontsize . . . + +.SH DESCRIPTION +.EQ +delim $$ +.EN +This tool calculates fontsizes given magsteps. TeXfonts are provided as +true sized fonts or as magnifications. The fontsize of a true sized +font equals the resolution of the printer (ex. 300). The fontsize +of a font magnified $n$ \fImagsteps\fP equals: +.EQ +1.2 sup{n} times 300 +delim off +.EN +rounded to its nearest integer value. Fontnames for TeX fonts normally +consists of the name (\fIcmr\fP), pointsize (\fI10\fP), type (\fIpk\fP) +and fontsize (\fI360\fP), for example: \fIcmr10.360pk\fP. + +.SH EXAMPLES +The result of \fImag -R240 -2 0 0.5 1\fP will be: +.EX +167 240 263 288 +.EE + +The inverse function is computed with the \fI-r\fP option. The result of +\fImag -r -R240 167 240 263 288\fP +will be the fontsteps: +.EX +-2 0 0.5 1 +.EE + +The UNIX shells allow command substitution. One can write: +.EX +mag -r -R240 `mag -R240 -2 0 0.5 1` +.EE + +.SH DATE +18 December, 1989 + +.SH AUTHOR +.nf +Piet Tutelaers +University of Technology Eindhoven + + diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makeindex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makeindex.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1404df6cf74 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makeindex.1 @@ -0,0 +1,1203 @@ +.if t .ds LX L\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\\s-2A\\s+2\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'T\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X +.if n .ds LX LaTeX +.if t .ds TX T\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X +.if n .ds TX TeX +.ds Ts T\s-2RAN\s+2S\s-2CRIPT\s+2 +.if t .ds Uc \fIU\\h'-0.12m'C\\v'0.27m'\\h'-.23m'S\\h'-0.11m'F\\v'-0.27m'\fP +.if n .ds Uc UCSF +.ds Et \\f(boE\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'-0.20v'T\\v'0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'T\\fP +.TH MAKEINDEX 1L "10 December 1991" +.\"===================================================================== +.SH NAME +makeindex \- a general purpose, formatter-independent index processor +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B makeindex +.BR [ \-c ] +.BR [ \-g ] +.BR [ \-i ] +.BR [ \-l ] +.BR [ \-o +.IR ind ] +.BR [ \-p +.IR num ] +.BR [ \-q ] +.BR [ \-r ] +.BR [ \-s +.IR sfile ] +.BR [ \-t +.IR log ] +.BR [ \-L ] +.BR [ \-T ] +.BI [ idx0 +.I idx1 +.IR idx2 .\|.\|.] +.\"===================================================================== +.SH DESCRIPTION +The program +.I makeindex +is a general purpose hierarchical index generator; it accepts one or +more input files (often produced by a text formatter such as \*(TX +.RI ( tex (1L)) +or +.IR troff (1), +sorts the entries, and produces an output file which can be formatted. +The index can have up to three levels (0, 1, and 2) of subitem nesting. +The way in which words are flagged for indexing within the main document +is specific to the formatter used; +.I makeindex +does +.I not +automate the process of selecting these words. As the output index +is hierarchical, +.I makeindex +can be considered complimentary to the +.IR awk (1)-based +.IR make.index (1L) +system of Bentley and Kernighan, which is specific to +.IR troff (1), +generates non-hierarchical indices, and employs a much simpler syntax +for indicating index entries. For illustration of use with +.I troff +and +.IR \*(TX , +see the section \s-2EXAMPLES\s+2 below. +.LP +The formats of the input and output files are +specified in a style file; by default, input is assumed to be a +.I \&.idx +file, as generated by \*(LX. +.LP +Unless specified explicitly, the base name of the first input file +.RI ( idx0 ) +is used to determine the names of other files. For each input file +name specified, a file of that name is sought. If this file is not +found and the file name has no extension, the extension +.I \&.idx +is appended. If no file with this name is found, +.I makeindex +aborts. +.LP +If exactly one input file was given and no explicit style file was +specified using +.BR \-s , +.I makeindex +uses a file with the extension +.I \&.mst +as default style file (when present). +.LP +For important notes on how to select index keywords, see the document +by Lamport cited below. As an issue separate from selecting index +keywords, a systematic mechanism for placing index terms in a document +is suggested in +.IR "Index Preparation and Processing" , +a paper cited below. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH OPTIONS +.TP 10 +.B \-c +Compress intermediate blanks (ignoring leading and trailing blanks and +tabs). By default, blanks in the index key are retained. +.TP 10 +.B \-g +Employ German word ordering in the index, in accord with rules set forth +in DIN 5007. By default, +.I makeindex +employs a word ordering in which precedence is: symbols, numbers, +uppercase letters, lowercase letters. The sequence in German word +ordering is: symbols, lowercase letters, uppercase letters, numbers. +Additionally, this option enables +.I makeindex +to recognize the German \*(TX-commands {"a, "o, "u and "s} as {ae, oe, +ue and ss} during the sorting of the entries. The quote character +must be redefined in a style file (for example, redefine quote +as '+'). If the quote character is not redefined, +.I makeindex +will produce an error message and abort. +.TP 10 +.B \-i +Take input from +.IR stdin . +When this option is specified and +.B \-o +is not, output is written to +.IR stdout . +.TP 10 +.B \-l +Letter ordering; by default, word ordering is used (see +the \s-2ORDERING\s+2 section). +.TP 10 +.BI \-o " ind" +Employ +.I ind +as the output index file. By default, the file name +is created by appending the extension +.I .ind +to the base name of +the first input file +.RI ( idx0 ). +.TP 10 +.BI \-p " num" +Set the starting page number of the output index file to be +.I num +(useful when the index file is to be formatted separately). The +argument +.I num +may be numerical or one of the following: +.RS +.TP 10 +.I any +The starting page is the last source page number plus 1. +.TP +.I odd +The starting page is the first odd page following the last source page +number. +.TP +.I even +The starting page is the first even page following the last source +page number. +.RE +.IP +The last source page is obtained by searching backward in the log file +for the first instance of a number included within paired square +brackets +.RB ( [ .\|.\|. ] ). +If a page number is missing or the log file is not found, no attempt +will be made to set the starting page number. The source log file +name is determined by appending the extension +.I \&.log +to the base name of the first input file +.RI ( idx0 ). +.TP 10 +.B \-q +Quiet mode; send no messages to +.IR stderr . +By default, progress +and error messages are sent to +.I stderr +as well as to the +transcript file. +.TP 10 +.B \-r +Disable implicit page range formation; page ranges must be created by +using explicit range operators; see \s-2SPECIAL EFFECTS\s+2 below. By +default, three or more successive pages are automatically abbreviated +as a range (e.g. 1\(em5). +.TP 10 +.BR \-s " sty" +Employ +.I sty +as the style file (no default). The environment +variable \s-2INDEXSTYLE\s+2 defines the path where the style file +should be found. +.TP 10 +.BR \-t " log" +Employ +.I log +as the transcript file. By default, the file name is +created by appending the extension +.I .ilg +to the base name of the +first input file +.RI ( idx0 ). +.TP 10 +.BR \-L +sort based on locale settings. Not available on all systems. +.TP 10 +.BR \-T +special support for Thai documents. Not available on all systems. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH "STYLE FILE" +The style file informs +.I makeindex +about the format of the +.I \&.idx +input files and the intended format of the final output file; examples +appear below. This file can reside anywhere in the path defined by +the environment variable \s-2INDEXSTYLE\s+2. The style file contains +a list of +.RI < specifier , " attribute" > +pairs. There are two types of specifiers: input and output. +Pairs do not have to appear in any particular order. +A line begun by `%' is a comment. In the following list of +specifiers and arguments, is an arbitrary string delimited by +double quotes (".\|.\|."), is a single letter embraced by +single quotes ('.\|.\|.'), and is a nonnegative integer. +The maximum length of a is 2048. A literal backslash or +quote must be escaped (by a backslash). Anything not specified in the +style file will be assigned a default value, which is shown at the +head of the rightmost column. +.\"---------------------------------------------------------------------- +.SS "INPUT STYLE SPECIFIERS" +.TP 25 +.BR actual " " +\'@\' +.RS +Symbol indicating that the next entry is to appear in the output file. +.RE +.TP +.BR arg_close " " +\'}\' +.RS +Closing delimiter for the index entry argument. +.RE +.TP +.BR arg_open " " +\'{\' +.RS +Opening delimiter for the index entry argument. +.RE +.TP +.BR encap " " +\'|\' +.RS +Symbol indicating that the rest of the argument list +is to be used as the encapsulating command for the page number. +.RE +.TP +.BR escape " " +\'\\\\\' +.RS +Symbol which escapes the following letter, unless its preceding letter +is +.BR escape . +Note: +.B quote +is used to escape the letter which immediately follows it, but if it is +preceded by +.BR escape , +it is treated as a ordinary character. These two symbols +.I must +be distinct. +.RE +.TP +.BR keyword " " +"\\\\indexentry" +.RS +Command which tells +.I makeindex +that its argument is an index entry. +.RE +.TP +.BR level " " +\'!\' +.RS +Delimiter denoting a new level of subitem. +.RE +.TP +.BR quote " " +\'"\' +.RS +Note: +.B quote +is used to escape the letter which immediately follows it, but if it is +preceded by +.BR escape , +it is treated as a ordinary character. These two symbols +.I must +be distinct. +.RE +.TP +.BR range_close " " +\')\' +.RS +Closing delimiter indicating the end of an explicit page range. +.RE +.TP +.BR range_open " " +\'(\' +.RS +Opening delimiter indicating the beginning of an explicit page range. +.RE +.\"--------------------------------------------------------------------- +.SS "OUTPUT STYLE SPECIFIERS" +.TP 25 +.BR preamble " " +"\\\\begin{theindex}\\n" +.RS +Preamble of output file. +.RE +.TP +.BR postamble " " +"\\n\\n\\\\end{theindex}\\n" +.RS +Postamble of output file. +.RE +.TP +.BR setpage_prefix " " +"\\n \\\\setcounter{page}{" +.RS +Prefix of command which sets the starting page number. +.RE +.TP +.BR setpage_suffix " " +"}\\n" +.RS +Suffix of command which sets the starting page number. +.RE +.TP +.BR group_skip " " +"\\n\\n \\\\indexspace\\n" +.RS +Vertical space to be inserted before a new group begins. +.RE +.TP +.BR headings_flag " " +0 +.RS +Flag indicating treatment of new group headers, which are inserted +when before a new group (symbols, numbers, and the 26 letters): +positive values cause an uppercase letter to be inserted between +prefix and suffix, and negative values cause a lowercase letter to be +inserted (default is 0, which produces no header). +.RE +.TP +.BR heading_prefix " " +"" +.RS +Header prefix to be inserted before a new letter begins. +.RE +.TP +.BR symhead_positive " " +"Symbols" +.RS +Heading for symbols to be inserted if +.B headings_flag +is positive. +.RE +.TP +.BR symhead_negative " " +"symbols" +.RS +Heading for symbols to be inserted if +.B headings_flag +is negative. +.RE +.TP +.BR numhead_positive " " +"Numbers" +.RS +Heading for numbers to be inserted if +.B headings_flag +is positive. +.RE +.TP +.BR numhead_negative " " +"numbers" +.RS +Heading for numbers to be inserted if +.B headings_flag +is negative. +.RE +.TP +.BR item_0 " " +"\\n \\\\item " +.RS +Command to be inserted between two primary (level 0) items. +.RE +.TP +.BR item_1 " " +"\\n \\\\subitem " +.RS +Command to be inserted between two secondary (level 1) items. +.RE +.TP +.BR item_2 " " +"\\n \\\\subsubitem " +.RS +Command to be inserted between two level 2 items. +.RE +.TP +.B item_01 " " +"\\n \\\\subitem " +.RS +Command to be inserted between a level 0 item and a level 1 item. +.RE +.TP +.BR item_x1 " " +"\\n \\\\subitem " +.RS +Command to be inserted between a level 0 item and a level 1 item, +where the level 0 item does not have associated page numbers. +.RE +.TP +.BR item_12 " " +"\\n \\\\subsubitem " +.RS +Command to be inserted between a level 1 item and a level 2 item. +.RE +.TP +.BR item_x2 " " +"\\n \\\\subsubitem " +.RS +Command to be inserted between a level 1 item and a level 2 item, +where the level 1 item does not have associated page numbers. +.RE +.TP +.BR delim_0 " " +", " +.RS +Delimiter to be inserted between a level 0 key and its first page number +(default: comma followed by a blank). +.RE +.TP +.BR delim_1 " " +", " +.RS +Delimiter to be inserted between a level 1 key and its first page number +(default: comma followed by a blank). +.RE +.TP +.BR delim_2 " " +", " +.RS +Delimiter to be inserted between a level 2 key and its first page number +(default: comma followed by a blank). +.RE +.TP +.BR delim_n " " +", " +.RS +Delimiter to be inserted between two page numbers for the same key +in any level (default: comma followed by a blank). +.RE +.TP +.BR delim_r " " +"--" +.RS +Delimiter to be inserted between the starting and ending page numbers +of a range. +.RE +.TP +.BR delim_t " " +"" +.RS +Delimiter to be inserted at the end of a page list. This delimiter +has no effect on entries which have no associated page list. +.RE +.TP +.BR encap_prefix " " +"\\\\" +.RS +First part of prefix for the command which encapsulates the page number. +.RE +.TP +.BR encap_infix " " +"{" +.RS +Second part of prefix for the command which encapsulates the page +number. +.RE +.TP +.BR encap_suffix " " +"}". +.RS +Suffix for the command which encapsulates the page number. +.RE +.TP +.BR line_max " " +72 +.RS +Maximum length of a line in the output, beyond which a line wraps. +.RE +.TP +.BR indent_space " " +"\\t\\t" +.RS +Space to be inserted in front of a wrapped line (default: two tabs). +.RE +.TP +.BR indent_length " " +16 +.RS +Length of +.B indent_space +(default: 16, equivalent to 2 tabs). +.RE +.TP +.BR suffix_2p " " +"" +.RS +Delimiter to replace the range delimiter and the second page number of +a two page list. When present, it overrides +.BR delim_r . +Example: "f.". +.RE +.TP +.BR suffix_3p " " +"" +.RS +Delimiter to replace the range delimiter and the second page number of +a three page list. When present, it overrides +.B delim_r +and +.BR suffix_mp . +Example: "ff.". +.RE +.TP +.BR suffix_mp " " +"" +.RS +Delimiter to replace the range delimiter and the second page number of +a multiple page list (three or more pages). When present, it overrides +.BR delim_r . +Example: "f.". +.RE +.\"===================================================================== +.SH EXAMPLES +.\"--------------------------------------------------------------------- +.SS "\*(TX EXAMPLE" +The following example shows a style file called +.IR book.ist , +which defines an index for a book which can be formatted independently +of the main source: +.LP +.RS +.nf +\fCpreamble +"\\\\documentstyle[12pt]{book} +\\\\begin{document} +\\\\begin{theindex} +{\\\\small\\n" +postamble +"\\n\\n} +\\\\end{theindex} +\\\\end{document}\\n\fP" +.fi +.RE +.LP +Assuming that a particular book style requires the index (as well as any +chapters) to start from an odd page number, and that the input file is +named +.IR foo.idx , +the following command line produces output in file +.IR footmp.ind : +.LP +.RS +\fCmakeindex \-s book.ist \-o footmp.ind \-p odd foo\fP +.RE +.LP +Here a non-default output file name is used to avoid clobbering the +output for the book itself (presumably +.IR foo.dvi , +which would have been the default name for the index output file!). +.\"--------------------------------------------------------------------- +.SS "TROFF EXAMPLE" +A sample control file for creating an index, which we will assume +resides in the file +.IR sample.ist : +.LP +.RS +.nf +\&\fCkeyword "IX:" +\&preamble +\&".\\\\\\" start of index output +\&\\".\\\\\\" enter two column mode +\&.2C +\&.SH +\&.ce +\&INDEX +\&.XS +\&INDEX +\&.XE +\&.R +\&.ps 9p +\&.vs 11p +\&.sp +\&.de I1 +\&.ti 0.25i +\&.. +\&.de I2 +\&.ti 0.5i +\&.." +\&postamble "\\n.\\\\\\" end of index output" +\&setpage_prefix "\\n.nr % " +\&setpage_suffix "" +\&group_skip "\\n.sp 1.0" +\&headings_flag 1 +\&heading_prefix "\\n.IS\\n" +\&heading_suffix "\\n.IE" +\&item_0 "\\n.br\\n" +\&item_1 "\\n.I1\\n" +\&item_2 "\\n.I2\\n" +\&item_01 "\\n.I1\\n" +\&item_x1 "\\n.I1\\n" +\&item_12 "\\n.I2\\n" +\&item_x2 "\\n.I2\\n" +\&delim_0 ", " +\&delim_1 ", " +\&delim_2 ", " +\&delim_r "-" +\&delim_t "." +\&encap_prefix "\\\\fB" +\&encap_infix "" +\&encap_suffix "\\\\fP" +\&indent_space "" +\&indent_length 0\fP +.fi +.RE +.LP +The local macro package may require modification, as in this example +of an extension to the +.B \-ms +macros (note that at some sites, this macro should +.I replace +a pre-existing macro of the same name): +.LP +.RS +.nf +\fC\&.\" IX - index words to stderr +\&.de IX +\&.ie '\\\\n(.z'' .tm IX: \\\\$1 \\\\$2 \\\\$3 \\\\$4 \\\\$5 \\\\$6 \\\\$7 \\\\$8 \\\\$9 {\\\\n(PN} +\&.el \\\\!.IX \\\\$1 \\\\$2 \\\\$3 \\\\$4 \\\\$5 \\\\$6 \\\\$7 \\\\$8 \\\\$9 {\\\\n(PN} +\&..\fP +.fi +.RE +.LP +(note that the string {\fC\\\\n(PN\fP} is separated from the rest of the +line by a tab. +If your local macro package does not contain this extension, +just include those lines at the beginning of your file. +Here is a simple +.IR troff (1) +input file, which we will assume is named +.IR sample.txt : +.LP +.RS +.nf +\fC\&This is a sample file to test the \\fImakeindex\\fP(1L) +\&program, and see +\&.IX {indexing!programs!C language} +\&.IX {makeindex@\\fImakeindex\\fP(1L)} +\&.bp +\&.rs +\&.IX {Knuth} +\&.IX {typesetting!computer-aided} +\&how well it functions in the \\fItroff\\fP(1) environment.\fP +.fi +.RE +.LP +Note that index entries are indicated by the +.B .IX +macro, which +causes the following text to be written to +.I stdout +along with the +current page number. +.\"--------------------------------------------------------------------- +.SS "CREATING THE INDEX FILE IN THE BOURNE SHELL" +To create an input file for +.IR makeindex , +.B "in the Bourne shell" +environment, do the equivalent at your site of the command: +.LP +.nf +\fCpsroff -ms -Tpsc -t sample.txt > /dev/null 2> sample.tmp\fP +.fi +.LP +Some sites will require +.I ditroff +instead of +.IR psroff . +To filter out any genuine error messages, invoke +.IR grep (1): +.LP +.RS +\fCgrep '^IX: ' sample.tmp > sample.idx\fP +.RE +.\"--------------------------------------------------------------------- +.SS "CREATING THE INDEX FILE USING \*(Uc ENHANCED TROFF/\*(Ts" +With \*(Uc Enhanced troff/\*(Ts, the +.B \-I +option of +.IR psroff (1L) +can produce both formatter output and an index file: +.LP +.RS +\fCpsroff -ms -I sample.inp -Tpsc sample.txt\fP +.RE +.LP +If it is wished to suppress the formatter output: +.RS +.LP +.nf +\fCpsroff -ms -I sample.inp -Tpsc -t sample.txt > /dev/null\fP +.fi +.RE +.\"--------------------------------------------------------------------- +.SS "COMPLETING THE INDEX" +Any of the above procedures leaves the input for +.I makeindex +in +.IR sample.inp . +The next step is to invoke +.IR makeindex : +.LP +.RS +\fCmakeindex -s sample.ist sample.idx\fP +.RE +.LP +This leaves +.IR troff (1)-ready +output in the file +.IR sample.ind . +.\"===================================================================== +.SH "ORDERING" +By default, +.I makeindex +assumes +.IR "word ordering" ; +if the +.B \-l +option is in effect, +.I "letter ordering" +is used. In word ordering, a blank precedes any letter in the +alphabet, whereas in letter ordering, it does not count at all. This +is illustrated by the following example: +.LP +.RS +\fIword order letter order\fP +.br +sea lion seal +.br +seal sea lion +.RE +.LP +Numbers are always sorted in numeric order. For instance, +.LP +.RS +9 (nine), 123 +.br +10 (ten), see Derek, Bo +.RE +.LP +Letters are first sorted without regard to case; when words are +identical, the uppercase version precedes its lowercase counterpart. +.LP +A special symbol is defined here to be any character not appearing in +the union of digits and the English alphabetic characters. Patterns +starting with special symbols precede numbers, which precede patterns +starting with letters. As a special case, a string starting with a +digit but mixed with non-digits is considered to be a pattern starting +with a special character. +.\"===================================================================== +.SH "SPECIAL EFFECTS" +Entries such as +.LP +.RS +.nf +\fC\\indexentry{alpha}{1} +\\indexentry{alpha!beta}{3} +\\indexentry{alpha!beta!gamma}{10}\fP +.fi +.RE +.LP +in the input file will be converted to +.LP +.RS +.nf +\fC\\item alpha, 1 +\0\0\0\\subitem beta, 3 +\0\0\0\0\0\0\\subsubitem gamma, 10\fP +.fi +.RE +.LP +in the output index file. +Notice that the +.B level +symbol (`!') is used above to delimit +hierarchical levels. +.LP +It is possible to make an item appear in a designated form by +using the +.B actual +(`@') operator. For instance, +.LP +.RS +\fC\\indexentry{alpha@{\\it alpha\\/}}{1}\fP +.RE +.LP +will become +.LP +.RS +\fC\\item {\\it alpha\\/}, 1\fP +.RE +.LP +after processing. The pattern preceding `@' is +used as sort key, whereas the one following it is written to the +output file. Note that two appearances of the same key, one with and +one without the +.B actual +operator, are regarded as +.I distinct +entries. +.LP +The item, subitem, and subsubitem fields may have individual sort keys: +.LP +.RS +.nf +\fC\\indexentry{aa@{\\it aa\\/}!bb@{\\it bb\\/}!cc@{\\it cc\\/}}{1}\fP +.fi +.RE +.LP +This will be converted to +.LP +.RS +.nf +\fC\\item {\\it aa}, 1 +\0\0\0\\subitem {\\it bb}, 3 +\0\0\0\0\0\0\\subsubitem {\\it cc}, 10\fP +.fi +.RE +.LP +It is possible to encapsulate a page number with a designated +command using the +.B encap +(`|') operator: +.LP +.RS +\fC\\indexentry{alpha|bold}{1}\fP +.RE +.LP +will be converted to +.LP +.RS +\fC\\item alpha, \\bold{1}\fP +.RE +.LP +where, with a suitable definition for \*(TX, \fC\\bold{n}\fP +will expand to \fC{\\bf n}\fP. +In this example, the three output attributes associated with page +encapsulation +.BR encap_prefix , +.BR encap_infix , +and +.BR encap_suffix , +correspond to backslash, left brace, and right brace, respectively. +This mechanism allows page numbers to be set in different fonts. For +example, the page where the definition of a keyword appears can be in +one font, the location of a primary example can be in another font, +and other appearances in yet a third font. +.LP +The +.B encap +operator can also be used to create cross references in +the index: +.LP +.RS +\fC\\indexentry{alpha|see{beta}}{1}\fP +.RE +.LP +will become +.LP +.RS +\fC\\item alpha, \\see{beta}{1}\fP +.RE +.LP +in the output file, where +.LP +.RS +\fC\\see{beta}{1}\fP +.RE +.LP +will expand to +.LP +.RS +\fC{\\it see\\/} beta\fP +.RE +.LP +Note that in a cross reference like this the page number disappears. +.LP +A pair of +.B encap +concatenated with +.B range_open +(`|(') and +.B range_close +(`|)') creates an explicit page range: +.LP +.RS +.nf +\fC\\indexentry{alpha|(}{1} +\\indexentry{alpha|)}{5}\fP +.fi +.RE +.LP +will become +.LP +.RS +\fC\\item alpha, 1\(em5\fP +.RE +.LP +Intermediate pages indexed by the same key will be merged into the +range implicitly. This is especially useful when an entire section +about a particular subject is to be indexed, in which case only the +range opening and closing operators need to be inserted at the +beginning and end of the section. Explicit page range formation can +also include an extra command to set the page range in a designated +font: +.LP +.RS +.nf +\fC\\indexentry{alpha|(bold}{1} +\\indexentry{alpha|)}{5}\fP +.fi +.RE +.LP +will become +.LP +.RS +\fC\\item alpha, \\bold{1--5}\fP +.RE +.LP +Several potential problems are worth mentioning. First, entries like +.LP +.RS +.nf +\fC\\indexentry{alpha|(}{1} +\\indexentry{alpha|bold}{3} +\\indexentry{alpha|)}{5}\fP +.fi +.RE +.LP +will be interpreted as +.LP +.RS +\fC\\item alpha, \\bold{3}, 1--5\fP +.RE +.LP +but with a warning message in the transcript about encountering an +inconsistent page encapsulator. +An explicit range beginning in a Roman page number and ending +in Arabic is also considered an error. In this instance, (if +possible) the range is broken into two subranges, one in Roman and the +other in Arabic. For instance, +.LP +.RS +.nf +\fC\\indexentry{alpha|(}{i} +\\indexentry{alpha}{iv} +\\indexentry{alpha}{3} +\\indexentry{alpha|)}{7}\fP +.fi +.RE +.LP +will be turned into +.LP +.RS +\fC\\item alpha, i--iv, 3--7\fP +.RE +.LP +with a warning message in the transcript file complaining about an +illegal range formation. +.LP +Finally, every special symbol mentioned in this section may be +escaped by the +.B quote +operator (`"'). Thus +.LP +.RS +\fC\\indexentry{alpha"@beta}{1}\fP +.RE +.LP +will actually become +.LP +.RS +\fC\\item alpha@beta, 1\fP +.RE +.LP +as a result of executing +.IR makeindex . +The quoting power of +.B quote +is eliminated if it is immediately preceded +by +.B escape +(`\\'). For example, +.LP +.RS +\fC\\indexentry{f\\"ur}{1}\fP +.RE +.LP +becomes +.LP +.RS +\fC\\item f\\"ur, 1\fP +.RE +.LP +which represents an umlaut-accented `u' to the \*(TX family of +processors. +.PP +From version 2.11 of +.IR makeindex , +the +.B quote +operator may quote +.I any +character in the range 1 .\|.\|. 255. Character 0 is excluded because +it is used internally in the +.I makeindex +source code as a string terminator. With this change, sort keys can +be created for all eight-bit characters except 0. The sorting order +is +.RS +.nf + +punctuation characters (in ASCII order), +digits, +control characters (1 .\|.\|. 31), +space (32), +letters (ignoring case), +characters 127 .\|.\|. 255. + +.fi +.RE +Here is an example showing the indexing of all printable ASCII +characters other than letters and digits, assuming the default +\*(TX format. For convenience, the page number references are +the corresponding ASCII ordinal values. +.RS +.nf + +\fC\\indexentry{" @" (space)}{32} +\\indexentry{"!@"! (exclamation point)}{33} +\\indexentry{""@"" (quotation mark)}{34} +\\indexentry{"#@"\\# (sharp sign)}{35} +\\indexentry{"$@"\\$ (dollar sign)}{36} +\\indexentry{"%@"\\% (percent sign)}{37} +\\indexentry{"&@"\\& (ampersand)}{38} +\\indexentry{"<@"$<$ (left angle bracket)}{60} +\\indexentry{"=@"= (equals)}{61} +\\indexentry{">@"$>$ (right angle bracket)}{62} +\\indexentry{"?@"? (query)}{63} +\\indexentry{"@@"@ (at sign)}{64} +\\indexentry{"[@"[ (left square bracket)}{91} +\\indexentry{"\\@"\\verb=\\= (backslash)}{92} +\\indexentry{"]@"] (right square bracket)}{93} +\\indexentry{"^@"\\verb=^= (caret)}{94} +\\indexentry{"_@"\\verb=_= (underscore)}{95} +\\indexentry{"`@"\\verb=~= (grave accent)}{96} +\\indexentry{"{@"\\"{ (left brace)}{123} +\\indexentry{"|@"\\verb="|= (vertical bar)}{124} +\\indexentry{"}@"\\"} (right brace)}{125} +\\indexentry{"~@"\\verb=~= (tilde)}{126}\fP + +.fi +.RE +Characters in the actual fields following the `@' character which +have special significance to \*(TX must be represented as control +sequences, or as math mode characters. Note particularly how the +entries for the at sign, left and right braces, and the vertical +bar, are coded. The index file output by +.I makeindex +for this example looks like this: +.RS +.nf + +\fC\\begin{theindex} + + \\item ! (exclamation point), 33 + \\item " (quotation mark), 34 + \\item \\# (sharp sign), 35 + \\item \\$ (dollar sign), 36 + \\item \\% (percent sign), 37 + \\item \\& (ampersand), 38 + \\item $<$ (left angle bracket), 60 + \\item = (equals), 61 + \\item $>$ (right angle bracket), 62 + \\item ? (query), 63 + \\item @ (at sign), 64 + \\item [ (left square bracket), 91 + \\item \\verb=\\= (backslash), 92 + \\item ] (right square bracket), 93 + \\item \\verb=^= (caret), 94 + \\item \\verb=_= (underscore), 95 + \\item \\verb=~= (grave accent), 96 + \\item \\{ (left brace), 123 + \\item \\verb=|= (vertical bar), 124 + \\item \\} (right brace), 125 + \\item \\verb=~= (tilde), 126 + + \\indexspace + + \\item (space), 32 + +\\end{theindex}\fP +.fi +.RE +.\"===================================================================== +.SH "FILES" +.TP 2.2i +.I makeindex +executable file +.TP +.I $TEXMFMAIN/tex/plain/misc/idxmac.tex +\*(TX macro file used by +.I makeindex +.TP +.I $TEXMFMAIN/tex/latex/base/makeidx.sty +\*(TX macro file used by +.I makeindex +.\"===================================================================== +.SH "SEE ALSO" +ditroff(1L), +latex(1L), +make.index (1L), +qsort(3), +tex(1L), +troff(1L) +.LP +.IR "\*(Uc Enhanced troff/\*(Ts \(em An Overview" , +R. P. C. Rodgers and Conrad Huang, LSMB Technical Report 90-2, +UCSF School of Pharmacy, San Francisco, 1990. +.LP +.IR "Index Preparation and Processing" , +Pehong Chen and Michael A. Harrison, +.IR "Software: Practice and Experience" , +.BR 19 (9), +897\(en915, +September 1988. +.LP +.IR "Automating Index Preparation" , +Pehong Chen and Michael A. Harrison. Technical Report 87/347, +Computer Science Division, University of California, Berkeley, 1987 +(a \*(LX document supplied with +.IR makeindex ). +.LP +.IR "MakeIndex: An Index Processor for \*(LX" , +Leslie Lamport, February 1987 (a \*(LX document supplied +with +.IR makeindex ). +.LP +.IR "Tools for Printing Indices" , +Jon L. Bentley and Brian W. Kernighan, +.IR "Electronic Publishing \(em Origination, Dissemination, and Design" , +1(1), 3\(en18, June 1988 (also available as: Computing Science +Technical Report No. 128, +AT&T Bell Laboratories, Murray Hill, NJ 07974, 1986). +.\"===================================================================== +.SH "AUTHOR" +Pehong Chen, Chen & Harrison International Systems, Inc. +Palo Alto, California, USA . +.br +Manual page extensively revised and corrected, and +.IR troff (1) +examples created by Rick P. C. Rodgers, UCSF School +of Pharmacy . +.\"===================================================================== +.SH ACKNOWLEDGMENTS +Leslie Lamport contributed significantly to the design. +Michael Harrison provided valuable comments and suggestions. +Nelson Beebe improved on the portable version, and maintains the +source distribution for the \*(TX Users Group. +Andreas Brosig contributed to the German word ordering. +The modification to the +.B \-ms +macros was derived from a method proposed by Ravi Sethi of AT&T +Bell Laboratories. +The +.I LOG +and +.I CONTRIB +files in the +.I makeindex +source distribution record other contributions. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makeinfo.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makeinfo.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7b46491e0a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makeinfo.1 @@ -0,0 +1,205 @@ +.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.34. +.TH MAKEINFO "1" "December 2004" "makeinfo 4.8" "User Commands" +.SH NAME +makeinfo \- translate Texinfo documents +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B makeinfo +[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fITEXINFO-FILE\fR... +.SH DESCRIPTION +Translate Texinfo source documentation to various other formats, by default +Info files suitable for reading online with Emacs or standalone GNU Info. +.SS "General options:" +.TP +\fB\-\-error\-limit\fR=\fINUM\fR +quit after NUM errors (default 100). +.TP +\fB\-\-force\fR +preserve output even if errors. +.TP +\fB\-\-help\fR +display this help and exit. +.TP +\fB\-\-no\-validate\fR +suppress node cross\-reference validation. +.TP +\fB\-\-no\-warn\fR +suppress warnings (but not errors). +.TP +\fB\-\-reference\-limit\fR=\fINUM\fR +warn about at most NUM references (default 1000). +.TP +\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-verbose\fR +explain what is being done. +.TP +\fB\-\-version\fR +display version information and exit. +.SS "Output format selection (default is to produce Info):" +.TP +\fB\-\-docbook\fR +output Docbook XML rather than Info. +.TP +\fB\-\-html\fR +output HTML rather than Info. +.TP +\fB\-\-xml\fR +output Texinfo XML rather than Info. +.TP +\fB\-\-plaintext\fR +output plain text rather than Info. +.SS "General output options:" +.TP +\fB\-E\fR, \fB\-\-macro\-expand\fR FILE +output macro\-expanded source to FILE. +ignoring any @setfilename. +.TP +\fB\-\-no\-headers\fR +suppress node separators, Node: lines, and menus +from Info output (thus producing plain text) +or from HTML (thus producing shorter output); +also, write to standard output by default. +.TP +\fB\-\-no\-split\fR +suppress splitting of Info or HTML output, +generate only one output file. +.TP +\fB\-\-number\-sections\fR +output chapter and sectioning numbers. +.TP +\fB\-o\fR, \fB\-\-output\fR=\fIFILE\fR +output to FILE (directory if split HTML), +.SS "Options for Info and plain text:" +.TP +\fB\-\-enable\-encoding\fR +output accented and special characters in +Info output based on @documentencoding. +.TP +\fB\-\-fill\-column\fR=\fINUM\fR +break Info lines at NUM characters (default 72). +.TP +\fB\-\-footnote\-style\fR=\fISTYLE\fR +output footnotes in Info according to STYLE: +`separate' to put them in their own node; +`end' to put them at the end of the node +.IP +in which they are defined (default). +.TP +\fB\-\-paragraph\-indent\fR=\fIVAL\fR +indent Info paragraphs by VAL spaces (default 3). +If VAL is `none', do not indent; if VAL is +`asis', preserve existing indentation. +.TP +\fB\-\-split\-size\fR=\fINUM\fR +split Info files at size NUM (default 300000). +.SS "Options for HTML:" +.TP +\fB\-\-css\-include\fR=\fIFILE\fR +include FILE in HTML